Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
7910 Gall Blvd (3)
List of Abbreviations A A/C AIR CONDITION E EL ELEVATION AB ANCHOR BOLT ELEC ELECTRICAL ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ELEV ELEVATOR AD ADJUSTABLE, ADJACENT EMER EMERGENCY AFF ABOVE REF FINISHED EQ EQUAL FLOOR (SLAB) EQUIP EQUIPMENT AHU AIR HANDLER UNIT ESC ESCALATOR ALT ALTERNATE EWC ELECTRIC ALUM ALUMINUM WATER COOLER ANOD ANODIZED EXIST EXISTING APPROX APPROXIMATE EXP EXPANSION ARCH ARCHITECT EXT EXTERIOR AUTO AUTOMATIC F FACP FIRE ALARM B B 0 BOTTOM OF CONTROL PANEL BD BOARD FD FLOOR DRAIN BLDG BUILDING FDN FOUNDATION BM BEAM FIN FINISHED BRG BEARING FLR FLOOR BTM BOTTOM FIR FIRE RESISTANT BUR BUILT UP ROOF FR-S FIRE -RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT C CB CATCH BASIN FT FEET, FOOT CG CORNER GUARD FTG FOOTING CI CAST IRON FURR FURRING CJ CONTROL JOINT FUT FUTURE CL CENTER LINE CLG CEILING G GA GAUGE CLO CLOSET GAL GALLON CLR CLEAR GALV GALVANIZED CMU CONCRETE GB GRAB BAR MASONRY UNIT GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR CO CLEAN OUT GYP GYPSUM COL COLUMN CONC CONCRETE H HB HOSE BIBB CONST CONSTRUCTION HC HOLLOW CORE CONT CONTINUOUS HDW HARDWARE CONTR CONTRACTOR HM HOLLOW METAL CORR CORRIDOR HORIZ HORIZONTAL CT CERAMIC TILE HR HOUR CTR CENTER HT HEIGHT CU CONDENSING UNIT HTG HEATING CW COLD WATER HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING D DBL DOUBLE HW HOT WATER DEPT DEPARTMENT DET DETAIL I ID INSIDE DIAMETER DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN IN INCH DIA DIAMETER INCL INCLUDING DIM DIMENSION INSUL INSULATION DISP DISPENSER INT INTERIOR DN DOWN INV INVERT DS DOWNSPOUT DWG DRAWING J JAN JANITOR E JB JUNCTION BOX EA EACH JT JOINT EB EXPANSION BOLT EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATING' L L LENGTH FINISH SYSTEM LAM LAMINATE EJ EXPANSION JOINT L LAV LAVATORY LBL LABEL LBS POUNDS LF LINEAR FEET LT WT LIGHT WEIGHT M MAS MASONRY MAX MAXIMUM MECH MECHANICAL MFR MANUFACTURER MH MANHOLE MIN MINIMUM MIN MINIMUM, MINUTE MISC MISCELLANEOUS MLDG MOLDING MO MASONRY OPENING MR MOISTURE RESISTANT MTD MOUNTED MTL METAL MUL MULLION N NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NOM NOMINAL NTS NOT TO SCALE 0 OC ON CENTER OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER OPP OPPOSITE OVFL OVERFLOW P PL PLATE PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLAS PLASTER PLBG PLUMBING PLWD PLYWOOD PNL PANEL PR PAIR PREFAB PREFABRICATED PT POINT PT PRESSURE TREATED PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PVC POLY VINYL CLORIDE Q QT QUARRY TILE R R RADIUS, RISER, THERMAL RESISTANCE RD ROOF DRAIN RECP RECEPTACLE REF REFERENCE REFR REFRIGERATOR REG REGLET REINF REINFORCEMENT REQ REQUIRED REV REVISION RM ROOM RND ROUND RO ROUGH OPENING RTU ROOF TOP UNIT S SC SOLID CORE SCHED SCHEDULE SCP SCUPPER SD SOAP DISPENSER SEAL SEALANT SECT SECTION SF SQUARE FEET SHT SHEET SIM SIMILAR SPEC SPECIFICATION SS STAINLESS STEEL, SERVICE SINK STD STANDARD STL STEEL STOR STORAGE STRUC STRUCTURAL SUSP SUSPENDED SY SQUARE YARD T T TREAD T&G TONGUE & GROOVE TBL TABLE TELE TELEPHONE TEMP TEMPERED THK THICK TLT TOILET TO TOP OF TPD TOILET PAPER DISPENSER TS TUBE STEEL TV TELEVISION TYP TYPICAL U UON UNLESS OTHER- WISE NOTED UTIL UTILITY V VB VINYL BASE VCT VINYL COMPOSITE TILE VERT VERTICAL VEST VESTIBULE VIF VERIFY IN FIELD VTR VENT THRU ROOF VWC VINYL WALL COVERING W W WIDTH W/ WITH W/O WITHOUT WC WATER CLOSET WD WOOD WH WATER HEATER WP WATERPROOF WT WEIGHT WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC WWM WELDED WIRE METAL Y YD YARD ax - -- GRID DESIGNATION Z� BUILDING SECTION A301-2 A301-2 102 ROOM NUMBER SHEET NUMBER - SECTION NUMBER CO2 DOOR NUMBER u WALL SECTION A302-3-3 a SHEET NUMBER -� �- - SECTION NUMBER ti) WINDOW TYPE 02 STOREFRONTTYPE A501-6 SECTION DETAIL � WALLTYPE SHEET' NUMBER DETAIL. NUMBER CD KEY. NOTE A888-88) DETAIL. REFERENCE _T _1/ SHEET NUMBER DETAIL NUMBER NUMBER 16 T 0 SOMETHING C? EXTERIOR XX' XX'° ELEVATIONS TAGS / C? EXTERIOR ELEVATION A201-2 MARKERS � SHEET NUMBER ELEVATION NUMBER SPOT ELEVATION TAG � 1 n 4 ` A401 2 INTERIOR ELEVATION A %� \ MARKERS I `J NORTH ARROW / _ SHEET NUMBER - /'`��' ELEVATION NUMBER r / BRICK . " ° , ° . CONCRETE �� PLYWOOD __--L_-L/ I MASONRYCOMPACTED EARTH -� enriots 1. ALL WORK WILL COMPLY WITH LOCAL, STATE, AND NATIONAL CODES RELATED TO THIS PROJECT. 2. THE WRITTEN DIMENSIONS PREVAIL ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, DO NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD. IF ANY DISCREPANCY OCCURS, THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH ANY WORK AFFECTED BY THE DISCREPANCY. 3. CONTRACTORS TO SECURE ALL PERMITS AND REQUIRED INSPECTIONS NECESSARY TO OBTAIN A CERIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. 4. CONTRACTORS ARE TO PROVIDE ALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK, INCLUDING FIRE PROTECTION AS REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION. 5. EACH CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO REVIEW ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ISSUED BID. CHANGE ORDERS WILL NOT BE APPROVED FOR FAILURE TO DO SO. 6. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED OR OTHERWISE INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL NOT BE SUBSTITUED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ARCHITECT. 7. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL TRADES REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THIS PROJECT AS REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE THE USE OF THE FACILITY AS PLANNED. GYPSUM BOARD ----I RIGID I- L 'INSULATION D DRAINAGE p t FILL :....... MR BOARD 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES ON SITE AT TIME OF INSPECTION. 9. THIS BUILDING SHALL BE FULLY SPRINKLERED. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SIGNED AND SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW AS WELL AS LOCAL_ JURISDICTION FOR PERMITTING. NO CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL TAKE PLACE UNTIL THE APPROPRIATE PERMITS ARE OBTAINED BY THE FIRE PROTECTION SUB CONTRACTOR 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FLORIDA PRODUCT APPROVAL SUBMITTALS FOR THE FOLLOWING BUILDING COMPONENTS THAT COMPLY WITH RULE 9B-72: a. EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS b. STORE FRONT SYSTEMS (WIND VELOCITY =110 MPH) c. ROOFING AND COPING (CONFIRMING TO FM 1-120 REQUIREMENTS) d. CLADDINGS (LAPPED SIDING) LCONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THREE COPIES FOR REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL TO THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AND PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FOR ARCHITECTS REVIEW. 11. ALL PLYWOOD SHEATHING TO BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED (FRT) 12. SEE "PUBLIX CANOPY PACKAGE" DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS KEYED WITH PREFEX "PCA2 13. SEE STRUCTRUAL DRAWINGS FOR SOILS REPORT INFORMATION 14. SEE ENERGY CALCULATION ATTACHED TO THIS SUBMISSION Legal Description A TRACT OF LAND LYING IN THE NORTHEAST Y4 OF SECTION 34 AND IN THE NORTHWEST %4 OF SECTION 35, TOWNSHIP 25 SOUTH, RANGE 21 EAST, PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. THE SAME BEING A PORTION OF THE ZEPHYRHILLS COLONY COMPANT LANDS SUBDIVISION OF SAID SECTION 34 AND 35 AS SHOWN ON THE PLAT OR MAP THEREOF RECORDED IN PLAT BOOK 1, PAGE 55 OF THE PUBLIC RECORDS OF PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. ALL BEING FURTHER DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: FOR A POINT OF REFERENCE COMMENCE AT THE SOUTHEAST CORNER OF THE NORTHWEST Y4 OF SAID SECTION 35; THENCE N. 89 53'13"W., ALONG THE SOUTH BOUNDARY THEREOF, A DISTANCE OF 1638.79 FEET; THENCE N. 00 09'45" W., A DISTANCE OF 657.26 FEET TO THE INTERSECTION OF THE EASTERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY LINE OF U.S. HIGHWAY 301; THENCE NORTHERLY, ALONG SAID EASTERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY LINE, THE FOLLOWING FOUR COURSES; (2) S. 89 4632" E., A DISTANCE OF 5.00 FEET; (4) NORHTERLY, 625.74 FEET ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT (SAID CURVE HAVING A RADIUS OF 625.73 FEET) TO A POINT LYING ON THE NORTH BOUNDARY OF SAID SECTION 34; THENCE S. 89 58'32" SECTION 34 ALSO BEING THE NORTHWEST CORNER OF SAID SECTION 35; THENCE S. 89 59'50" E., ALONG THE NORTH BOUNDARY OF SAID SECTION 35, A DISTANCE OF 1015.05 FEET; THENCE S. 00 09'45" W., A DISTANCE OF 2618.58 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING. LESS AND EXCEPT THAT PORTION OF SAID TRACTS 58 AND 59 CONVEYED IN OFFICIAL RECORDS BOOK 1902, PAGE 690, PUBLIC RECORDS OF PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA. SAID LAND CONTAINING 60.76 ACRES MORE OR LESS. Vicinity Map " L�') INTERSECTION OF KOSSIK & US HWY 301 (GALL BLVD) ZEPHYR COMMONS CONSISTS OF NEW SITE CONSTRUCTION AND THE NEW CONSTRUCTION OF SEVERAL BUILDINGS, THE SCOPE OF WORK IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS IS FOR RETAIL BUILDING C ONLY. THE SITE WORK AND THE OTHER, BUILDINGS WILL BE DESIGNED, PERMITTED, AND CONSTRUCTED AS SEPARATE DRAWING PACKAGES. THIS SCOPE OF WORD IS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION OF A SHELL BUILDING (SINGLE STORY MASONRY, MERCANTILE OCCUPANCY, SPRINKLERED STRUCTURE). TENANT DEMISING WALLS, TOILETS, CEILINGS, HVAC & LIGHTING TO BE PERMITTED SEPARATELY DURING TENANT FIT UP SUBMISSION, THE BUILDING SHELL. IS SUBMITTED AS AN UNOCCUPIED BUILDING.. uode Information REFER TO A102 FOR COMPLETE CODE. INFORMATION CITY OF ZEPHYRHIIA.S THREE (3) SIGNED & SEALED 5335 8TH ST SETS FOR PERMIT SUBMISSION ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA 33542 (813) 780-0020 - PHONE (813) 780-0021 - FAX BUILDING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS] FIRE: FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 36 - (NFPA 1 & NFPA 101 W/ STATE FIRE MARSHAL AMENDMENTS) PLUMBING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, PLUMBING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS MECHANICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, MECHANICAL. - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ELECTRICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 27 .- (NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE) FUELIGAS: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, FUEL/GAS - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ACCESSIBILITY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 11 - (FLORIDA ACCESSIBILITY CODE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). ENERGY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 WI 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 13 - (FLORIDA ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION DATA OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (FBC 309) GROUPS M - MERCANTILE CONSTRUCTION TYPE (FBC 1-ABLE 601) TYPE II-B, NEW CONSTRUCTION, SPRINKLERED MAXIMUM HEIGHT AND AREA (FBC TABLE 503) HEIGHT - 55'-0" AREA-12,500 SF* ��1 - v ' ' WQLE STORY) ACTUAL AREA = 18,375 SF *THE PUBL.IX AND ADJACENT RETAIL BUILDINGS ARE CLASSIFIED AS UNLIMITED AREA AS ALLOWED BY FBC 507 CLIENT: PRIMERICA GROUP ONE, INC. 3629 MARACA LANE TAMPA, FL. 33618 (813) 933-0629 PHONE (813) 935-3420 FAX CONTACT: LARRY GARREN ARCHITECT: CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC 1925 PROSPECT AVE ORLANDO, FL 32814 (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9101 FAX CONTACT: GABRIEL ROBERTSON CIVIL AVID GROUP ENGINEER: 8659 BAYPINE ROAD, STE 304 JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA 32256 (904) 737-4001 PHONE (904) 252-7030 FAX CONTACT: TAMARA D. SCHURIAN, P.E. STRUCTURAL CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC ENGINEER: 1925 PROSPECT AVE ORLANDO, FL 32814 (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9101 FAX CONTACT: BRETT RYLANDS MECHANICAL CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC ENGINEER: 1925 PROSPECTAVE ORLANDO, FL 32814 (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9101 FAX CONTACT: JOE KEENE ELECTRICAL CUHACI & PETERSON, ARCHITECTS, LLC ENGINEER: 1925 PROSPECT AVE ORLANDO, FL 32814 (407) 661-9100 PHONE (407) 661-9101 FAX CONTACT: TIM CONWAY Gall Blvd. & Kossik Road Zeiphvrhiiis., Florida Retail C APPROVED by'Fire Marshal of Ze-phyr 'As With c ents provided'y�,'itah pi ns),47 T S'i :�� ✓TOFF' SHILL CQa r r lxr!T a AL t t: L �VAII I dG CODES, FT O?�IDA EUILM,, s CODE "dI TIOiVkL ELECTRIC CODEAN C .!7 OF L EPffYRHF1LLS ORDENTANCES �- — -- Drawing Index —------------ � F�ET 0, ONT9TLE � SHEET 20080 _�Q7 ---�2008_05-02____ PERMIT BID SET ARCHITECTURAL COVER T-1 - A100 A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 A201 A301 A302 A303 A501 A502 A601 A001-AO08 _ STRUCTURAL COVER SHEET ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL_ NOTES __ __•-______•i OVERALL PROJECT SITE PLAN SIDEWALK PLAN LIFE SAFETY PLAN _ FLOOR PLAN REFLECTED CEILING PLAN ROOF PLAN ELEVATIONS SECTIONS SECTIONS SECTIONS DETAILS DETAILS DOOR SCHEDULES & DE:TA_II_S t�TTAEI__ES SNF�T A_5�-__- SPECIFICATIONS �- GENERALNOTES MASONRY GENERAL INFORMATION PRECAST LINTEL GENERAL INFORMATION JOIST AND GIRDER GENERAL INFORMATION METAL DECK GENERAL INFORMATION _ FOUNDATIQN PLAN�— FRAMING PLAN ROOF FRAMING PLAN FRAMING PLAY_.__ WALL SECTIONS WALL SECTIONS - WALL SECTIONS FOUNDATION DETAILS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 e 9 0 2008_05-27 OWNER REVISION 0 0 0 FIRE PROTECTION (SEE GENERAL NOTE #9 FPOQ1 _ FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN & GENERAL INFORMATION -� X X E_ PLUMBING _ _ �P001 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN, NOTES, & DETAILS X� X L- X ---�-� __ MECHANICAL _ __ _ rM001 ----�[MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN, NOTES, CHEDULES & DETAILS] I--- X = C X--- X -� r---------�� --� ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN - BUILDING C X X X ELECTRICAL POWER RISER & DETAIL - BUILDING C X X X _ ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS - BUILDING C X X E101 E301 E501 �E V CO o d CD z JCD oC:) x W Q - `J � o v w� aCP � C �� ti 0 ABBREVIATIONS (IN ADDITION TO COVERSHEET ABBREV.) (ABBREVIATIONS SHOWN ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED ON THE DRAWINGS) A L AB ANCHOR BOLT LB POUNDS A/C AIR CONDITIONING L.F. LINEAR FEET AC ALTERNATING CURRENT LL LIVE LOAD ACI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL ADJ ADJUSTABLE LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL AIC AMPHERE INTERRUPTING CURRENT LONG LONGITUDINAL AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR LRA LOCK MOTOR AMPS ALUM. ALUMINUM LT LIGHT AMP AMPERE, AMPS LP LOW POINT ARCH. ARCHITECT, ARCHITECTURAL LTG LIGHTING ASHRAE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, LWC LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE REFRIGERATION AND AIR L. L. LANDLORD CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS AVG AVERAGE AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE MAX MAXIMUM MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY B MCB MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MDP MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL MECH MECHANICAL MFR MANUFACTURER BC BUILDING CONTRACTOR MH MANHOLE, METAL HALIDE BLDG BUILDING MIN MINIMUM BM BEAM MLO MAIN LUGS ONLY BOTT. BOTTOM MSB MAIN SWITCHBOARD BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT MTD MOUNTED c N C CONDUIT N/A NOT APPLICABLE C.F. CUBIC FEET NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CKT CIRCUIT MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION CENTERLINE NF NEAR FACE CLG CEILING NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION CLR CLEAR OR CLEARANCE ASSOCIATION CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT CO CLEANOUT NL NIGHT LIGHT COL. COLUMN NO. NUMBER CONC. CONCRETE, CONCENTRIC NOM NOMINAL CONT. CONTINUOUS, CONTINUATION NTS NOT TO SCALE COORD. COORDINATE CR CONDENSATE RETURN CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT O CTR CENTER CV CHECK VALVE CUH CEILING UNIT HEATER OA OUTSIDE AIR CW COLD WATER OC ON CENTER OF OUTSIDE FACE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER D OH OPPOSITE HAND OPNG OPENING OSHA OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND DC DIRECT CURRENT HEALTH ADMINISTRATION DL DEADLOAD DEG DEGREES P-0 DTL DETAIL DIA OR 0 DIAMETER DIM. DIMENSION DN DOWN PAR PARALLEL DBL DOUBLE P/C PRECAST CONCRETE DS DOWNSPOUT PC PIECE DWG DRAWING PDU POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT PERP PERPENDICULAR PH,O PHASE PT PAI NT P L PLATE PLBG PLUMBING PNL PANEL EA EACH PIV POST INDICATOR VALVE EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT EF EXHAUST FAN PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE E.J. EXPANSION JOINT EL. ELEVATION QTY. QUANTITY ELEC. ELECTRICAL EMP. EMS EMPLOYEE ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ENCL. ENCLOSURE ENT. ENTRY, ENTRANCE EQ. EQUAL EW EACH WAY RA RETURN AIR EXP EXPANSION RAD RADIUS EQUIP EQUIPMENT RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN, EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER RD ROOF DRAIN EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER RE: REFERENCE, REFER EXH EXHAUST REINF. REINFORCING EXIST. EXISTING REQD REQUIRED EXT. EXTERNAL, EXTERIOR RLA RUNNING LOAD AMPS RM ROOM RPM RTU REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE ROOFTOP UNIT FA FIRE ALARM FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT SC SITE CONTRACTOR FD FIN FIRE DAMPER, FLOOR DRAIN FINISH (ED) SCHED. SCHEDULED FIXT. FIXTURE SCHR SECONDARY CHILLED WATER RETURN FDN FOUNDATION SD SMOKE DAMPER, STORM DRAIN FLG FLANGE SECT. SECTION FTG FOOTING S S.F. SENSOR SQUARE FEET FS FAR SIDE SHT SHEET F.F. FINISHED FLOOR SIM SIMILAR FLR FLOOR SHT. MTL. SHEET METAL FLUOR. FLUORESCENT SPEC. SPECIFICATION FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANEL_ SQ. SQUARE FT. FOOT, FEET SS STAINLESS STEEL, SANITARY SEWER STC SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS STD. STANDARD STL. STEEL STIFF STIFFENER STIR. STIRRUPS GA. GAUGE SUSP. SUSPENDED GALV. GALVANIZED SYMM SYMMETRICAL GB GRADE BEAM GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GFI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GND GROUND-� GWB GYPSUM WALL BOARD T&B TOP AND BOTTOM TEF TOILET EXHAUST FAN T/FTG TOP OF FOOTING THICK THICKNESS TOJ TOP OF JOIST HGT HEIGHT TOS TOP OF STEEL HID HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE THRU T THROUGH THERMOSTAT HORIZ. HORIZONTAL TYP TYPICAL HP HORSEPOWER TS TEMPERATURE SENSOR HTR HEATER HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING U-V HVU HEATING AND VENTILATING UNIT H VY HEAVY - -- UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. U.O.N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UPS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY V VOLT 1. D. INSIDE DIAMETER VA VOLT-AMPERE I.E. INVERT ELEVATION VERT, VERTICAL IG ISOLATED GROUND VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF I NT. INTERIOR INTER IN. INTERMEDIATE INCH,INCHESw_x_y_z INSUL. INSULATION W WATT W/ WITH W/0 WITHOUT WCO WALL CLEAN OUT J-BOX JUNCTION BOX W.C. WATER CLOSET JT JOINT WL WIND LOAD WP WEATHERPROOF W.O. WWF WALL OPENING WELDED WIRE FABRIC XFMR TRANSFORMER k KIPS (1000 LBS) YD YARD kCMIL 1000 CIRCULAR MILS kV KILOVOLT kVA KILOVOLT -AMPS kW KILOWATT kWH KILOWATT-HOUR m I E FIRE PROTECTION NOTES SEE OUTLINE SPECIFICATION FOR COMPLETE FIRE PROTEC7nON SPECIFICATIONS. 15.21.A. FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN FOR THE SITE SPECIFIC, FINAL SPECIFICATION SHALL BE DESIGNED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE ADOPTED EDITION OF NFPA 13, NFPA 24, THE ADOPTED FIRE CODE AND LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND/OR AMENDMENTS TO THE ADOPTED CODES. ALL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR THE ENTIRE RETAIL SALES AND RECEIVING AREAS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS FOR STORAGE OF COMMODITIES IN SINGLE -ROW AND DOUBLE -ROW RACKS AS WELL AS SOLID SHELF GONDOLA RACKS WHICH HAVE AN OVERALL WIDTH GREATER THAN 30 INCHES AND FOR STORAGE OF COMMODITIES TO A MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 12'-0". 15.21.13. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND FULLY FUNCTIONAL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT AS NOTED IN PROTOTYPE DOCUMENTS. 15.21.C. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE DESIGNED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA STANDARDS AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES, AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS OF ALL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 15.21.D. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FOR THE ENTIRE SALES AND RECEIVING AREAS SHALL BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13 REQUIREMENTS FOR GONDOLA RACK STORAGE GREATER THAN 30 INCHES IN OVERALL WIDTH, WHICH ARE TREATED AS RACKS WITH SOLID SHELVING, IN ADDITION TO SINGLE AND DOUBLE -ROW RACK STORAGE OF CLASS I -IV NON -ENCAPSULATED COMMODITIES TO AN OVERALL HEIGHT OF 12'-0 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS TO PROTECTING SOLID SHELVING GONDOLA RACK STORAGE MAY BE FOUND IN NFPA 13, 2002 EDITION. WHEN THE 2002 EDITION IS USED FOR DESIGN, SUCH EDITION SHALL BE ADOPTED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION OR AN "ALTERNATE MATERIALS AND METHOD" SHALL BE PROPOSED AND SUCH ALTERNATE USE APPROVED BY THE JURISDICITON IN ORDER TO USE THE 2002 EDITION OF NFPA 13 AS DESIGN CRITERIA. AISLE WIDTHS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ADOPTED FIRE CODE AND NFPA 13 FOR THE SPRINKLER HEAD UTILIZED IN THE DESIGN. 15.21.E. GONDOLA RACKS SHALL UTILIZE SOLID SHELVES TO A HEIGHT OF 10'-0" A.F.F. WITH MAXIMUM STORAGE HEIGHTS NOT EXCEEDING 12'-0" AFF. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FOR THE OFFICE AREAS SHALL BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13 REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHT HAZARD OCCUPANCIES. r 15.21.F. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE OF A DESIGN WHICH IS HYDRAULICALLY CALCULATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NPFA STANDARDS 13 AND 24. THE LANDLORD'S FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE CURRENTLY AVAILABLE WATER SUPPLY, DESIGN THE FIRE PROTECTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CURRENTLY AVAILABLE WATER SUPPLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT FINAL SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS TO THE LOCAL FIRE OFFICIAL OR TO A THIRD PARTY PLAN REVIEWER FOR REVIEW WHEN DIRECTED TO DO SO BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 15.22.A. ALL MATERIALS AND DEVICES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL BE LISTED AND APPROVED FOR SUCH USE AS REQUIRED BY NFPA STANDARDS 13 AND 24. 15.22.13. PIPING JOINTS SHALL BE EITHER WELDED, THREADED, OR GROOVED ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 15.22.C. A SEPARATE ALARM CHECK VALVE IS REQUIRED ON ALL RISER ASSEMBLIES. 15.22.D. VALVES FOR SPRINKLER OPERATION SHALL BE THE LISTED, INDICATING TYPE, AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 13 AND/OR NFPA 24. VALVES INSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE OUTSIDE -SCREW -AND -YOKE (OS&Y) TYPE OR OF A TYPE MANDATED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. SUCH VALVES SHALL BE NORMALLY IN THE OPEN POSITION, AND SHALL BEAR SUPERVISORY SWITCHES CONNECTED TO AN APPROVED ELECTRONIC SUPERVISORY MONITORING SYSTEM. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR ALL COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO THE SUPERVISORY MONITORING SYSTEM. 15.22.E. CHECK VALVES AND BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE OF AN APPROVED TYPE AND BE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN COMPLIANCE WITH LISTING REQUIREMENTS AS REQUIRED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. LOCATION OF BACKFLOW ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 15.22. F. IN AREAS SUBJECT TO FREEZING, BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN LOCATIONS DETERMINED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE MAXIMUM DISTANCE ALLOWED FROM A FIRE HYDRANT TO THE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION SHALL ALSO BE DETERMINED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 15.22.G. ALL OTHER VALVES SHALL BE EITHER BRONZE OR IRON -BODY FLANGED VALVES OR IRON -BODY FLANGED OS&Y GATE VALVES OR AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 15.22.H. ALL HANGERS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 13. PIPING SHALL BE SUPPORTED AND BRACED FROM THE BUILDING STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED IN NFPA 13 AND TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED ELEVATION AND PITCH OF PIPE, TO PREVENT VIBRATION, ALLOW SEISMIC MOVEMENT AND TO SECURE PIPING IN PLACE. 15.22.1. LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A TYPE AND NUMBER OF BOXES SUCH AS "KNOX" OR "SUPRA" BRAND KEY STORAGE BOXES AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AND/OR LOCAL FIRE DEPARTMENT. LOCATION OF KEY BOX(ES) SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH LOCAL JURISDICTION AND STAPLES PROJECT MANAGEMENT TEAM. 15.23.A. SPRINKLERS SHALL BE DESIGNED, INSTALLED AND TESTED IN CONFORMANCE WITH NFPA STANDARDS 13 AND 24. 15.23.13. SPRINKLERS SHALL BE THE UPRIGHT TYPE IN AREAS WITHOUT SUSPENDED CEILINGS AND SHALL BE OF THE RECESSED PENDANT TYPE IN AREAS WITH SUSPENDED CEILINGS. SPRINKLERS IN SUSPENDED CEILING AREAS SHALL BE LOCATED AS CLOSE TO CENTER OF CEILING TILES AS POSSIBLE. 15.23.C. AT PROJECT COMPLETION, THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR HAS AFFIXED A DESIGN CALCULATION TAG TO THE RISER STATING THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO ENSURE THAT THE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR HAS PROVIDED THE NUMBER AND TYPE OF SPARE SPRINKLERS AS REQUIRED IN NFPA 13 AND THE REQUIRED PIPE WRENCH(S) IN A METAL HEAD BOX NEXT TO SPRINKLER RISER. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE METAL SPRINKLER HEAD BOX AT SPRINKLER RISER LOCATION. 15.24.A. SPRINKLERS SHALL BE LOCATED AS FOLLOWS: 1. IN RETAIL SALES AND STORAGE AREAS, SPRINKLERS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13 FOR THE APPROPRIATE HAZARD AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSIDE CLEAR CEILING HEIGHT AND THE LISTING OF THE SPRINKLER HEAD(S) PROPOSED TO BE INSTALLED. 2. IN LIGHT HAZARD AREAS, SPRINKLERS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13' FOR THE APPROPRIATE HAZARD AND IN ACCORDANCE: WITH THE CEILING HEIGHT AND LISTING OF THE SPRINKLER HEAD(S) PROPOSED TO BE INSTALLED. 15.24.B. SPRINKLER SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 13 AND THE JURISDICTIONAL_ AUTHORITIES. SPRINKLER PIPING SHALL BE TESTED AND MADE WATERTIGHT PRIOR TO ANY PAINTING AND/OR CONCEALMENT AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION DURING PROGRESS AND/OR COMPLETION OF WORK. LEAKS SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY REPAIRED. CAULKING IS NOT ALLOWED FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM LEAK PREVENTION OR REPAIR. 15.24.C. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY STAPLES AND THE LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL AUTHORITIES PRIOR TO ANY FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM TESTING. 15.24.D. SPRINKLER HEADS SHALL BE FREE OF NON -FACTORY APPLIED PAINT AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. HEADS DAMAGED BY PAINT DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REPLACED AT NO COST TO STAPLES. 15.24.E. PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION, THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE STAPLES WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1. A SIGNED COPY OF THE FORM PROVIDED IN NFPA 13 AND NFPA 24 KNOWN AS THE "CONTRACTOR'S MATERIAL AND TEST CERTIFICATE" FOR BOTH THE UNDERGROUND AND THE OVERHEAD FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS. THESE FORMS ARE REQUIRED TO BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED BY THE FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR AND SIGNED BY LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL AUTHORITIES WHO HAVE WITNESSED THE TESTING AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE SYSTEM(S); 2. COPIES OF LITERATURE AND INSTRUCTIONS FROM SYSTEM EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS DESCRIBING PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT, AND A COMPLETED COPY OF NFPA STANDARD 25, "STANDARD FOR THE INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE OF WATER -BASED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS," BOUND IN A THREE-RING BINDER PROPERLY LABELED; AND, 3. LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TWO (2) COPIES OF THE APPROVED SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN CALCULATIONS AND APPROVED PLANS, BEARING THE STAMPED APPROVAL OF THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. ONE (1) COPY SHALL BE INCLUDED WITH THE AS -BUILT DRAWINGS IN THE PLAN TUBE LOCATED IN THE TELECOM ROOM ,AND ONE (1) COPY PROVIDED WITH PROJECT CLOSEOUT. 16.09.A. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: 1. THE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 72 AND FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR WHEN REQUIRED TO DO SO BY LOCALLY ADOPTED CODES OR ORDINANCES. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE COMPLETE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. 2. FIRE ALARM CONTROL. PANEL: A. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A CONTROL PANEL MODULAR IN DESIGN UTILIZING DISTRIBUTED SOLID STATE, FIELD PROGRAMMABLE MICROPROCESSORS WITH CAPABILITY FOR EXPANSION. THE SYSTEM SHALL BE CAPABLE OF n PROVIDING AUTOMATIC. AND MANUAL_ SELF -TESTS. THE SYSTEM SHALL HAVE AN ALPHA -NUMERIC LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY, TOUCHPAD CONTROLS AND LIGHT EMITTING DIODE INDICATORS FOR AC POWER, SYSTEM ALARM AND TROUBLE, AND DISABLE. THE SYSTEM SHALL RECEIVE INFORMATION FROM AND COMMUNICATE CONTINUOUSLY WITH ALL INDICATING DEVICES AND MONITOR MODULES. THE SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH AN INTEGRAL POWER SUPPLY WITH CAPACITY TO POWER THE PANEL_ AND ALL FIRE ALARM PERIPHERALS AND SHALL BE SUPERVISED. B. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR: AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION OR AS REQUIRED BY THE ADOPTED CODES; THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR TO REPEAT, INDICATIONS OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL. THE REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SHALL RECEIVE POWER FROM THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL. C. PULL STATIONS: AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION OR AS REQUIRED BY THE ADOPTED CODES; THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE NON -BREAK GLASS, DUAL ACTION, KEY RESET, ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS. D. STROBES AND COMBINATION HORN/STROBES: THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 24 VDC, 75 CANDELA (MIN) STROBES, 90 DBA HORNS. THE INDICATING DEVICES SHALL SATISFY ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE AMERICANS' WITH DISABILITIES ACT. E. MONITOR MODULES: THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MONITOR MODULES WHERE REQUIRED TO INTERFACE WITH CONTACTS TO BE MONITORED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED FLOW AND SUPERVISORY SWITCHES AND DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS WHEN REQUIRED TO BE PROVIDED. THE MODULE SHALL BE CAPABLE OF FIELD ADDRESSING AND TESTING. 3. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING THE LOCAL REQUIREMENTS FOR A FIRE ALARM AND OR MONITORING SYSTEM AND SHALL NOTIFY STAPLES' IN WRITING OF SUCH REQUIREMENT AND INDICATE THE SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DURING THE ENGINEERING AND DESIGN PHASE OF THE PROJECT. FIRE PROTECTION NOTES (CONTINUED 4. IF LOCAL CODES REQUIRES AN INDEPENDENT AGENCY TO MONITOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, PROVISIONS ARE REQUIRED TO CONNECT STAPLES' SECURITY SYSTEM TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IN ADDITION TO THE INDEPENDENT MONITORING AGENCY CONNECTION. 5. IF THE LOCAL FIRE CODES REQUIRE A SPECIFIC AGENCY OR TYPE OF (SUCH AS U.L.) CENTRAL STATION TO MONITOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, STAPLES' SHALL BE NOTIFIED AND SHALL HAVE APPROVAL RIGHTS SELECTING THE MONITORING AGENCY. 6. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE REQUIRED TO EXECUTE A CONTRACT WITH THE APPROVED MONITORING AGENCY AS NECESSARY TO OBTAIN THE CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO DELIVERY OF THE PREMISES. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACT FOR ALARM MONITORING SERVICES SHALL HAVE PROVISIONS THAT WILL ALLOW, AT STAPLES' DISCRETION, THE CONTRACT TO BE TRANSFERRED TO STAPLES' AT THE END OF THE CONTRACT TERM. 7. THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE MICROPROCESSOR BASED 24 VDC, CLOSED CIRCUIT, ELECTRICALLY SUPERVISED, NON -CODED, INTELLIGENT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INCLUDING CONTROL EQUIPMENT, POWER SUPPLIES, SIGNAL INITIATING DEVICES, AND SIGNAL INDICATING DEVICES. THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND ALL COMPONENTS SHALL COMPLY WITH AND BE INSTALLED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL NFPA AND LOCAL CODES, AND SHALL BE UL LISTED. A CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION FORM FOUND IN NFPA 72 SHALL BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED TO THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AND A COPY SENT TO STAPLES. 8. THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL RECEIVE INPUTS FROM SIGNAL INITIATING DEVICES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FLOW SWITCHES AND SUPERVISORY SWITCHES, DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS PULL STATIONS AND OTHER MONITOR MODULES AND DEVICES AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 16.09.B. SPRINKLER SYSTEM ELECTRONICALLY SUPERVISED MONITORING SYSTEM: 1. IN JURISDICTIONS WHERE ONLY A SPRINKLER SYSTEM ELECTRONICALLY SUPERVISED MONITORING SYSTEM IS REQUIRED, SUCH SYSTEM SHALL PROVIDE ALARM OUTPUTS TO SIGNAL INDICATINGDEVICES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED COMBINATION HORN/STROBES, STROBES, BELLS, OR DEVICES AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE FIRE SPRINKLER MONITORING SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH TELEPHONE CONNECTIONS AND DIALER/MODEM TO REMOTELY INDICATE FIRE ALARM AND TROUBLE i SIGNALS AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 72 AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE FIRE SPRINKLER MONITORING SYSTEM SHALL ALSO PROVIDE THE REQUIRED SIGNALS TO THE MONITORING COMPANY IN THE TIME FRAME REQUIRED BY NFPA 72 AND OR THE CENTRAL STATION, WHICH EVER IS MORE RESTRICTIVE. 2. FIRE SPRINKLER MONITORING SYSTEM DEVICES: A. MONITOR MODULES: THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MONITOR MODULES, WHERE REQUIRED, TO INTERFACE WITH CONTACTS TO BE MONITORED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED FLOW AND SUPERVISORY SWITCHES AND DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS WHEN REQUIRED TO BE PROVIDED. THE MODULE SHALL BE CAPABLE OF FIELD ADDRESSING AND TESTING. B. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR: THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR TO REPEAT INDICATIONS OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL OR MONITORING PANEL. THE REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SHALL RECEIVE POWER FROM THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL OR MONITORING PANEL. ■ NATIONAL ACCOUNT VENDOR LIST CURRENT AS OF 07/30/07 1. STANDARD ELECTRIC MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND LIGHTING 14 JEWEL DRIVE WILMINGTON, MA 01887-0676 PHONE: 978-661-1860 W W W. STANDARDELECTRIC.COM 2. LENNOX INDUSTRIES, INC. HVAC EQUIPMENT 2100 LAKE PARK BLVD. RICHARDSON, TX 75080 PHONE: 800-367-6285 WWW.DAVELENNOX.COM 3. FLOORTECH INDUSTRIES CARPET 50 HUDSON RD. CANTON, MA 02021 PHONE: 781-589-4569 4. BESAM AUTOMATED ENTRANCE SYSTEMS AUTOMATIC DOORS i 84 TWIN RIVER DRIVE HIGHTSTOWN, NJ 08520-5213 PHONE: 866-237-2687 WWW.BESAM.COM 5. BEST ACCESS SYSTEMS DOOR HARDWARE 31 THORPE ROAD NEEDHAM, MA 02494 PHONE: 800-562-5722 EXT. 230; 781-449-6900 WWW.BESTACCESS.COM 6. REGIONAL VENDOR ASSIGNED BY STAPLES. NOTE: CONTACT STAPLES' ASSIGNED CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER TO VERIFY ASSIGNED VENDOR - AFA PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS PHONE: 781-848-6200 - VECTOR SECURITY PHONE: 215-517-51 64 7. REGIONAL VENDOR ASSIGNED BY STAPLES. NOTE: CONTACT STAPLES' ASSIGNED CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER TO VERIFY ASSIGNED VENDOR KIEFFER & CO., INC. 585 BOND ST. LINCOLNSHIRE, IL 60069 PHONE: 847-520-1255 SECURITY/BURGLAR ALARM AND EQUIPMENT EXT. BUILDING SIGNAGE ■ 1. LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO STAPLES PROJECT MANAGEMENT TEAM MINIMUM OF TWELVE (12) SITE/BUILDING CONDITION DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHS, EVERY WEEK, LABELED AND DATED. 2• THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS WITH STAPLES PROJECT MANAGEMENT TEAM BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. NOTIFY STAPLES PROJECT MANAGEMENT TEAM OF ANY CONFLICTS DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. 3. ANY REFERENCE MADE TO CONTRACTORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO L.L.C., G.C., OR E.C., INDICATES WORK WHICH IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED TO BE WORK PERFORMED BY STAPLES. SUBCONTRACTORS ARE THOSE INDIVIDUALS AND/OR COMPANIES PROVIDING SERVICES, PRODUCTS AND PORTIONS OF THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS UNDER DIRECT CONTRACT TO THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 4` THE PROJECT RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON SHEET T-1 IS TO OUTLINE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND STAPLES. 5. PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING INCLUDING SIDEWALKS, ENTRY RAMPS, AND EXIT DOORS SHALL COMPLY AT A MINIMUM WITH THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT, TITLE 111, AND LOCAL ARCHITECTURAL BARRIER BOARDS. " " DETAILS REFERRED TO AS TYPICALSHALL BE CONSIDERED AS A TYPICAL_ CONDITION REPEATED THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT, , WHETHER REFERENCED OR NOT. I I THE EVENT F OMISSION F THESE DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE SCALED FOR THE PURPOSES OF CONSTRUCTION. N E E EN O 0 SS ON 0 7. E NECESSARY DIMENSIONS OR INFORMATION, LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION. 8• LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A FULL SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TO ALL SUB -CONTRACTORS. ALL CROSS-REFERENCING SHALL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 9. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL DOORS ARE TO BE LOCATED AT 6" FROM INSIDE FACE OF PARTITION TO EDGE OF DOOR JAMB. (HINGE SIDE ONLY) 10. INSTALL METAL TRIM ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD EDGES ABUTTING OTHER MATERIALS AND WHERE GYPSUM BOARD IS STOPPED SHORT OF OTHER MATERIALS TO FORM A REVEAL OR RECESS. USE METAL CORNER BEADS ON ALL EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS. 11. NECESSARY BLOCKING SHALL BE PROVIDED IN WALLS WHERE GRAB BARS, CORNICE TRIM, WOOD BASE COUNTER TOPS AND OTHER STAPLES PROVIDED COUNTERS REQUIRE A RIGID AND SECURE ATTACHMENT TO SAID WALL. 12. ALL EXTERIOR WOOD BLOCKING OR LOCKING FASTENED TO CMU SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED. 13. SLOPE FLOOR TO DRAINS IN REST ROOMS, LOUNGE AND JANITOR AREA. 14. ALL CMU WALL JOINTS SHALL BE TOOLED TO PROVIDE A ROUND JOINT ON BOTH SIDES OF CMU WALL. 15. ALL CONDUIT, HANGERS, STUD TRACKS, ETC.... SHALL NOT BE ATTACHED TO THE ROOF DECK. ATTACH TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ONLY. 16. THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A STAMPED "APPROVED" SET OF DRAWINGS IN THE FIELD/SITE AT ALL TIMES DURING INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION. u SYMBOLS (ARCHITECTURAL) RE COVERSHEET FOR SYMBOLS REFERENCE KEY RE: COVERSHEET FOR SYMBOLS z i w z' O z cf) cn w s� w w cn z o �Lm m rI NI II of o w A L6 U-) co co Go co Lu N' N N of O co $R [If N [if 0 � C N w O � � (,� G7 a o o T-1 erall Project Site Plan 0'-0 THIS SET OF DRAWINGS IS LIMITED TO BUILDING C AND ITS ADJACENT SIDEWALKS ONLY. ALL OTHER BUILDINGS AND PARCELS SHALL BE DESIGNED, PERMITTED, AND CONSTRUCTED SEPARATELY. FOR COMPLETE SITE WORK INFORMATION, REFER TO THE CIVIL DRAWINGS PREPARED BY AVID. FOR COMPLETE LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION INFORMATION, REFER TO THE CIVIL DRAWINGS PREPARED BY AVID. FOR COMPLETE SITE LIGHTING INFORMATION, REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 7 Fire Marshal's Checklist EGRESS TRAVEL AND EXITS RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN & CODE INFO ON A102 EXIT AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A102 A FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WILL BE DESIGNED AND PERMITTED BY SMOKE DETECTORS CONTRACTOR'S SHOP DRAWINGS. RE: CODE INFORMATION ON A102 RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A102 FOR LOCATIONS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS RE: DETAIL 2 ON A102 FOR MOUNTING DETAIL RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A102 FOR LOCATIONS FIRE RATED WALLS RE: DETAILS ON A102 FOR UL ASSEMBLY DETAILS ALL DOORS SHALL HAVE HARDWARE THAT COMPLIES WITH PANIC HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR EGRESS AND ADA ACCESSIBILITY. RE: LIFESAFETY PLAN ON A102 FOR DOOR LOCATIONS RE: DOOR SCHEDULE FOR COMPLETE HARDWARE INFORMATION DUCT DETECTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS REQUIRED BY SMACNA, NFPA, DUCT DETECTORS AS WELL AS ANY OTHER APPLICABLE CODE RE: MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR HVAC INFORMATION EMERGENCY GENERATOR NONE REQUIRED. NONE PROVIDED. ALL INTERIOR FINISHES WILL BE PROVED AS PART OF THE INTERIOR FINISHES FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR WORK. SITE PLAN SHOWING ADJACENT RE: OVERALL PROJECT SITE PLAN ON A100. FOR COMPLETE SITE ROADWAYS, BUILDINGS, AND WORK AND UTILITY INFORMATION, RE: CIVIL DRAWINGS BY AVID. FIRE HYDRANTS FULL SYSTEM PROVIDED. TO BE DESIGNED AND PERMITTED BY FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR'S SHOP DRAWINGS. RE: CODE INFORMATION ON A102 FULL SYSTEM PROVIDED. TO BE DESIGNED AND PERMITTED BY SPRINKLERS CONTRACTOR'S SHOP DRAWINGS. RE: CODE INFORMATION ON A102 GAS USAGE NONE REQUIRED. NONE PROVIDED. U C N C 0 O rLn V Co 'CD: 00 U�M W0-0J U wcc E (6 u- z 'C Q. Z w (DC M U) J U C d C 0 E E 0 �yy _ M Cu � U = T O m z cd: U �-1L >+ O w ui a to mYNa. 0 a m z C) Cl) wCl) 1 m `- ¢ `/ i Lij w LL (gp®fit z 0 z � 0 m m ~ w w Cn z 0 d m 0 0C3 o N C) of of f © o 0 LLI N N N o co z rn o N Lu N CN o Q Ca w m O H w 1 REAR LEFT RIGHT FRONT 1 Retail C Life Sidewalk Plan Scale 118"=V-0" w Elevation &Grading Notes 1. ABBREVIATIONS: TOC - TOP OF CURB AT EDGE OF SIDEWALK TOS - TOP OF FLOOR SLAB INSIDE BUILDING TOG - TOP OF GRADE IN LANDSCAPE AREAS TOP - TOP OF PAVING 2. TOS=112.00'. 3. ALL SIDEWALKS TO START 1/4" BELOW THE TOS AT ALL DOORS. 4. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE THRESHOLDS THAT WILL NOT EXCEED 112" IN HEIGHT. 5, ALL SIDEWALKS TO SLOPE AWAY FROM THE BUILDING AT A RATE NOT TO EXCEED 1 % MIN AND 2% MAX. 6. FOR ALL SIDEWALKS, ALL TOC ELEVATIONS SHALL BE 6" MAX ABOVE ADJACENT TOP. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS. 7. FOR ANY LOCATIONS WHERE THERE IS GREATER THAN A 6" DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TOC AND ADJACENT TOP, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. 8. NOT USED. 9. ALL HANDICAP RAMPS TO SLOPE AT 1:14 MAX. THE SURFACE OF ALL CURB RAMPS TO HAVE RAISED DETECTABLE WARNING FINISH. REFER TO DETAIL ON THIS SHEET. 10. THE BOTTOM OF ALL HANDICAP RAMPS TO BE FLUSH WITH ADJACENT TOP. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT ELEVATIONS OF PAVING. GENERAL SITE NOTES LANDLORD GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL SITE UTILITIES, LANDSCAPING, AND PARKING. NOTIFY STAPLES REPRESENTATIVE OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. LANDLORD GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY FINAL SIGNAGE PACKAGE WITH SIGNAGE MANUFACTURER. SIGNAGE UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT AND CONTRACT. ALL SIGNAGE SHOWN FOR INFO. ONLY, ALL SIGNAGE, BANNERS AND BANNER LIGHTING UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT. LANDLORD GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFERENCE AND CONFORM TO SITE SPECIFIC LEASE EXHIBIT DOCUMENTS FOR FINAL LOCATION OF BUILDING SIGNS, PYLON DESIGN AND LOCATIONS. POWER IS REQUIRED TO ALL EXTERIOR SIGN LOCATIONS. NOTIFY STAPLES IF NOT POSSIBLE. NOT USED. FOR COMPLETE SITE REQUIREMENTS LANDLORD SHALL REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND LEASE EXHIBITS LANDLORD SHALL VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL SITE UTILITIES, LANDSCAPING, AND PARKING REQUIREMENTS STAPLES MINIMUM PARKING IS 5 CARS PER 1,000 S.F. AN ADEQUATE AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED TO SUPPORT ALL LANDSCAPING DESIGNED ON ACTUAL SITE — PENDING FROM LANDLORD COMMON AREA SOURCE/ METERED RE: SITE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL LIGHT POLE LOCATIONS AND LIGHT POLE DETAIL NOT USED MINIMUM SITE CLEARANCES SHALL BE WALKWAYS .............................. 5'-0" IN WIDTft-I DRIVE AISLES .......................... 24'-0" NA IN. PARKING ROWS ...................... 60'-0 ' E TO C PARKING STD. STALL ............. 9'_0,, X 18'-0" MIN. PARKING COMPACT STALL ...... 8'_0" X 16'-0"MIN. FINAL REQUIREMENTS TO BE COORDINATED PER LOCAL CODES. LANDLORD SHALL BE LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM OF 20% COMPACT SPACES OF THE REQUIRED SPACES ALL PARKING SPACES SHALL BE PAINTED PER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. ROOF DRAINAGE SHALL BE DISCHARGED TO APPROVED SITE DRAINAGE SYSTEM SIDEWALK SHALL BE 4" NON —REINFORCED CONCRETE WITH BROOM FINISH. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS @ 5'-0" O.C. BOTH DIRECTIONS AND EXPANSION JOINTS @ 20'-0" O.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN. MAX. 1:50 CROSS SLOPE PERMITTED. ALL TRUCK CIRCULATION ROUTES THROUGHOUT THE STAPLES SITE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO ACCOMODATE A WB-67 VEHICLE THIS BUILDING CONTAINS NO GAS PIPING. ITE: IARDRAIL CONSTRUCTION ALL MEET DESIGN QUIREMENT AS STATED IN CTION 1607 OF THE co DRIDA BUILDING CODE. x RE: S x x x x ITINUOUS EXPANSION • IT— x x 4101-3 PLANS x x x • x PIPE HANDRAIL 1 y" DIA. x 0.145 SHOP PRIMED AND PAINTED W/ CLOSS ENAMEL PAINT, COLOR SELECTED BY ARCHITECT PIPE HANDRAIL POST 1 Yz" DIA x 0.145 SHOP PRIMED AND PAINTED W/GLOSS ENAMEL PAINT, COLOR SELECTED BY ARCHITECT EPDXY GROUT SET -6" STEEL SLEEVE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR LOCATIONS EWALK PLAN FOR GRADES A101-3 JTINUOUS EXPANSION JOINT .41.4 WWF CONT. ON BOTH SIDES REBAR CONT @ TOP, BOTTOM, & MIDDLE 6 Retaining Wall & Guard Rail Scale 1 1/2"=V-0" EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISH 5/8" SMOOTH RIVER ROCK MIX INTEGRAL WITH CONCRETE SLOPE 1:14 MAX Xa r� ° \ \\ \\\ m 2 Handicap Ramp Detail SCALE: 1 1/2" = T-O" 4" THICK 3,000 PSI CONCRETE - REINFORCED W/ 6 X 6 X 1.4 X 1.4 WWF OVER COMPACTED. 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT 7, N�N 6" EXPANSION JOINT y, SINGLE -COMPONENT 0zPOLYURETHANE SEALANT /4" THICK s , _.x CONTROL JOINTy" 1" DEEP STRUCK JOINT 6' O.C. MAX RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR SPACING JOINTS AT FRONT OF BUILDING d' 4° d a< d �, , . d d a ° 1. ALL JOINTS TO BE TOOLED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 2. ALL EXTERIOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS TO BE 4" THICK 3,000 PSI CONCRETE REINFORCED WITH GRADE. 6 X 6 X 1.4 X 1.4 W.W.F. OVER COMPACTED FILL. 3. CONTROL JOINTS SPACED AT 6' OC MAX. RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR EXACT SPACING AND LOCATION OF JOINTS. 3 Sidewalk Detail SCALE: 1 1/2" = T-O" CONCRETE SIDEWALK BUILDING CIVIL W/ CONTROL JOINT — RE:A100-6 6 2 I SLOPE` 1% MIN -2% MAX. EBAB \ �/ CONTINUO STOP @ EAR \ \\�� `\\ \\ X /\ \/ ASIDE OF CJ: \\ \ \\41 -CURB TO BE 6':\\ �\ \ /'\ PAVING ABOVE ADJAC hMAX 4 Curb Detail SCALE: 1 1/2" =1'-0" LANDSCAPE 5 Curb Detail SCALE: 1 1/2" =1'-0" N PAVING RE: CIVIL I 6" QN' ROUND EDGE 2" RADIUS #4-REBAR CONTINUOUS STOP @ EACH SIDE OF CJ'S U C C O O V m co U3�; .L V CAM C 0-o0: Lu iE N V- co E Q .L CD a) CD Co ZZ CLco FL CO U Cn 0 E E 0 (D N Cu u ® LLj d co !E 0 W 0 W Y N IL o✓ a z 0 z can 0 m Eu� U) I= ~ � w w z w o a ml OI O 9 N CDO O L1Q-1 ao� 00� co w tV N N o z rn ~ U ` CD N W w o z �- cam. Y � N O C cam- C7 0 Q Lu IL 0 a U A101 A" C-2 C-3 C-4 REAR LEFT RIGHT N FRONT C-D C-C.1 C-C Retail C Life Safety Plan Scale 1/8"=V-0" ------ Y_7 — — — - I I I I I I I C-B.8 C-B.7 C-B.6 C-13.5 C-B.3 C-B.2 C-B C-A.9 I w Code Information CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS THREE (3) SIGNED & SEALED 5335 8TH ST SETS FOR PERMIT SUBMISSION ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA33542 (813) 780-0020 - PHONE (813) 780-0021 - FAX BUILDING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W12006 SUPPLEMENTALS] FIRE: FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 36 - (NFPA 1 & NFPA 101 W/ STATE FIRE MARSHAL AMENDMENTS) PLUMBING: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, PLUMBING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS MECHANICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, MECHANICAL - 2004 WI 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ELECTRICAL: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 27 - (NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE) FUEUGAS: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, FUEUGAS - 2004 W/2006 SUPPLEMENTALS ACCESSIBILITY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/ 2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 11 - (FLORIDA ACCESSIBILITY CODE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). ENERGY: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, BUILDING - 2004 W/2006 SUPPLEMENTALS CHAPTER 13 - (FLORIDA ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION). BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION DATA OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (FBC 309) GROUPS M - MERCANTILE CONSTRUCTION TYPE (FBC TABLE 601) TYPE II-B, NEW CONSTRUCTION, SPRINKLERED MAXIMUM HEIGHT AND AREA (FBC TABLE 503) HEIGHT - 55'-0" AREA -12,500 SF* TORY) �!=A — C-0.5 *THE PUBLIX AND ADJACENT RETAIL BUILDINGS ARE CLASSIFIED AS UNLIMITED AREA AS ALLOWED BY FBC 507 FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION TYPE II-B (FBC 601 & 602) ELEMENT REQUIRED FIRE RATING STRUCTURAL FRAME 0 HR EXTERIOR BEARING WALLS 0 HR C-0.9 AC-1 EXTERIOR NON BEARING WALLS 0 HR FLOOR CONSTRUCTION 0 HR ROOF CONSTRUCTION 0 HR WALLS W/ FIRE SEPARATION 2 HR DISTANCE < 5' WALLS W/ FIRE SEPARTION 1 HR DISTANCE BETWEEN 5' & 10' INTERIOR FINISHES, FBC 803 INTERIOR FINISHES SHALL BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR BUILD OUT FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS, FBC 900 SPRINKLERS, FBC 903 DESIGN STANDARD NFPA 13 AS MODIFIED BY NFPA231, NFPA231C OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS FBC 903.2.5 FIRE SPRINKLERS REQUIRED IN GROUP M C-1.6 WHEN GROSS AREA > 12,000 SQ. FT. (REQUIRED) FIRE ALARMS, FBC 907.2.7 FIRE ALARMS REQUIRED IN GROUP M WHEN OCCUPANT LOAD > 500 (REQUIRED) IN ORDER TO QUALIFY FOR THE UNLIMITED AREA ALLOWANCE, THIS BUILDING SHALL HAVE A FULL FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SIGNED AND SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AS REQUIRED FOR PERMITTING. BY CODE, THIS BUILDING IS REQUIRED TO HAVE FULL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE DRAWINGS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE SYSTEM. THE — C-2 CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SIGNED AND SEALED SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE LOCAL JURISDICTION AS REQUIRED FOR PERMITTING. MEANS OF EGRESS, FBC 1000 OCCUPANCY MERCANTILE (GRADE FLOOR AREAS) OCCUPANT LOAD, FBC TABLE 1004.1.2 1 PERSON / 30 SF (GROSS) MAX. TRAVEL DISTANCE (SPRINKLERED) 250 FT. MAX. EGRESS WIDTH/PERSON SERVED 0.2% LEVEL MINIMUM CLEAR OPENING DOORS 32" MINIMUM NUMBER OF EXITS, FBC 1018.1 2 WHEN OCCUPANT LOAD 1-500 3 WHEN OCCUPANT LOAD 501-1,000 I I I I T-D T-C T-B T-A C-A C-3 OC-4 rAv '- v v v v v v v v v v 06RE-S"S VV-bTH" '/ OrEXI I'S GROUP SIZE OCCUPANCY LOAD (REQ'D / PROVD) (REQ'D / PROV'D) B 1,400 SF 1 / 100 (GROSS) 14 S 1,800 SF 1 / 300 (GROSS) 6 M 15,175 SF 1 / 30 (GROSS) 506 TOTAL 18,375 SF 526 106" / 136" 3/3 PLUMBING, MINIMUM FACILITIES, PFBC, PLUMBING, TABLE 403.1. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES WILL BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR BUILD OUT BLOCKING IN WALL AS REQUIRED WALL MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER, POTTER ROEMER (2A10BV) MODEL # 3005 W/ 3903 MOUNTING BRACKET SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION SHOWN AS (F.E,I FIN. FLOOR 2 Fire ExtinCuisher Detail Legend SYMBOL DESCRIPTION EMERGENCY LIGHT, RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS EXIT LIGHT, RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS 00 — 2-HR RATED WALL 0 1-HR RATED WALL -- EGRESS PATH FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER, WALL MOUNTED (F.E.) RE: NFPA 65' 32" 160 EGRESS DISTANCE (FEET) EGRESS WIDTH (INCHES) EGRESS CAPACITY (PEOPLE) UL System No W-J-1055 THROUGH NETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM - NOT TO SCALE DECEMBER 02, 1997 F RATING - 2 HR T RATING - 0 HR I SECTION A -A 1. WALL ASSEMBLY MIN" THICK REINFORCED LIGHTWEIGHT OR NORMAL WEIGHT (100-150 PCF) CONCRETE. WALL MAY ALSO BE CONSTRUCTED OF ANY UL CLASSIFIED CONCRETE BLOCKS*, MAX DIAM OF OPENING IS 26". SEE CONCRETE BLOCKS (CAZT) CATEGORY IN THE FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY FOR 2. MANUFACTURER NAMES. THROUGH PENETRANT ONE METALLIC PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING TO BE INSTALLED EITHER CON- CENTRICALLY OR ECCENTRICALLY WITHIN THE FIRESTOP SYSTEM. THE ANNULAR SPACE BETWEEN PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING AND PERIPHERY OF OPENING SHALL BE MIN 0" (POINT CONTACT) TO MAX 1-3/4" PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING TO BE RIGIDLY SUPPORTED ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL ASSEMBLY. THE FOLLOWING TYPES AND SIZES OF METALLIC PIPES, CONDUIT OR TUBING MAY BE USED: A. STEEL PIPE NOM 24" DIAM (OR SMALLER) SCHEDULE 10 (OR HEAVIER) STEEL PIPE. B. IRON PIPE NOM 24" DIAM (OR SMALLER) CAST OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE. C. CONDUIT NOM 4" DIAM (OR SMALLER) STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING, NOM 6" DIAM (OR SMALLER) STEEL CONDUIT OR NOM 1 IN. DIAM (OR SMALLER) FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT. D. COPPER TUBING NOM 6" DIAM (OR SMALLER) TYPE L (OR HEAVIER) COPPER TUBING. 3. E. COPPER PIPE NOM 6" DIAM (OR SMALLER) REGULAR (OR HEAVIER) COPPER PIPE. FILL, VOID OR CAVITY MATERIAL* - SEALANT MIN 518 " THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL APPLIED WITHIN ANNULUS, FLUSH WITH BOTH SURFACES OF WALL. AT THE POINT CONTACT LOCATION BETWEEN THROUGH PENETRANT AND CONCRETE, A MIN 318 " DIAM BEAD OF FILL MATERIAL SHALL BE APPLIED AT THE CONCR. / THRU PENETRANT INTERFACE ON BOTH WALL SURFACES. SPECIFIED TECHNOLOGIES INC - SPECSEAL 100, 101, 102 OR 105 SEALANT *BEARING THE UL CLASSIFICATION MARKING UL System WW-S-0035 for Expansion Joints THIS DETAIL IS FOR ANY EXPANSION JOINTS IN FIRE RATED MASONRY WALLS ASSEMBLY RATING - 2 HR; JOINT WIDTH -1" MAX; NOT TO SCALE 1; WALL ASSEMBLY - MIN 71/2" THICK UL CLASSIFIED CONCRETE BLOCKS* OR MIN 7 112"THICK REINFORCED LIGHTWEIGHT OR NORMAL WEIGHT (100-150 PCF) STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SEE CONCRETE BLOCKS (CAZT) CATEGORY IN THE FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY FOR NAMES OF MANUFACTURERS 2. JOINT SYSTEM - MAX WIDTH OF JOINT IS 1". THE JOINT SYSTEM SHALL CONSIST OF THE FOLLOWING: A. FORMING MATERIAL - NOM 1 1/4" DIAMETER POLYETHYLENE BACKER ROD COMPRESSED AND INSTALLED INTO JOINT. PACKING MATERIAL TO BE RECESSED FROM EACH SURFACE OF WALL AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMODATE THE REQUIRED THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL. B. FILL, VOID OR CAVITY MATERIAL* - MIN 1l2" THICKNESS OF FILL MATERIAL APPLIED WITHIN THE JOINT, FLUSH WITH BOTH SURFACES OF WALL. MINNESOTA MINING & MFG CO - FD 150+ *BEARING THE UL CLASSIFICATION MARK Dt ign No $ a 46 %11,qI:h 21,, d s- I w �Yr ANCHOR CONCRETE ETE I"ROD CI', INC AGNL&SON TON ItLIIII.i'CIa.Iaa: t..1 _ .. 7,., .+rr , ., f7 Sk., rr1...0 Vfltih 7.1_._ i tzMr-.+ 1 x ®ETCO ItLOCX & PRO DUCTS INC.'.DRA E THU INH TC'i" & A: AvEs"I'DROOK. CONCRETE BLOCK CO INN �L1 1, l`iL'.ri!07 4, I , :' H._,., ' f 75 .:G'f.� ., J' a.ti t s.,AN f1pl, en l autil as1: 3 , 7 ..ii d i, uo n.,Y.T1 I!pmyx r.., .c^c! „r.� r.. i., n.'. u. rt I- } t"ICLiu�. �,� . Por€ Aud Cv:rntnk 4tvV or 6' NuaT Pgwyotr— 4 d d 1 = J r h C „� k,itiql owyai>°dPhRANW _ .•I ,uad �,i *.,*sr71± (f' ', Ici,.i,a*,. ItI'ITII1'i'�".I$IaIII�`utC �"RY ..: � C,- litat �':;1i 11, w.+ I "A i a a<ABdLA. P-4 21 iU �r Cu Cu W J �y ` F_ W H r W W C0 z 0 can 2 CO F_ w en mI 0 {n w z Q w �I 0 001 N 0 00 N 0S col CV s° Za� o 0 N W O Q („). C7 ® Lu o C=j "I G0.9 C-1 C-2 0 C-4 - CV 0 LA M A M C-D 37'-9/l/2" A501-6 \ D.S. 0 REFER TO BUILDING B c? RAWINGS FOR ALL N NFORMATION ERTAINING TO THE ADJACENT BUILDING 0 C-4.6 - C-4.7 0 C-4.9 C-5 - REAR LEFT N RIGHT FRONT 1 Retail C Life Floor Plan Scale 1/8"=V-0" C-C Q IBI -00 i . 47'-38" i _ 16'-3%" A201-4 22'-1y2" 1 2'4' 22'-1Y" 1 22'-1 " { D.S. D.S. A501-7 ROOF ACCESS HATCH AND LADDER, RE: A301-4&5 AND A502-20 [] J EDGE OF SLAB LEAVE OUT. NO SLAB IN REAR BAY OF BUILDING STEEL COLUMN. RE: STRUCTURAL C-A.6 I 1 C-A.4 I l C-A.2 I i C-A.1 4'-2 3'-10' 6'-0" -- ---' D.S. 3 01 //F RISER. RE: FP001 FIRE SPRINKLERRMATION N 1 i CV =C9 1 o Soil Poisoning for Termite Control 1. GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the application of soil poisoning for the termite control as specified herein. 1.2 Contractor's Qualifications: Applicator shall be licensed in the state where the project is located and shall be nationally known company. 1.3 Guarantee: a. Termite protection treatment shall be guaranteed for period of five years against termite infestation. Guarantee shall include any yearly renewal costs. Repairs for termite damage paid by termite company. b. At the Owner's option, at the termination of the guarantee, an extension renewal of inspection and service treatment shall be made available to the Owner. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Materials shall be a chemical formulated as an emulsible concentrate for subsequent dilution with water. Fuel oil or other petroleum -based products are permitted as a dilutent. B. For soil areas to be treated, apply the following chemical at not less than the designated concentration: 1. Premise by Bayer Corporation: 1.0 % applied in water emulsion. - C-0.5 2. Prelude by Zenech Corporation: 1.0 % applied in water emulsion. C. Other Brands of chemical components using one of the following: 1. imidacioprid: 0.5 % to 0.1 % Concentration in water emulsion. - 2. Permethrin: 1.0 % Concentration in water emulsion. D. Use treatment solutions which are not injurious to plantings in landscape areas. c 3. EXECUTION 3.1 Restrictions: do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. to C-0.9 ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soil or during inclement weather. 3.2 Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of C-1 treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may apply before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if acceptable to the Architect. 3.3 Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follow: Within building area, with or without slabs -on -grade, at the rate of 1.5 gal. per 10 sq. ft. Under foundations and footings, including horizontal and vertical surfaces of excavations, at the rate of 1 gal. per 10 sq. ft. 1� Outside building perimeter in a strip at least 2' wide and under porches, areaway, aprons, a, walks, pads, stair landings, or paved extensions, at a rate of 1 gal. per 5 sq. ft. N Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application, before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities. 3.4 Post signs in the areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. 3.5 Re -apply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application. M C-2 - C3 C1d BUILDING IS BEING PERMITTED AS AN UNOCCUPIED SHELL BUILDING. TENANT DEMISING WALLS, TOILETS, CEILINGS, HVAC DUCTING AND LIGHTING TO BE SUBMITTED SEPARATELY DURING TENANT FIT UP SUBMISSIONS. A303-2 EXTERIOR FRAMED WALL AT THE FRONT OF THE SPACE IS NOT REQUIRED TO BE FIRE RATED. RE: �q DETAIL 2 ON THIS SHEET N O ALL INTERIOR FINISHES OVER MASONRY WALLS TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF FUTURE TENANT WORK. RE: DETAIL # 3 ON THIS SHEET. I ALL DOWNSPOUTS (D.S.) TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE 4 SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. RE: CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION OF C] -UNDERGROUND LINES, - - - - 17 - C-4 ..... RETAIL C .._ 101Ic 88, 75 SQ F �1 - -- N REFER 10 BULDIN 33 D Q RE: CIVIL FOR DRAWIN 3S FOR ALL COMPLETE GRADING INFORMATION PERTAININ INFORMATION TO THE DJACENT =� BUILDING STUB COLUMN ABOVE 10'-8" 6'-0646-4-4 " L' - 96'-010-8" (SC). RE: STRUCTURAL '" " ' �L �L �I. L �L L I. w u SC u SC Sc o iv - T-3 o b 4' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . T-2 - 0 A501-8 A501-6 � W) -I- - - SIM. T-1 15'-0" 2'-8" 15'-0" 2'-8" 8'-2" 10'-8" 12 0" 10'-8" V-2" --8' 16'-5" 2'-8" 16'-5" 2'-8" I 8" 8'-6" j- ----- __._._ .... ---...._..-- _..---_.....--- -- i "= A501-9 12'-5" 2'-8' 19- 33'-6" 4'-3Y2" 642" 6-0n 64" 6-4- 9'4n 6'-0" 8'-10%" -93/" 38'-6" -6" 10" 10'-8" '-10" 1264' T-D T-C T-B T-A I I I I ILI I I I A201-1 GC.1 C-C C-B.8 C-6.7 C-B.6 GB.5 C-B.3 C-13.2 C-B C-A.9 C-A NAME Finish Schedule EE-OR A_2A-2ROOM NUMBER I FLOOR MATERIAL WALL BASE MATERIAL WALL MATERIAL CEILING MATERIAL A SEALED 1 NONE A UNFINISHED 1 ACOUSTICAL CONCRETE CMU OR GYP LAY -IN TILE B VCT TILE 2 VINYL B ENAMEL PAINTED 2 PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD GYPSUM BOARD C CERAMIC TILE 3 CERAMIC C ENAMEL PAINTED 3 NONE CONC. BLOCK IHr/2Ratted Framed Wall 2Sca RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS 3 Masonry Wall Scale 1 1/2"=1'-0" RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS RE: STRUCTURAL FOR COMPLETE FRAMING INFORMATION CONTINUOUS TRACK AT TOP OF WALL MTL STUD FRAMING 60OS200-43 @ 16"OC R-19 BATT INSULATION GYP BOARD & FRAMING ALL THE WAY TO THE UNDERSIDE OF THE ROOF STRUCTURE ABOVE. CONTINUOUS STUD TRACK 600T200-43 CONCR. FLOOR SLAB RE: STRUCTURAL 8" MASONRY WALL RE:STRUCTURAL CEILING AND INTERIOR FINISH TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF FUTURE TENANT INTERIOR BUILD OUT EXTERIOR FINISH RE: ELEVATIONS COREFILL 500 FOAM INSULATION IN ALL MASONRY CELLS NOT REQUIRED BY STRUCT. TO BE GROUT OR CONCRETE FILLED. RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR ALL SIDEWALK INFORMATION CONCR. FLOOR SLAB RE:STRUCTURAL CONT. FLASHING. EXTEND MIN 8" UP BEHIND STUCCO. SEAL TOP OF FLASHING TO BUILDING Wl "PEEL & STICK" MEMBRANE. STUCCO TERMINATED ON TOP OF SILL W/ FRY REGLET JDM-625 (1/2" GAP). CONT. MASONRY WALL. BACKER ROD & SEALANT. RE: STRUCT. SILL PIECE. RE: ELEVATIONS GROUT FILL ALL: MASONRY CELLS PROVIDE OPEN HEAD JOINT WEEPS @ 24" OC BELOW GRADE OR TUBE WEEPS @ 16" OC. (1/4" MIN DIA.) ADHESIVE, SELF HEALING, WATER PROOF BARRIER. SEAL TOP OF BARRIER TO BUILDING W/ "PEEL & STICK" MEMBRANE. STONE VENEER. ATTACHED TO BUILDING W/ STUCCO OVER WATER PROOF BARRIER. -�� CONT. FLASHING. EXTEND MIN. 8" UP BEHIND ADHESIVE, SELF WATER PROOF BARRIER. HEALING, WATER PROOF BARRIER. WEEP HOLES. SEE NOTE ABOVE. SEAL TOP OF BARRIER TO BUILDING W/ "PEEL CONCRETE SIDEWALK & STICK" MEMBRANE. �-- ----- STUCCO OVER EXPOSED FACE 3/4" WATER PROOF PROTECTIVE BOARD OVER BARRIER FROM 6" ABOVE - - GRADE DOWN TO 1 TOP OF FOOTING. PROVIDE MASONRY - EZFLOW" VENEER ATTACHED GEOTEXTILE ji TO CMU WALL W/TIES. BARRIER i' `��j J r': AROUND FILL. n I, CONT. FLASHING. EXTEND MIN. 8" UP BEHIND WATER r' '� '-�.�� ✓��` _ v j -, PROOF BARRIER. � �� J �� �I •1 �� FLOOR SLAB W/ EXP. ��� (� WEEP HOLES. JOINT. RE: STRUCT. SEE NOTE ABOVE. �L C .. ,`�n., FOUNDATION. CONT. FLASHING. RE: STRUCT. ` z �MIN. 8" DOWN OVER 4 ' C' �PROTECTIVE BOARD � "EZFLOW' GEOTEXTILE BARRIER AROUND DRAIN. a FRENCH DRAIN " >( ; (' (8" MIN DIA). RE: SIDEWALK PLAN G FOR ROUTING WATER PROOF BARRIER & PROTECTIVE BOARD. SEE Breezeway Wall Detail NOTES ABOVE 4 Scale 1 1/2"=1'-0" CONT. FLASHING. EXTEND MIN 8" UP BEHIND STUCCO. SEAL TOP OF FLASHING TO BUILDING W/ "PEEL & STICK" MEMBRANE. STUCCO TERMINATED ON TOP OF SILL W/ FRY REGLET JDM-625 (1/2' GAP). CONT. MASONRY WALL. BACKER ROD & SEALANT. RE: STRUCT. SILL PIECE. RE: ELEVATIONS GROUT FILL ALL MASONRY CELLS = PROVIDE OPEN HEAD JOINT WEEPS @ 24" OC BELOW GRADE OR TUBE WEEPS @ 16" OC. (1/4" MIN DIA.) ADHESIVE, SELF HEALING, WATER PROOF BARRIER. SEAL TOP OF BARRIER TO BUILDING W/ "PEEL & STICK" MEMBRANE. STONE VENEER. ATTACHED TO BUILDING W/ STUCCO OVER WATER PROOF BARRIER. CONT. FLASHING. EXTEND MIN. 8" UP BEHIND ADHESIVE, SELF WATER PROOF BARRIER. HEALING, WATER PROOF BARRIER, IWEEP HOLES. SEE NOTE ABOVE. SEAL TOP OF BARRIER TO BUILDING WI "PEEL GRAVEL LOOSE FILL & STICK" MEMBRANE. RE: CIVIL FOR 9 r----- STUCCO OVER ALL LANDSCAPE 3/4" WATER PROOF a EXPOSED FACE INFORMATION PROTECTIVE BOARD ✓. J , ; OVER BARRIER;' %,1%W" 1 WATER PROOF BARRIER & PROTECTIVE BOARD. SEE NOTES ABOVE Kossik Rd "EZFLOW' I GEOTEXTILE Jr��^ J.(• rl! ?( BARRIER AROUND FILL. CONT. FLASHING. EXTEND MIN. 8" UP BEHIND WATER PROOF BARRIER. JI c1 WEEP HOLES. (_. SEE NOTE ABOVE. J,( CONT. FLASHING. MIN. 8" DOWN OVER PROTECTIVE BOARD "EZFLOW" %? GEOTEXTILE ` ( BARRIER AROUND DRAIN. ,7 FRENCH DRAIN ` (8" MIN DIA). RE: �, �_J( SIDEWALK PLAN ' FOR ROUTING 5 Breezeway Wall Detail Scale 1 1/2"=1'4' Key Plan N U O CL o ^ t V (V oD 0 _J . Mom. U (h ^�♦ W N J O '. -p U W ECCN Cc G d IL . .� n. N ACD CV E_> €. ZLLJ �co M MHV),E U Cl) 0 E 0 U CID co N� co �_i Lr` c U ad :E z �o w 0 .Nt mYNa a _CU a. L 0 o w L W L x Cn Cn z 0° z W' LL' W i - fCn z o z C0 O U) co �= w w cn z UJ of al Oil O N co C1 CD �N N NO Z cn o � ¢ 0 W U cc N c-' W a' N W 2i ¢ U 0 a o v C-0.9 C-1 — F-F-FNIML 1 Lux REAR LEFT � RIGHT FRONT C-D C-C.1 C-C 1 Retail C Reflected Ceiling Plan Scale 1/8"=1'-0" C-13.8 C-13.7 C-13.6 C-13.5 PROVIDE SIGNED S ED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENG NEE R TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED OR PERMITTING. RE: ELEVATIONS F ALL LOCATION C-13.3 C-B.2 C-B C-A.9 T-D T-C T-B T-A C-A Legend SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ® UNDER CANOPY LIGHT FIXTURE. RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS ROOF ACCESS HATCH. RE: A301-4 & DETAILS CANOPY ACCESS HATCH. RE: A501-5 DECORATIVE COACH LIGHT. RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS Q REAR EXIT DOOR LIGHT. RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS EMERGENCY LIGHT, RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS ® EXIT LIGHT, RE: ELECTRICAL DWGS I'm u V N Q �O CuCcc) Co U O, Cc-p U w O N 2ca LL �L > O- a)co 4— U I t r O E E O 4 t r i (D co J CU u— III v = N O �' w = 06 >+ O W U) C- � �YNM i a z 0 z U3 �= w w cnUJ z � o 0-1 m� OI O O CV m u'9 to Qw °DI CoI 00 W w N N R o Co z rn o W o N Q Lo N O Z �= �• Y w of C7 � 'I C-0.s C-1 — _ c-z RE: BUILDING B DRAWINGS FOR INFORMATION ON ADJACENT BUILDING ROOF SYSTEM a-— EXPANSION TYPE PAR CAP ALONG THIS ENTI WALL. TO BE CONNE( ADJACENT BLDG TO P FOR EXPANSION. RE: a -- REAR LEFT RIGHT FRONT 1 Retail C Roof Plan Scale 1/8"=V-0" 1. ALL GUTTERS ALONG THE FRONT PITCHED AREA (AREAS A, B, & C) TO BE 5" X 5" 2. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT SERVE AREAS A, B, & C TO BE 3" DIA. 3. ALL PRIMARY SCUPPERS AND OVERFLOW SCUPPERS TO BE 8" X 16" MIN. 4. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT DRAIN ONTO AREA E TO BE 6" X 6" 5. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT DRAIN AREA E TO BE 8" X 8" MIN. 6. ALL DOWNSPOUTS THAT DRAIN AREAS A, B, C OR E TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO THE SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION OF STORM LINES. 7. ALL ELEMENTS OF THE ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM HAVE BEEN SIZED TO COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 1106 OF THE PLUMBING SECTION OF THE FBC. Lu w z z w v N v' o o cc U Cd 00 o ^l a; 64 w Cco rm O cc d o N n� N a� w c CU CO � M U � -0 � U Cu Cu m R3 L- 0) CL> 49 Cu 4-1 cM 4 U) cf) C�� W 06 = U z-L >, W� Cn CL C N 0— d _C w J WLu A/ I�ir W Cn Cn z J � OCl � z ¢` WW L U) OI z U) I O CJ] D U) z O m O I— ti� O O Nj, -6 W M CI 0I 0I J o 0 0 W N N N R' O z CAI 00 O 4C�D W —i N 0 w CD !I -- - _ _� .� il.: di � ��T,u ..aii 1. �:LIL ��:. ,, ri..��... r._ .�, .�.. � � i. �, � o� Wed. t ..i u1,1.ieA� il�d...t.�,.ue�i�'l� �u.u, �.�niiul �u. YWY .Y�i1'Gklll al. P TO STOREFRONT 10'-0" AFF 0'-0" AFF ` REFER TO CIVIL FOR a C-D Elevation3 Left (Nofth) �. Scale 0 4 Rear (East) Elevation - Building C DETAIL Scale 1/8"=V-0" CV O Q W �1016 COMPRESSIBLE JT. FILLER NEW RAMP LEAN CONCRETE OR FLOWABLE BACKFILL -- GRAVEL BASE e❑ 1'-0" PRE -FINISHED RED BAND TO MATCH RED RIBBED METAL 1 12 0 \ V-6" Lo��1� 4 40 ° 0 �00 �� 004n��-7Ooc'�Op 0Z p Oo°co°pp�`�) OGO gOoo p O o� Front Bollard Detail SCALE: NTS STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL A6-5 -1 PREFABRICATED CONCRETE r BOLLARD. WAUSAU TILE o e" BOLLARD # TF608712" 0 x z 60" MEDIUM GRAY WI GRAY MATRIX AGGREGATE FINISH. BURY 2'-0" DEEP TYP. AS REQUIRED PER 0 I . MFG.& LOCAL SITE CONDITIONS SCALE: NTS STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL A6-6 FILL W/CONC. ROUND TOP AS INDICATED STD. (SCH. 40) STEEL 8"0 BOLLARD PAINTED SAFETY YELLOW CONCRETE FILL AT ALL EXTERIOR STEEL BOLLARD LOCATIONS LEAN CONCRETE OR FLOWABLE BACKFILL GRAVEL BASE EXTERIOR FINISH NOTES 1) ALL EXTERIOR METALS (DOORS, FRAMES, DOWNSPOUTS, BOLLARDS, ETC.) SHALL BE PAINTED AS FOLLOWS: - ONE COAT PRIMER (TYPE "EE") - TWO COATS HIGH GLOSS ALKYD ENAMEL PAINT SAFSDF 2) ALL EXTERIOR MASONRY AND STUCCO SHALL BE PAINTED AS FOLLOWS: - ONE COAT PRIMER (TYPE "JJ") - TWO COATS HIGH GLOSS ALKYD ENAMEL PAINT EXTERIOR PRIMERS PLAN MATERIAL/ STYLE/ KEY DESCRIPTION MFR. CAT. NO. COLOR REMARKS KEM KROMIK UNIVERSAL SHERWIN USE WI FINISH E2 EE METAL PRIMER WILLIAMS 654WZ1 WHITE & E4 JJ LOXON BLOCK SEALER SHERWIN WILLIAMS A24W200 WHITE SW2133 USE W/ FINISH E3 , E5 & E8 140 C) ®T� o O U cVc1, Ed mo- 0� •��Iw o ¢o U 0 U V II O of C� Cu a Cu T- -V M am ^L v c L-0J'U Cu Cu u- CD C- a a CD> wto Cu Co �_(!a' J U I� Cum 9' U CD CD O w i U Con) 0- u) Lu 0 �YNCu a I w Cu J h /7 \ F=- Vj W UJw Cn crn z >C� w Q, n T` ¢Q 0 wJ > w w B d U) V z 0 Co m Cn z 0 > F- UJ F- vi m ui z 0 W Q W J Of fl-i O Cl) �I 5 NI O Lo 0I O C.,ACV II N LA CI O o III Z a CDo F- M N W = W o N tv z �: Y G' Q'I W S A201 COVER GASKET (ALL AROUND) G SPRING LATCH WITH INSIDE -OUTSIDE HANDLES AND PADLOCK HASP COVER LINER RED VINYL GRIP LADDER SAFETY POST SEE DIET. A301 rAUTOMATIC HOLD OPEN ARM AND — COVER RELEASE CURB WITH INTEGRAL CAPFLASHING I IZ-"— AND CLIP COMBINATION LOCK STRIKE AND PADLOCK HASP. PROVIDE BEST CORE LOCK. LIFTING MECHANISM i HOUSING 4 Roof Hatch Detail NTS STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAILASI.1 -10 �C 6" _ V-0" _ ROOF HATCH SHALL BE PRIMED & TWO COATS OF GLOSS PAINT 1" FIBERGLASS INSULATION THROUGHOUT COVER HINGE 1" RIGID FIBERBOARD INSULATION AROUND OUTSIDE OF CURB T-0" T-10" 1'-0" 12 12 18 118 n RE: A502-2 FOR ROOF I / \ RIDGE DETAIL SELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVER "ICE & WATER SHEILD" FELT / / ! OVER 5/8" FRT / / ! PLYWOOD RE: A501-3 FOR ROOF II II II II II II II II II II II II II LI II NOTE: POST TO BE CENTERED AT OPENING. BALANCING SPRING SIDE VIEW ENLARGED VIEW WITF SAFETY POST UP AND LOCKED BILCO LADDER SAFETY POST FROM TOP OF RUNG STAINLESS STEEL MOUNTING BOLTS 318-16 x 2" ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING -- CHANNEL FRONT VIEW 5 Ladder Safety Post NTS STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL AS1.1-10 SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT RIGHT. I I TERMINATION DETAIL — / / / II / PREFIN ALUM GUTTER TIED INTO I / I DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN \ / ! RE: A501-3 FOR TYP BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE / / ! PARAPET WALL DETAIL 12 TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM j DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. 5 I RE: ROOF PLAN & A502-4 I I ! ! %" PER FT T O MASONRY/ Allik TRUSS BEARING ------------------ MIN SLOPE 20'-0" AFF JOIST BEARING 19'-4" AFF / II I ! RE: A502-1 FOR ROOF EAVE DETAIL II LIGHT GAUGE TRUSSES. ! RE: STRUCTURAL EIFS TRIM. RE: — A502-6 3/4" STUCCO OVER 518" DENS GLASS SHEATHING BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, & SILL PIECE SIDEWALK. SLOPE - AWAY FROM BUILDI� 1%MIN -2%MAX TO FLR SLAB 0'4' AFF 1 Front Wall Section Scale 1/2"=V-0" CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION — UNDER TRUSS TO EXTERIOR WALL REFER TO ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF MEMBRANE INFORMATION ROOF FRAMING, RE: STRUCTURAL T-T' ALL FINISHES ON THE INTERIOR SIDE JF THE MASONRY WALLS TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT BUILD OUT. PROVIDE CORE FILL 500 FOAM INSULATION IN ALL MASONRY CELLS NOT REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL TO BE FILLED WITH GROUT OR MORTAR. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY). RE: STRUCTURAL FOR ALL BOND BEAM AND FILLED CELL INFORMATION. LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL. MASONRY WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL. PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN SIDEWALK & BASE CURB PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN BASE CURB & WALL CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB. PROVIDE EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN SLAB & WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL. WALL FOOTING. RE: STRUCTURAL. EXTEND AS NEEDED FOR PILASTERS AND BASE CURBS. PULL-UP LOOP VINYL LIFT HANDLE INSTRUCTIONS SQ. TUBING LOCK -UP BRACKET 1 1/2" SQ. TUBING LADDER RUNG I ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING FITS LADDERS WITH RUNG SPACING UP TO ABOUT 14" CENTER TO CENTER RELEASE ROD SIDE VIEW NOTE: LOCATE PER MFG. CENTER ON HATCH OPENING T-10" 1'-0" SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT RIGHT. 12 12 ROOF EAVE. RE: A502-1, SIM I 18 18 RE: A502-2 FOR ROOF OL TO DORMER FRAMING I 12 / \ RIDGE DETAIL 2T-41/2" AFF 6 SELF-SEALING SPANDREL WINDOW. RE: A601 ! ! / / ! SHINGLES OVER "ICE & / / I WATER SHEILD" FELT ! / / OVER 5/8" FRT EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-9 PLYWOOD II I / / ! RE: A501-3 FOR ROOF SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT RIGHT. \ I / / / / i ( TERMINATION DETAIL PREFIN ALUM GUTTER TIED INTO I I / / DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN RE: A501-3 FOR TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM 12 ! / DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. 5 RE: ROOF PLAN & A502-4 I I Y4" PER FT TO MASONRY �� —--_---------------- MIN SLOPE TRUSS BEARING — —------__—_---------__--- 20'-0" AFF JOIST BEARING p - -- -- — 19'4' AFF \ T/ RE: A502-1 FOR ROOF— EAVE DETAIL I LIGHT GAUGE TRUSSES. ! RE:STRUCTURAL EIFS TRIM BEYOND EIFS TRIM, RE: DETAIL STUCCO FINISH ON PILASTER BEYOND STUCCO OVER CMU BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, & SILL PIECE BEYOND SIDEWALK. SLOPE - AWAY FROM BUILDIP 1 % MIN - 2% MAX OIL TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF I 2 Front Wall Section Scale 112"=V-0" I1L �C 5 V-6" 16" 6" 2'-0" CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION -' UNDER TRUSS TO EXTERIOR WALL REFER TO ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF MEMBRANE INFORMATION ROOF FRAMING, RE: STRUCTURAL T-7" ALL FINISHES ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE MASONRY WALLS TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT BUILD OUT. PROVIDE CORE FILL 500 FOAM INSULATION IN ALL MASONRY CELLS NOT REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL TO BE FILLED WITH GROUT OR MORTAR. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY). RE: STRUCTURAL FOR ALL BOND BEAM AND FILLED CELL INFORMATION. LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING OF PILASTER BEYOND. RE: STRUCTURAL. MASONRY WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL. PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN SIDEWALK & WALL PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN BASE CURB & WALL CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB. PROVIDE EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN SLAB & WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL. WALL FOOTING. RE: STRUCTURAL. EXTEND AS NEEDED FOR PILASTERS AND BASE CURBS. STAINLESS STEEL FLAG POLES AND BASE. G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS 1 NEEDED FOR PERMITTING SELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVER "II & WATER SHEILD" FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD LIGHT GAUGE TRUSSES. RE: STRUCTURAL 12 12 F 11:i��Y►y��,_C3Li� iV]�IYI�1d7 T-1 � T-2 � 4" 9" 2'-10" / u! I I 1 ROOF EAVE. RE:1-A502 T 0 FRAMED L OL OPENING 29'-11"AFF 4" EAVE VENT I 1 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" I I 1 I DENSGLASS SHEATHING I j CULTURED STONE VENEER I I 6" X 4" EIFS AROUND WINDOW SPANDREL WINDOW BEYOND I STEEL BRACING. RE: STRUCTURAL I B 0 FRAMED P OPENINGON 23'-8" AFF I TO BEAM 23'-2" AFF SPANDREL WINDOW EIFS TRIM. RE: A501 STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL CULTURED STONE VENEER OVER FRT PLYWOOD SHEATHING LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL STEEL BRACING. RE: ------ STRUCTURAL STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL B 0 BEAM 13'-0" AFF B 0 CLNG FRAMING 12'-6" AFF B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING AT ARCH PEAK 1 V-0" AFF CONTINUE CULTURED STONE VENEER ON UNDERSIDE OF SOFFITS AND RETURN UP INSIDE OF WALL TO STUCCO CEILING OL TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF 3 Tower Section Scale 1/2"=V-0" 12 18 / \\ \ 18 � \ \ T-3 � T-4 � 5'-4"5'-4" \ \ 2'-10" 9" \ 12 \ I12 I I \\ J - — — — — — ---------------------------------- — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — I ----- ---- I I ! I El I ID _ ! n !L 1 ! ! ! STONE VENEER OVER ! SOFFIT BEYOND / ! 4" CONTINUOUS CEILING VENT \ I I I I I ! I 1 I I I I ! STUCCO OVER SHEATHING ! I I I I I I ( ! I I 1 I ARCHED SOFFIT BEYOND ! I 1 — STEEL COLUMN BEYOND. ! ! ! 1 I ! ! I 1 ! ! I I I ! I ! RE: STRUCTURAL I ! ! 1 I ! I I I I ! ! ! STONE VENEER ON ! I I I I I I COLUMNS BEYOND I ! ! I 1 I I I I I BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT,- ! ! AND SILL BEYOND I 1 ! PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT I ! ! BETWEEN SIDEWALK AND ALL I ! ! BASE CURBS AT COLUMNS. ! ( I I I I 1 1 I I RE: SIDEWALK PLAN FOR ALL ! I ! I I ! HARDSCAPE INFORMATION INCLUDING SLOPE I I I I ! I ! ! I ! COLUMN FOOTINGS BEYOND. I I I I I I ! RE: STRUCTURAL -----L 1-- — I— --- --I —�—L --- I I L------ —I -- I------J I � L — I � --L------J 0 O o 0 0 m 0 ^l U 1 4. >o .mow o �o a�,8 �4, U � ,S� a 3 U Cn 0 C) Cu IJi UZ)TO' w 06 L U �Y U LU Cl) fl. in � Y N 0Cu - o co z m o t- ju zn to N w L N o Z g U o w U CD A301 ,. ..,. i � � -i, tl i i � .�,[,._ :�� .mil. i�il �luu��wk,P, I�l u.i.ir uNs ili1Y ..,�I 4 Building Section Scale 1/8"=V-0" SELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVER "ll & WATER SHIELD" FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD PREFIN ALUM. GUTTER TIED INTO DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. TO FRAMING 29'4' AFF RE: A502-1 FOR ROOF EAVE DETAIL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING RE:STRUCTURAL 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" DENSGLASS SHEATHING � TRUSS BEARING 22'-8" AFF AFF JOIST BEARING 19'4' AFF REPLACE DENS GLASS WITH FRT PLYWOOD FOR 6' X 25' AREA BEHIND FUTURE SIGN. RE: ELEVATIONS. STAPLES SIGN, BY TENANT - STUCCO OVER SHEATHING - B 0 BEAM 11'-6" AFF B 0 CLNG FRAMING 11'-0" AFF B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING 10'-0" AFF CANVAS AWNING OVER ALUM. FRAME. _/ G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF 1 Front Wall Section Scale 1/2"=1'-0" OIL JOIST BEARING 19'-4" AFF OIL TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF i C-6 i T-6" 10" C-6 �C-4.91 �CG-4.6 I I I I I ICI i C-4.9 6 -4 1-2 C-4 C-3 G2 C-1.11 - — — — — --— — — — — — — — — — — — — —-- II II 11 II II II „ I I II II II II „ I I II II u RE: A502-2 FOR ROOF RIDGE DETAIL 12 /�\ 12 18 / / / / \ \ 18 SHINGLES. SEE NOTE AT LEFT / / I / / I RE: A501-3 FOR ROOF TERMINATION DETAIL / / I RE: A501-3 FOR TYP / / PARAPET WALL DETAIL BACK OF PARAPET WALL BEYOND II II II II I // II RAIN DIVERTER OVER DOOR. RE: DETAIL WATER-RESISTANT CAULK AROUND / PERIMETER OF FRAME X" X 36" WEATHER PROOF METAL ACCESS DOOR & FRAME. 5 RE: DOOR SCHEDULE & DETAILS. PROVIDE TWO 6" X 24" LOUVERED 12 VENTS W/ BIRD SCREENS. (NOT (��--------.__—_---_—___--__---------- SHOWN IN THIS SECTION. RE: — — — — — — _ _ _1_ — — — — — — _ — ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS. REFER TO ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF I MEMBRANE INFORMATION I I I I I 1/4' PER FT MIN SLOPE I 1k I - -- —-- ---- I II I � I I --------- ----- II 1 /I I --- I I I— LIGHT GAUGE TRUSSES. RE. I \ \ STRUCTURAL.. � II ROOF FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL I 518" GYP BOARD. SHEATHING ON INSIDE LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: - OF ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS. STRUCTURAL. EXTEND SHEATHING TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF STRUCTURE ABOVE STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: I I - LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL. I STRUCTURAL, I I I I ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS TO BE FILLED WITH R19 BATT INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY). I --- --- ------ I — — — — — B BEAM — — 10'-2" AFF TO STOREFRONT — — — — FRAMED OPENING _O_ I I 7 , 1 U-0" AFF I I ALL GLAZING TO RECEIVE 3M SECURITY FILM PER STAPLES STUCCO SOFFIT BEYOND J SPECIFICATION. I I I I I I 4" CONTINUOUS CEILING VENT I I STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL I I I I I I STUCCO OVER SHEATHING I TRANSOM WINDOW ABOVE DOOR. RE: WINDOW SCHEDULE & DETAILS I EIFS TRIM BEYOND AUTOMATIC DOOR. RE: DOOR SCHEDULE & DETAILS STUCCO FINISH ON COLUMNS AND PILASTERS BEYOND. PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN SIDEWALKS & BASE CURBS STEEL COLUMN. RE: STRUCTURAL PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, AND I BASE CURBS & FLOOR SLAB SILL PIECE BEYOND. I I I I I I CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB. PROVIDE SIDEWALK. SLOPE AWAY FROM I EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN SLAB & BUILDING 1% MIN - 2% MAX. RE: I SIDEWALK. RE: STRUCTURAL. SIDEWALK PLAN. I COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE: I COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE: -- — — L — — — — — STRUCTURAL. EXTEND AS NEEDED L_ — — — — — — STRUCTURAL. EXTEND AS NEEDED r FOR PILASTERS AND BASE CURBS. r FOR PILASTERS AND BASE CURBS. I I L------------J L------------J i C-4.6 i —,�— --- -- — — — II � o� wp��.z �;zLL.¢o II UUOww�l- II co w rn II ?oWo I z o~, I %C-1 PREFIN ALUM. PARAPET i CAP. RE: A501-1 RE: A501-1 FOR TYP — TO MASONRY PARAPET WALL DETAIL 2.0-0" AFF REFER TO ROOF PLAN � I i 12" X 4-1/2" EIFS TRIM FOR ROOF MEMBRANE INFORMATION 1/4" / FT MIN SLOPE STRUCTURAL STEEL, RE:STRUCTURAL RE: STRUCTURAL ALL FINISHES ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE MASONRY WALLS TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT BUILD OUT. CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN FLOOR SLAB & WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER RE:STRUCTURAL CONT FOOTING RE: STRUCTLI 2 Rear Wall Section Scale 1/2"=V-0" i CC 0.5 I i i i i i TO MASONRY Ak 2Y-0" AFF JOIST BEARING 15'-6" AFF JOIST BEARING Ah 16'-0" AFF EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-6 PROVIDE CORE FILL 500 FOAM INSULATION IN ALL MASONRY CELLS NOT REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL TO BE FILLED WITH GROUT OR MORTAR. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY). II LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING, RE: STRUCTURAL. II 3/4" STUCCO OVER 5/8" II DENS GLASS SHEATHING II I II STONE SILL I� CULTURED STONE VENEER OVER FRT ❑ PLYWOOD SHEATHING I❑ SLOPE SIDEWALK AWAY FROM El ❑ BUILDING 1% MIN - 2% MAX ❑ TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN RIBBON CURB & - SIDEWALK AND BETWEEN RIBBON CURB & WALL T 0 FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF 3 Rear Wall Section Scale 1/2"=T-0" OC 5 PREFIN ALUM. PARAPET- o CAP. RE: A501-1, SIM RE: A501-1 FOR TYP - PARAPET WALL DETAIL. \ I REFER TO ROOF PLAN INFORMATIONFOR ROOF H1 MBRANE� 1/4" / FT MIN SLOPE I NI STRUCTURALSTEEL, — RE:STRUCTURAL MASONRY WALL. - RE:STRUCTURAL ALL FINISHES ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE MASONRY WALLS TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE TENANT BUILD OUT. CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN FLOOR SLAB & WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER RE: STRUCTURAL CONT FOOTING RE: STRUCTURAL TO MASONRY 20'-0" AFF JOIST BEARING 15-8" AFF LPREFIN. ALUM SCUPPER BOX BEYOND. RE: A502 PREFIN. ALUM DOWNSPOUT BEYOND. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZES. EIFS TRIM. RE: A502-6 PROVIDE CORE FILL 500 FOAM INSULATION IN ALL MASONRY CELLS NOT REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL TO BE FILLED WITH GROUT OR MORTAR. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY). STUCCO FINISH ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM UNDERGROUND. RE: ROOF PLAN. O BENT METAL PLATE STORM LEADER GUARD. RE: DETAIL o CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN SIDEWALK & WALL o SLOPE SIDEWALK AWAY FROM BUILDING 1% MIN - 2% MAX T 0 FLR SLAB V-0" AFF O o o a 00 00 M p V w � V/ o �o (>c%j bb U 3 Cn yr� 1._ r E I � f �I co J I! Cu LL c w U= O i¢ °6 : U 01Y ` U LLJ _0 CO Q U EYeN[L 0 a z 0 z U) 0 U) ca F— w'I W co z Lu 0 a m 0 f— NI I -I O O N coI coI co � N N N ® co z rn o UN coo N w O zIf U W (,� CD A302 ll - r� r .. - - I - - _ _ it :.. _: ,+.._ .:�.ur iL.�r .. i. ._ 6. ni . �.�.�� . i. t�i f ,m...t r�l�lfa"�➢it 4ST��YI'�J��I.�i�V�wMN�W�r ���IL ilu I I I 1 C-6 1'-6" 10" 3'-8" 6,-4„ RE: A502-2 FOR ROOF RIDGE DETAIL C-4.9 V-2" 1218 / I / I / I / I / I / I / I / I / I ARCHED GUTTER BEYOND / ARCHED ROOF BEYOND / I / I SELF-SEALING SHINGLES OVER 30# / FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD / / I I PREFIN ALUM. GUTTER TIED — / I INTO DOWNSPOUT HIDDEN IN COLUMN BEYOND. ALL DOWNSPOUTS TO BE TIED DIRECTLY INTO SITE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 15 UNDERGROUND, 12 TRUSS BEARING — — — 22'-8" AFF — — I II RE: A502-1 FOR ROOF EAVE DETAIL II 314" STUCCO OVER 5/8" — ! DENSGLASS SHEATHING I I i I I I JOIST BEARING 19'-4" AFF I I I I 6" X 1" EIFS BAND AROUND ENTIRE WINDOW SPANDRIL WINDOW. RE: — SCHEDULE AND DETAILS 6" X 1" EIFS BAND AROUND ENTIRE WINDOW STUCCO OVER SHEATHING B 0 BEAM i 1'-6" AFF ,dk B 0 CLNG FRAMING 11'-0" AFF B 0 SOFFIT FRAMING 10'-0" AFF CANVAS AWNING OVER ALUM. FRAME. _/ G.C. TO PROVIDE SIGNED & SEALED SHOP DWGS FROM A FL. REGISTERED ENGINEER TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW & AS NEEDED FOR PERMITTING DRIP SCREED. FRY REGLET, DS-75-75 T 0 FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF LIGHT GAUGE TRUSSES. RE: STRUCTURAL. STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL. STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING, RE: STRUCTURAL. I--- ---- ------- II ! STUCCO SOFFIT BEYOND CONTINUOUS CEILING VENT I I ! STUCCO OVER SHEATHING ! I I EIFS TRIM BEYOND I ! STUCCO FINISH ON COLUMNS AND PILASTERS BEYOND. I I STUCCO OVER SHEATHING I I STEEL COLUMN. RE: STRUCTURAL BASE CURB, STONE WAINSCOT, AND SILL PIECE BEYOND. I I SIDEWALK. SLOPE AWAY FROM ! BUILDING 1 % MIN - 2% MAX. RE: SIDEWALK PLAN. 3'-2" �11 C-4.6 6'-4" 3'-8" 10" 1'-6" RE: A502-2 FOR ROOF RIDGE DETAIL 12 18 \\ I \ ALUM GUTTER TO ALUM \ DOWNSPOUT BEYOND. \ SPILL DOWNSPOUT TO \ SPLASHBLOCK ON \ ROOF BELOW. LIGHT GAUGE TRUSSES. RE: \ STRUCTURAL. \ 5 � 12 ----- I-------------------------- IJ.--- ROOF FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL CONTINUE ROOF INSULATION UNDER TRUSS Tq EXTERIOR WALL ROOF FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL 5/8" GYP BOARD ON INSIDE OF ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS. EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF STRUCTURE ABOVE LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE: STRUCTURAL. ALL EXTERIOR FRAMED WALLS TO BE FILLED WITH R19 BATT INSULATION. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY). B 0 BEAM 10'-2" AFF T 0 STOREFRONT FRAMED OPENING I 10'-0"AFF I \ ALL GLAZING TO RECEIVE 3M I SECURITY FILM PER STAPLES SPECIFICATION. STEEL BEAM. RE: STRUCTURAL I — WINDOW. RE: SCHEDULE & DETAILS GYP BOARD LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING. RE:STRUCTURAL I PROVIDE 1/2" EXP. JOINT BETWEEN BASE CURBS & FLOOR SLAB AND BETWEEN BASE CURBS & SIDEWALKS. I I CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB. PROVIDE EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN SLAB & SIDEWALK. RE: STRUCTURAL. I COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE: COLUMN FOOTING BEYOND. RE: —I— — — L — — — — — STRUCTURAL. EXTEND AS NEEDED _ — — STRUCTURAL. EXTEND AS NEEDED I I FOR PILASTERS AND BASE CURBS. i I FOR PILASTERS AND BASE CURBS. L------------J L------------J II I 1l4" PER FT I MIN SLOPE I I� REFER TO ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF MEMBRANE INFORMATION EXPANSION STYLE PARAPET CAP. COORDINATE W/ - ADJACENT BUILDING TO MASONRY `I 20'-0" AFF ADJACENTBUILDIN PARAPET WALL -RE :A501-1 FOR TYP /PARAPET WALL DETAIL I ! ADJACENT BUILDING REFER T'0 ROOF PLAN ROOF SYSTEM FOR ROOF SLOPE & MEMBRANE INFO. - _ JOIST BEARING — VARIES W/ SLOPE ADJACENT BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL, ROOF FRAMING RE:STRUCTURAL ADJACENT BUILDING �= = MASONRY WALL. MASONRY WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL ==---_ PROVIDE CORE FILL 500 FOAM INSULATION = IN ALL MASONRY CELLS NOT REQUIRED BY STRUCTURAL TO BE FILLED WITH GROUT OR MORTAR. (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARI COORDINATE ALL WORK = ALL FINISHES ON THE WITH ADJACENT BUILDING ,. INTERIOR SIDE OF THE CONTRACTOR. REFER TO MASONRY WALLS TO BE BLDG B DRAWINGS FOR PROVIDED AS PART OF COMPLETE INFORMATION THE FUTURE TENANT REGARDING THE BLDG B BUILD OUT, WALL. CONT. EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN FLOOR SLAB & WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL ADJACENT CONCRETE SLAB BUILDING SLAB ON GRADE W/ VAPOR BARRIER RE:STRUCTURAL ADJACENT BUILDING FOUNDATION = CONT FOOTING RE:STRUCTURAL TO FLR SLAB 0'-0" AFF C W O Q rL V Cu c aO UCD �L U CM C W�J'V fQ 1L g .L iE > zCND CO 6 co I— U) ' J t� Cn 0 E E 0 3.m I co Chu U�NLu 0 0) >`+ O 0 v�i�.cUn' 0w mYN0 a z 0 z Cnn O Cn Of F= w w U) z 0 of MI ml 0 0 `ti w A Ln Ln 0i 00 o� 0i w N C)N Zrn o O N UJ N o ?' C) W w cD Front Wall Section Scale 1/2"=l'-0" 2 Side Wall Section Scale 1/2"=1'-0" I�tIIIt? DETAILS ARE SIM. FOR ALL PARAPET CONDITIONS. WHERE EXTERIOR FINISH OR EIFS IS NOT PRESENT REPOSITION NAILERS AS REQUIRED. PARAPET CAP OVER CLEAT W/ MIN. 4" RE: NOA FOR MAX WIDTH PACKING PLATE @ SLOPE Y" PER FT. MIN JOINTS r CORNICE MOLDING RE: ELEVATIONS BUILDING FINISH RE: ELEVATIONS CONT. CLIP ATT. TO NAILERS @ 6" OC W/ SCREWS .045 EPDM MEMBRANE P.T. 2X6 NAILERS: ATT, TO CONC. T.B. @ 48" O.C. W/%" DIA. BOLTS MIN. EMBEDMENT: 4" SCREWS W/ NEOPRENE WASHERS @ 6" O.C. - HORIZ. SLOTTED HOLES IN FLASHING LEG 8" "HAT SECTION" GALV. FURRING @ 24' O.C. ATT. TO CONC. BLK. @ 8" O.C. MASONRY WALL. RE: SECTIONS FASTENER SPACING MAY BE INCREASED WHERE ALLOWED BY WIND CLASSIFICATION 1" ALUM. SIDING ATT. TO FURRING @ 8" O.C. HORIZ. & 24" O.C. VERT. W/ SCREWS (COVER W/ SEALANT) REGLET ATT. TO WALL W/ SCRWS @ NEOPRENE WASHERS @ 8" O.C. 2 PIECE SNAP -IN COUNTER FLASHING SYSTEM CONCURRENT W/ THE PLY SHEET FLASHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION SET BASE FLASHING IN COLD APPLIED MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF CEMENT EXTEND MIN. 4" ABOVE CANT (18" MAX HT) CONT. 4" FIBER OR PERLITE CANT STRIP RE: ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF INFORMATION pQe�O`I� i COVER PLATE 6" WIDE MIN. SET IN TOW BEADS OF SEALANT PCAP JOINTGALV. PARAPET CAP JOINT COVER, 4" TO 6" WIDE -SET IN ELASTOMERIC SEALANT SEAL TOP OF FLASHING WITH A 3-COURSE OF VERTICAL GRADE ROOF CEMENT AND REINFORCEMENT FABRIC. I I EXTENSION OF BASE FLASHING IN LIEU OF OPTIONAL 3-COURSE I AND/OR CONTINUOUS SHEET 0 14� MEMBRANE LINER CONTINUOUS SHEET MEMBRANE LINER CONTINUOUS TAPERED WOOD SHIM \ (E.G., BEVELED CEDAR SIDING) P.T. WOOD NAILER REYNOLDS RAIN LOCK ` ' RIB PANEL PRIME CONCRETE EXTENSION OF FIELD ' PLIES ABOVE HEAD OF CANT WOOD CANT FASTENED TO NAILERS ROOF SYSTEM COVERBOARD INSULATION THERMAL INSULATION ROOF DECK MTLTRUSS RE: STRUCTURAL FASTENER SPACING MAY BE INCREASED WHERE ALLOWED BY WIND CLASSIFICATION CONT 4" FIBER OR PERLITE CANT STRIP - ROOF SYSTEM, RE: ROOF PLAN RE: STRUCTURAL FOR ROOF FRAMING INFO MTL. Panel Roof Detail at CMU Wall Metal Parapet Cap Metal Panel Roof Detail a 1 SCALE: N.T.S. 2Scale 1-1/2"=1'-0 3 Scale 1-1/2"=V-0" 24" x 36" CEILING ACCESS HATCH 6" MTL STUD FRAMING. SPACING INCREASED FROM 16" OC MAX TO 24" OC AT ACCESS HATCH LOCATIONS ONLY STUCCO CEILING SYSTEM RE: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 6" FRAMING. RE: STRUCT. STEEL COLUMN. RE: STRU( 34" FRT PLYWOOD IN PLACE OF DENS GLASS BEHIND STONE WAINSCOT & SILL STONE VENEER INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS COLUMN DIM'A' DIM'B' C-6 & C-C.1 0'-10" 1'-1011 C-6 & C-B.5 2'-5" 0'-3" C-6 & C-B.2 0'-3" 2'-5" C-6 & C-A.9 V-10" 0'-101° '"' 9Column Wrap Detail SCALE: f" = V-0" STARTER SHINGLE W/ CONT. BUTYL CAULK STRIP FOLD SHINGLE @ "VALLEY" MIDPOINT 5/8" FIRE -RETARDANT PLYWOOD SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT UNDERLAYMENT PROVIDE 24" STRIP OF ICE & WATER SHIELD AT "VALLEY" CONT. 1 Valley Detail 3Scale Y=1'-0" 6" FRAMING. RE: 3/4" FRT PLYWOC OF DENS GLASS STONE WAINSCO STONE VENEER I PER MANUFACTU RECOMMENDATI( 8" CMU. RE: STRI STUCCO FINISH tau Corner Pilaster at CMU Wall SCALE: V-0" V-4„ ELEVATION Quoin Detail Scale 1-1/2"=1'4' 14 Window Detail Scale 1/4"=1'-0" SECTION AA B 6" 6" 7/8" STUCCO SYSTEM OVER (2) x 5/8" DENSGLASS SLOPE DOWN TYPICAL CORNER BDS AT ALL CORNERS 6" FRAMING. RE: STRU, 3/4" FRT PLYWOOD IN F OF DENS GLASS BEHIN STONE WAINSCOT & SII STONE VENEER INSTAL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 8" CMU. RE: STRUCT. STUCCO FINISH Pilaster at CMU Wall SCALE: %" = 1'-0" BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STONE VENEER SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN - EIFS TRIM PROFILE -� EXTEND FLASHING UP UNDER ROOFING FELT. MIN 8" LAP SELF HEALING ASPHALT SHINGLES OVER 30 # FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD PT2X WOOD BLOCKING PRE -FIN ALUM FLASHING OVER CONT CLEAT. 718 " HAT SECTION" GALV. FURRING @ 24" O.C. ATT. TO CONC. BLK. @ 8" O.C. —1" ALUM. SIDING: ATTACHED TO FURRING @ 8" OC HORIZ & 24" OC VERT W/ SCREWS (COVER W/ SEALANT) 518" F.R.T. PLYWOOD REGLET ATT. TO WALL W/ SCREWS & NEO- PRENE WASHERS @ 8" OC o �I PIECE SNAP -IN COUNTER FLASHING SYSTEM CONCURRENT WITH THE PLY SHEET FLASHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION I N _ fSET BASE FLASHING IN COLD APPLIED MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF CEMENT EXTEND MIN 4" ABOVE CANT (18" MAX HT) L I I I 1„ 7„ L 5„ 1'4' DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF STONE TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. ADJUST OVERALL WIDTH AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE APPROX 5" DIMENSION. 11 EIFS Profile Scale 3"=1'-0" TO WINDOW FRAMING = �` 29'-11" AFF ti STUCCO TRIM ❑ OD Cad SPANDREL WINDOW ❑ ❑ EIFS TRIM. RE: PCA502-11 ❑ ❑ „ 2'-4/-` „ 3'- 4% L s' RE: PCA 310-2 FOR SECTION s' NOTE: SPACE INTERMEDIATE MULLIONS EVENLY HORIZONTALLY & VERTICALLY 15Window Detail Scale 1/4"=1'-0" 4 FlashinDetail SCALE: N.T.S.. 3/4" FRT PLYWOOD IN PLACE OF DENS GLASS BEHIND STONE WAINSCOT & SILL STONE VENEER INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS Pilaster at Framed Wall SCALE: %" = V-0" STUCCO OVER DENS GLASS SHEATHING 6" FRAMING. RE: STRUCT. DOWNSPOUT. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR STORM DRAINAGE INFO RE: STRUCTURAL FOR COLUMN LOCATIONS WALL FINISH RE: PLAN SHEET MTL. REGLET EMBEDDED BEHIND WALL CLADDING BUILDING PAPER FASTENERS 24" O.C. 2X NAILER 3" (76mm) LAP (MIN.) W/ BEAD OF SEALANT 24 GAUGE SHEET MTL. COUNTERFLASHING OPTIONAL 2" WIDE CLIP 30" O.C. MEMBRANE BASE FLASHING FIBERGLASS SPIRE x— ICE AND WATER SHIELD CONT 6" x 18GA. FASTENING TO TRUSSES APPROVED BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS FLASHING W/ SCREWS AND NEOPRENE WASHERS PRE-ENGINEERED TRUSS SYSTEM 1 --- ------------------- ASPHALT SHINGLES \ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — -- \ NOTE \ \ 1. SPIRE BY EDON CORP. 215-672-8050 \ 6'-7" FINIAL SPIRE W/ BALL ES-509(A) \\ \ OR ARCH APPROVED EQUAL \ 2. SPIRE MANUFACTURES CONNECTION \ OF SPIRE TO STRUCTURE TO BE APPROVED \ BY BBM STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS \ 1 Finial Cap Detail Scale 3"=1'-0" T 0 DORMER FRAMING _ 29'-6" AFF 12 SELF-SEALING SHINGLES 18 OVER 30# FELT OVER 5/8" FRT PLYWOOD CD A co FASCIA BOARD 12 o 5 co SPANDREL WINDOW ❑ EIFS TRIM. RE: PCA502-14 - ❑ o Zv 74" !V2 " RE: PCA 310-2 FOR SECTION 16Dormer Detail Scale 1/4"=1'-0" NOTE: SPACE INTERMEDIATE MULLIONS EVENLY HORIZONTALLY & VERTICALLY I o 0 � U C+7 0 0 W 'I o � L Qd .mow � o >o Qo w ao Y j tin IT r-4 t a s r' U u U O C 0 �iL V (� 00 U�0� �. ^CCU W Cc _j 0 Cu u" E (� L.L Q z CL a) �0 (D C0 w M I- U) V Cl) r 0 (; fI I (3)co Cu LL_ = ® w 06 L �� � U to CL Ch YNa o a T z u M mcn z� l >U: w �- CD z 0 co z co 0 M F m > :D :x w w cfn z a_ m 0 I P I CV I 1_- ® O CV Lu C�) LO Lo CD col �i CD CD CD w CV CV N Z ax o W N w uLU ® Z U U c�-Lu a ca o 0 •i.:dd—.-.•16.1 t �:u�:IiPa� a il�ii;�a�'Ve19 �dllt>VWiIllr�lia�,teYWi"4tivti��iM,, _ I I� uu Ea..��•. .. mil t�n.�oc�x ar __ � I -'71 �11 1 "I'li it.tll"J Iii 11 11111 1 1,11,11 SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT OVER 518" FIRE -RETARDANT PLYWOOD SCREW (4/PANEL) TAPE SEALANT CONT. DRIP FLASHING SEE GUTTER DETAIL THIS - SHEET FOR MORE INFO SCREW ATTACHMENT @ 18" O.C. P.T. 2X WOOD NAILER PRE ENGINEERED TRUSS RE:STRUCTURAL STUCCO OVER DENSGLASS SHEATHING 3" VENTED DRIP SCREED FRY DS-75-V-300 1 Eave Detail Scale 3"=1'-0" Scale 1/2"=1'-0 P Cn STUCCO C SHEATHIN R-19 BATT AS REQ'D. WOOD SHII AS REQUIF SEALANT( MATCH MT CLEAR AN, ALUMINUN STOREFR( NOTE: ALL FLASHINGS TO BE CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. W/ 4" MIN. OVERLAP 2 Ridge / Hip Detail Scale 3"=1'-0" BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH —� SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN EIFS TRIM PROFILE M d- I ASPHALTIC ADHESIVE WHEN REQUIRED CAP SHEET MIN 3" HEAD LAP MIN 2" HEADLAP REQ 2„ MIN 6" SIDELAP REQ OVERLAP HIP AND RIDGE MIN OF 12" BOTH SIDES DRIP EDGE OVER FINISHED UNDERLAYMENT TIN -TAG AND SECURE AS INDICATED DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. IN AREAS WHERE STONE VENEER IS USED, INCREASE WIDTH OF EIFS AS NOTE: 2 LAYERS NO 43 ORGANIC NEEDED TO PROVIDE SAME DIMENSION FROM BASE SHEET, STAGGER LAYERS OUTSIDE FACE. RECOMMENDED 6EIFS Profile Scale 3"=l'-0" 1°-811 STUCCO FINISH 4" MTL. FLASHING - PREFINISHED ALUMINUM --- SCUPPER BOX SECURED TO BLDG W/ STRAP ANCHORS SCUPPER COLLAR BEYOND 311 PREFINISHED ALUMINUM RAIN LEADER. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR SIZING. 2" PREFINISHED ALUMINUM STRAP ANCHORS, PROVIDE MIN. ONE @ TOP & BOTTOM AND AT ALL INTERMEDIATE JOINTS. --, Section a@ Storefront Head STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL A8-7 ,,--RE: TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL CLEAR OPENING TO BE 8" X 16" ` PT 2X BLOCKING AS NEEDED �-- - RE: ROOF PLAN RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS FOR ROOF FRAMING INFORMATION --MASONRY WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL 111 3/ CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM --LINE OF WALL BEYOND STOREFRONT SYSTEM �� CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM - BRAKE METAL TO MATCH CLR. ANOD. ALUM. BRAKE MT'L STOREFRONT SYSTEM - S OTH OVER (2) LAYERS 3/4" PLYW'D OUT AND FILL ALL ROUG SILL TO MATCH STOREFRONT. 5/8" GYP. BD. ON 6" FINISHES MTL. STUDS @ 16" O.0 W/ INSULATION AS REQ'D. STUCCO OVER <: SHEATHING i CLEAR ANODIZED c� ALUMINUM BRAKE R-19 BATT INSULATION METAL TO MATCH AS REQ'D. STOREFRONT SYSTEM FINISH AS SCHED. MANUAL PULL -DOWN SUN SHADE. MOUNT TO gr BLOCKING ABOVE, NOT STOREFRONT SYSTEM BASE AS SCHED. SECURITY FILM SEE SPEC. FLOORING AS SCHED. LINE OF WALL BEYOND - F.F. 16Section @ Storefront Sill NTS PROTOTYPE DETAIL A8-8 BUILDING WALL. SHEATHING OVER FRAMING SHOWN. SOME LOCATIONS WILL HAVE CMU. RE: SECTIONS STUCCO FINISH SLOPE TOP 1" PER FT MIN - EIFS TRIM PROFILE STUCCO OVER DENSGLASS %" SHEATHING. CHANGE DENSGLASS TO FRT PLYWOOD BEHIND THE FLASHING CONT CASING BEAD BETWEEN J-MOLD AND FLASHING CONT. COUNTER FLASHING TYPE "B" ATTACH 12" O.C. CONT TYPE "A" FLASHING CONT 2X P.T. NAILER CONT HEN (FILL W/ BUTYL) M CONT 2X4 NAILER SELF-SEALING ASHPALT SHINGLES OVER 30# FELT UNDERLAYMENT 5/" FRT PLYWOOD SHEATHING WALL ROOF TRUSS J RE:STRUCTURAL NOTE: ALL FLASHINGS TO BE CORROSION RESISTANT MTL. W/ 4" MIN. OVERLAP 3 Wall Abutment Detail Scale 3"=1'-0" CV I 2„ 411 6" DIMENSION IS FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FINISH TO OUTSIDE FACE OF EIFS. IN AREAS WHERE STONE VENEER IS USED, INCREASE WIDTH OF EIFS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE SAME DIMENSION FROM OUTSIDE FACE. 7EIFS Profile Scale 3"=1'-0" 8w Scale 1"=1'-0" SMOOTH I WALL RETURN x RETURNN A DUCT OPE 1/4" HEX BOLTS @ 12" r,N Q.C. (TYP.) `li 318" CONTINUOUS BENT PLATE (PAINT TO MATCH 2111 I WALL) 4 ' o i 8" STORM LEADER TIED IN UNDERGROUND J DETAIL NOTES: 1. STORM LEADER GUARD SHALL BE 4'-0" HIGH o AND HELD @ 12" ABOVE FINISH GRADE. FOR 8" LEADER 2. PROVIDE DOWNSPOUT GUARDS AT ALL DOWNSPOUT LOCATIONS. FIN. 3. COORDINATE PER LOCAL REQUII-.EMENTS. GRADE 13 Storm Leader Guard Detail NTS STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL A9-6 Detail - Duct RTU Curbs 14NTS STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL M2-7 WALL ABUTMENT TYPE "A' FLASHING N.T.S. �11 1�( Y4 WALL ABUTMENT TYPE "B" FLASHING N.T.S. STUCCO RE: ELEVATIONS FRY REGLET CHANNELSCREED- PCS-75-75 EXTERIOR WALL RE: PLANS SCREW ATTACHED AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION GUTTER STRAP @ 36" (STAGGER 18" FROM SUPPORT. ATTACH WITH SCREWS OR POP RIVETS PROTRUDING RIVET RECTANGULAR GUTTER. RE: ROOF PLAN FOR SIZING FM ROLL OVER HANGER @ 36" -� O.C. STAGGER 18" FROM STRAP CONT. DRIP FLASHING ti 4 Rectangular Gutter Detail Scale 3"=l'-0" TOP OF RTU CURBS SHALL BE LEVEL SHIM AS REQUIRED. 2420 DUCT I! OPENING (TYPICAL 2) K I U-1, 1, 3, 4 ANU 6 ')cue X 211/ RTU-5 SUPPLY AIR DUCT OPENING 4� 5 i N T E R I❑ R $,1 E X T E R I❑ R INTERIOR VESTIBULE WALLS, 4„ WINDOWS AND DOORS TO BE .' KNEE WALL PROVIDED AS PART OF THE FUTURE 2,11211 TENANT BUILD OUT C.0 C MOTION SENSOR (TYP.) TNT, E X T KNEEWALL W/ CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL TO CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM BRAKE MATCH STOREFRONT SYSTEM GLASS AS SCHED. METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT z SYSTEM z w HEAD FACE OF KNEE WALL 0 4 2,1 CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM FIXED DOOR BEYOND STOREFRONT SYSTEM it CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM BRAKE 4"X4" STEEL TUBE 4- SLIDING ENTRANCE GLASS AS SCHED. CAULKING CONT ALONG DOOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT THRESHOLD SET IN o SYSTEM - FULL MASTIC BED 3/4" CONDUIT DROPS FOR ®® CONT. GRAY SEALANT- DOOR PATH ON TRACK SECURITY PEDESTALS SIDEWALK BY r' LANDLORD GENERAL CONTACTOR FLOORING AS SCHED. l FIN FLR. EL. 0'-0" — ❑IN F�❑❑R SILL 17Section @ Entrance Sliding Doors 18 Entry Door Jamb Detail NTSTPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL A8-5 STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL A8-10 EXTERI❑R INTERI❑R FACE OF PANEL 7 518" BEYOND j SEALANT CONT.ALON G STOREFRONT SYSTEM SECURITY FILM. SEE SPEC. 81, Entry Corner Post Detail 19 NTS STAPLES PROTOTYPE DETAIL A8-11 SEALANT PRE -SHAPED METAL COUNTER FLASHING CLIP W/ RECEIVER r SCUPPER , 1 [' CLEAR OPENING I TO BE8"X16" HEMMED DRIP EDGE L ;I I I I MASONRY WALL. RE:STRUCTURAL Overflow Scupper Scale V=V-0" THE INVERT OF THE OVERLFOW SCUPPER SHALL BE BETWEEN 2" MIN AND 4" MAX ABOVE THE INVERT OF THE PRIMARY SCUPPER RE: TYP PARAPET WALL DETAIL PT 2X BLOCKING AS NEEDED RE: ROOF PLAN RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS FOR ROOF FRAMING INFORMATION 1'-2" V-10" - - -------LINE OF SUPPORT BEHIND WALL INSTALL 2'-0" WIDE X YB" PLYWOOD FULL HT. FOR WALL PROTECTION AT LADDER r v m °�� �� HOOP RINGS CAGE VERTICALS- (9) SPACES @ 40bFF CAGE CENTER LINE AT LADDER NOTE: V COORDINATE LOCATION AND METHOD OF ATTACHMENT WITH FLOOR PLAN BILCO LADDER UP SAFETY POST SEE A301-5 3" /� �\ 2'-6'"x3'-0" INSULATED T-0" TYP. ROOF HATCH SEE A301-4 WALKPADS BOTH SIDES /i \ 1" ROUNDED EDGE & GRIND SMOOTH GRIND \ ROOF HATCH FRAMING 2 1 /2 "X 112 " STL. L BRACKET, WELD TO LADDER RAIL & TO CONT. STRUCT. ST'L. MEMBER (TYP EA. SIDE OF RAILS) - FACE OF STUD PLAN VIEW BRIDGING FOR LADDER SUPPORTS AS REQ'D. (TYP) WALL & BRIDGING TO BE PROVIDED AS PART OF FUTURE TENANT BUILD OUT 1/4' FIN. FLR. -1 "x 1/2 °' FLAT GRAB BAR WELD TO OUTSIDE FACE OF LADDER RAILS (EA. RAIL) 00 0 �w - 2 112 "x 112 " BAR LADDER RAILS QC:) - INSTALL 2'-0" WIDE X 5/8" PLYWOCId FUI L HEIGHT FOR WALL PROTECTION Af Q LADDER. Q :5 C� 0 w cn m c - PAINT LADDER AND CAGE o 0 cn o 46 RE -BAR LADDER RUNGS z 0- W/ABRASIVE OR BERATED STL. [ o (TYP.) -5/8 " PLYWOOD. AS SCHED. - L 4" x 4" x 3/8" x 2" LONG o 00 WITH 5/8 " DIA. EXPANSION ANCHOR (TYP) 0/ NOTE: CAGE MAY NOT BE REQUIRED. DEPENDING ON HEIGHT OF THE STRUCTURE. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY WITH LOCAL JURISDICTION 20Roof Access Ladder NTS O 00 00 U M en C:) O � � w O1• U y J a �o 4_4 U O� � 4 �a 3 U AI , IU C O Q_ rL V N00 i � L C0 W u Eu- (0 2 cv LL Z �L� �9 z w //�� CL CY) 17- U) U 0 j 0 b 5�.. cn co �� 0z)c� ®6U v�coQ Cn a i�YNEL Cn z >® JCO O mom: z w 21 u- o m c E S .W a - 0 z 0 z 0 m CD > LU h W W W Cn z W LU ©_ al MI QI O N vIO ' o I I 0 0 col 001 w C, N zrn o ® LU O y U C3 W C7 V 'I'Rffl�A 16 A— CONNECT POST TO WELDED STL. \ _0" ROOF STRUCTURE 12'-0" DOOR SCOPE AS JAMB BY G. (TYP.)— SEE SCHEDULED 14"X22" PO CARB. 0 STRUCTURAL SHEETS. VISION N \ co 3G16 5'G1 " 3G16" SEE DOOR SCHEDULE PLOY 'S 0 LY' / \ c� MOTION DETECTOR it FOR TYPE OF GLASS 8„6„ S INS V I0 / \ S I m I KICK PLATE BY M FG r r MUNTIN `— \ BAR EMERGENCY BREAKAWAY (TYP. OF 4) @ 9 —5 O ALUMINUM NARROW STILE FULL LITE — CLEAR INSULATED STEEL HOLL METAL HOLLOW METAL VISION DOUBLE ACTING HIGH DOUBLE ACTING HIGH ANOD. ALUM. MFG OPTIONS ENTRY SYSTEM W/ REINFORCED F SLAB CITE SEE DOOR TRAFFIC DOOR WITH TRAFFIC DOOR WITH 4—WAY BREAK—OUT SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR METAL FLUSH SLAB STEEL CHANNEL FRAME STEEL CHANNEL FRAME GLASS TYPE 1 DOOR & FRAM A-5 SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" w 10'-8" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-6" G1 G1 G1 co - � I I r� A ALUMINUM 2 WIN DOW TYPE �-5SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" DOOR AS SCHEDULED CARPET METAL 7S<SISION STRIP TYPE THIN ER IC TILE N C E a ? °_ a-d- "A _4 a d d A. s dd O (A�oSILL DETAIL ��ASCALE: 3"=V-0" G2 CLEAR AN DI D ALUMINU AL NTER G ED NI 5, I G2 G2 N \ / CD \ / CD \ / n co \ / OPEN C ALUMINUM D AL INUM NOTE: SEE DETAIL 5/A-7 FOR FULL VESTIBULE ELEVATIO N 8" REINFORCED CMU MASONRY WALL MASONRY ANCHORS 24" O.C. 4 JAMB 12" O.C. @ HEAD WOOD SHIM FILL SOLID WITH MORTAR CONT. SEALANT EACH SIDE COLOR TO MATCH STEEL FRAME PAINT AS SCHEDULED CARPET 107a Cv 1 /2"x2" MTL. ANGLE FASTENED TO CONC. SLAB TYPE 'L' EXPOSED SEALED CONCRETE SLAB tz_ _ ° a - A a - °- a -A- - -A -- ° - - - - - a d ° EPDXY PATCH 1/8"x12" rif SILL DETAIL A-5 SCALE: 3"=1'-0" G3 41 3/4" 16 GA. — FLANGE FRAME 3'-0" MANUAL INSULATED CANOPY ACCESS DOOR OVERHEAD SECTIONAL STEEL DOOR AND FRAME COMMERCIAL DOOR "U" KEY LOCK AND WEATHER VALUE=0.037 HIGH LIFT PROOF ON 2" TRACK. ISLIDE OC-S 1/4" :ONCEALED FULL BREAKOUT 3I-PART SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM TRANSOM _E M N COVER SIDE FRA I G O SECTION EXTERIOR OEN TRANSOM TO RECEIV 1" GLASS (D00 ICAL SUPPLY I ULTRAVIEW 110 VA HZ. 10Ai1-1 MOTION/PRESENCE BY EC. CON SENSOR (TYP. EL `O JUNCTION BOX.I M.O.H. 144 1/4" ULTRAVIEW 3 1 I SENSOR SEMI-CONCEALE I 90" STOREFRONT O.F.H. OPENING y89 3/4" I NON REMOVABLE MUNTIN SECURITY TYPE GLAZING BEAD SYSTEM (TYP.) 1/4" STANDARD. 41 1/2" 2 8 1,0"1I F_F.L. EXTERIOR ELEVATION 144 1/2" STOREFRONT OPENING 144" OVERALL FRAME WIDTH PIVOT POINT 36 3/8" 60" L-36 3/8" CLEAR DOOR OPENING SECTION _INTERLOCK OEXTERIOR SIDE ENGAGED (TYP). 4 PLAN EXTERIOR 1 /4" F.F.L. 1/2" /AIN— LINK LUMINUM GATE LAN CASED OPENING METAL FRAME SEE DETAIL 6/A-5 THE STANDARD PACKAG CONSISTS OF: �- AUTOMATIC OPERATOR, DOORS, FRAMES, SIDELITES, VERTICAL WEATHERSTRIPPING, EMERGENCY BREAK -AWAY, 2-POINT LOCK WITH BEST CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION CORE, 5-POSITION FUNCTION SWITCH (OFF -EXIT ONLY -AUTO -REDUCED OPENING - HOLD OPEN), ULTRAVIEW MOTION/PRESENCE SECTION SENSORS, AND ADJUSTABLE CONCEALED DOOR OSWEEPS (ON EXTERIOR DOOR ONLY) HEADER THIS PACKAGE WILL ACCEPT Y4" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS IN THE SIDELITES AND ACTIVE LEAVES. 1" GLASS IN THE TRANSOM. PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING PACKAGE QUANITY: E__1 CLEAR ANODIZED O "CARNIVAL RED" VALSPAR #SL4A139 O OTHER SECTION O THRESHOLD SURF. MTD. r-MAT BY OTHERS )J. CONCEALED DOOR SWEEPS INTERIOR IIII / / \ \ IIII EXTERIOR PLAN VIEW EMERGENCY BREAKAWAY r *1,111k wur 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD AS SCHEDULED WOOD BLOCKING (TYPICAL AT JAMB) HOLLOW METAL FRAME AS SCHEDULED ANCHORS (TYPICAL) — THREE PEBvwe 1 A-5 % SCALE: 3"=1 '-0" 8" UP. BD. ETAL DS S SCH LED WOOD BL ENT PLATE 7'-0" A.F.F. DOUBLE ACTING IMPACT DOOR US r•r=�� A-5 % SCALE: 3"=1'-0" CMU WALL BEYOND INSULATED DOOR INTERIOR FIN. FL. DOOR SWEEP SILL PLATE SPANS JOINT — BEVELED BOTH SIDES �I� - - a- _ _ _ a °- EXTERIOR SLAB : _ CONT. SEALANT a ° -.d _ bA a_ BACKER ROD FACE OF SLAB - - A PREFORMED - A- ° A FILLER J2_' SILL DETAIL A-5 SCALE: 3"=1'-0" 41 4 X 1 /4" STEEL TUBE 1 /2 "x4-1 /2"x4-1 /2" BASE PLATE 5/8>, W/(2)-3/4"b L 4 TYP I EXPANSION ANCHORS EDUCED BOLT TO FINISH _ DOUBLE ACTING FLOOR (TYP.) IMPACT DOOR ® I WOOD BLOCKING DOUBLE ACTING ICAL AT JAMB) IMPACT DOOR SECURE JAMB LEGS 1 /4" BENT 1 TYP _ I 4 3/4" X 2 1 /2" TO FLOOR W/ WELD PLATES (TYP. 3"x3" STEEL ANGLE _ OF 4) PROVDED BY ANCHOR CLIPS NOTE: ST ES DOOR MFR. TO BE ARE TO BE PLUM FIELD WELDED TO AND SQUARE WHEN EL TUBE (TYP) INSTALLED. (8� JAMB_DETAIL _ JAMB DETAIL A-5 SCALE: 3"=1'-0" A-5 SCALE.: 3"=1'-0" -----� CMU WALL BEYOND INSULATED DOOR INTERIOR FIN. FL. DOOR SWEEP SILL PLATE SPANS JOINT — BEVELED ONE SIDE & �IN CARPET SQ'D I NT. A" a .° I EXTERIOR SLAB a ° : d - -°- d CONT. SEALANT d A _ _ ° - a QA a_ BACKER ROD FACE OF SLAB A - -N ;° = PREFORMED a d °_ d a A FILLER �3 SILL DETAIL A-5 / SCALE: 3"=1'-0" 6" DIA. x 48" LONG PVC TUBE MARKED 'PLANS' @ 48" A.F.F. (MAX.) NOTE: ATTACH TO CHAIN LINK FENCE OF ELEC/TELECOM AREA WITH ONE COMPLETE SET OF "AS —BUILT" CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS AND ALL DOCUMENTS REQUIRED BY OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS. PER STAPLES CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. METAL STRAPPING z Q in 14 WALL MOU A SCALE: NTS -= -- - - _ .----- =-= -==-=--=- =:=: -- - ----=_ _:=:=:-_:-_: _=:=:=_ _ _:-: _-: _ :=:-: _ :-:=:=_:--- _-::----::--- --- :--- - =:= G E N E RAL ...- -- -- N TE --- -- :---------:-::-_: _-: _-:- :: _-----: _- :----=_ _----=:=_:---------_:= :=:=_:=:= :=:=:=:= :=:=:=:=:==:=:= _=::=:= :=:=: O S 1. ALL LOCKABLE DOORS SHALL BE EQUIPPED W/ REMOVABLE 6. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE FULL LENGTH LATCH GUARDS CORE HARDWARE, MANUFACTURED BY "BEST" LOCK CO., TO BE WELDED AND DRIP CAPS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA. HARDWARE TO BE SUPPLIED FROM THE DOOR & FRAME. MANUFACTURER W/"BEST" REMOVABLE CORE CYLINDERS W/ CONSTRUCTION MASTER —KEYING. "STAPLES" WILL REPLACE 7. ALL MANUAL DOOR —OPENING DEVICES SHALL HAVE A SHAPE THAT CORES W/ THEIR OWN "BEST" CORES, KEYED TO THEIR OWN IS EASY TO GRASP WITH ONE HAND AND SHALL NOT REQUIRE SYSTEM, AFTER ACCEPTING THE BUILDING. TIGHT GRASPING, PINCHING OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST TO ONLY THE HARDWARE AS SPECIFIED IS ACCEPTABLE. OPERATE (LEVER, PUSH/PULL). THIS SHALLINCLUDE ALL DOOR NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE ALLOWED. HARDWARE SUPPLIED BY THE DOOR MANUFACTURER. 2. EGRESS DOORS SHALL BE READILY OPENABLE FROM THE EGRESS 8. PROVIDE DETECTABLE WARNINGS ON ALL DOOR —OPENING DEVICES SIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF A KEY OR SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR TO HAZARDOUS AREAS. PROVIDE TEXTURED SURFACE ON HANDLE, EFFORT. KNOB, PULL OR OPERATION HARDWARE ON DOOR. TEXTURED SURFACE SHALL BE MADE BY KNURLING OR ROUGHING OR BY 3. ADJUST DOOR STOPS TO OPERATE W/ UNDERCUT DOORS. APPLYING MATERIAL TO THE CONTACT SURFACE THAT HAS A SIMILAR EFFECT. 4. ALL TRANSITIONS BETWEEN FLOORING MATERIALS, INCLUDING EXTERIOR DOOR SILLS/THRESHOLDS SHALL BE BEVELED WITH A 9, WHEN USING A ELECTRIC STRIKE OPERATION LOCKING SYSTEM ON SLOPE NOT TO EXCEED 1:2 AND NOT TO EXCEED 1/2" IN HEIGHT. AN EXIT DOOR A FAIL SAFE SYSTEM IS ALSO REQUIRED. THIS SYSTEM IS TO INCLUDE THE AUTOMATIC RELEASE OF THE LOCKING SYSTEM UPON ACTIVATION OF THE BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM,LOSS 5. ALL CONTROL KEYS SHALL BE LEFT W/ STAPLES MANAGEMENT TEAM. OF POWER AND AN EMERGENCY PANIC BUTTON CLEARLY MARKED ADJACENT TO THE DOOR. THIS ARRANGEMENT MAKES IT POSSIBLE TO LEAVE THE TENANT SPACE AT ANYTIME WITHOUT SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE AS WELL AS PROVIDE THE SECURITY DURING NORMAL BUSINESS HOURS. OOR & FRAME SCHEDULE ------------------------- ------- = DOOR # I ROOM LOCATION I TYPE ILEAFS1 DOOR OPENING SIZE THK. I FIRM. TYPE I HDW. SET HEAD I JAMB I SILL FINISH DOOR NOTES EXTERIOR DOORS X01 ENTRY A 2 5'-0"x7'—O" -- AL. 1 6/A-8 -- 5/A-8 -- NOTES 1,4,5,15 X02 SALES B 1 3'-6"x7'—O" 13/4 STEEL 4 5/A-5 5/A-5 13/A-5 E2,3 NOTES 12 X03 RECEIVING AREA B 1 3'-6"x7'—O" 13/4 STEEL 4 5/A-5 5/A-5 12/A-5 E2,3 NOTES 2,11 X04 CANOPY ACCESS (ROOF) H 1 3'-0"x3'-0" -- STEEL 6 -- -- NONE E2 NOTES 7 DOCK DOORS X05 I RECEIVING AREA G -- 8'-0"x10'-0" --T STEEL 1 7 5/A-10 5/A-10 8/A-10 E2,3 INTERIOR DOORS ANAGEMENT OFFICE D 1 3'-0"x7'-0" 13/4 H.M. 2 4/A-5 4/A-5 NONE PT3 NOTE 8 105 LOCK— C 1 31-0"x7'-0" 13/4 H.M. 5 2Omrh, 4/A-5 4/A-5 4/A-5 4/A-5 11/A-5 NONE PT3 NOTE 2, 13 106 CASH ROOM C 1 3'-0"x7'—O" 13/4 H.M. 107 CORRIDOR D 3'-0"x7'—O" 13/4 4/A-5 4 ONE PT3 NOTE 9 108 LOUNGE FOYER K -- '-0" — — 3 —5 4/A-5 6/A-5 4/A-5 NONE 1O/A-5 PT3 PT3 109 WOMENS RESTROOM C 1 3'— 110 MENS RESTROOM C 1 3'— 'x 4 H. 3 4/A-5 4/A-5 1O/A-5 PT3 111 LOUNGE K -- 3'— —0" -- H.M. -- —5 6/A-5 NONE PT3 112 TRAINING D 3'-0"x7'—O" 13/4 H.M. 2 4/A-5 NONE PT3 NOTE 8 113 RESTROOM FOYER E 1 3'-6"x7'-0" -- STEEL -- 7/A-5 8/A-5 NONE LACK NOTE 3,6 115. RECEIVI F 2 5'-1 1 1 /2"x7'—O" -- STEEL -- -- 9/A-5 11 /A-5 ONYX BLAC 3,6,12,14 11 C/TELECOM AREA J 1 3'-0"x8'—O" -- ALUM. 9 -- -- NONE -- .::. ::.: .:.:: ::: _=:=::_=: =_:=_ _=_: _= :=_: _==: = := ::= : _= :=_ :=:=: =: _ _=:= := :DOOR FRAME SCHEDULE NOTES ----=-----=_:= :=_ _----= -=:=:--- - _=----_:=_ _ _=_:=_ =: ------ -_=-_=_:=_:=: = 1. INSTALL GLASS AND SEE GLASS TYPE SCHEDULE AND DOOR ELEVATION 7. BOTH SIDES OF DOOR AND FRAME PAINTED E2. FOR PANEL LOCATION & GLASS TYPES. 8. TYP P 2. PROVIDE DOOR SCOPE: SCOPE # DS/1018MB BY DE SEUNG SEUNG TRADING CO. (800)274-7267. SCOPE TO BE EPDXIED INTO DOOR 9 SEE GLASS 3. MANUFACTURER TO SUPPLY HARDWARE AND TO PROVIDE A DETECTABLE 11. EXTERIOR OF DOOR PAINTED E2 & INTERIOR OF DOOR PAINTED WARNING ON ALL DOOR OPENING DEVICES TO HAZARDOUS AREAS PT3. SEE INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULES. INCLUDING THE RECEIVING ROOM. 12. INTERIOR SIDE OF FRAMES TO BE PAINTED PT3. 4. BI—PARTING DOORS SHALL BE FULL BREAK AWAY 13. ALL STOP FOR F —SEE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 8 5. BOTH LEAVES OF DOOR AUTOMATICALLY OPEN AT THE SAME TIME TO 14 4 3/4" X 2 1 /2" TYPICAL OF 4) ARE TO PROVIDE 60" CLEAR OPEING WIDTH. BE PROVIDE OR MANUFA TO BE FIELD 0 THE STEEL TUBES (TYP). 6• Y" T EA REST —ROOM FOYER N LOCATION W/ STAPLES 15. SEE DET. 3 A-5 / OJECT MANAGER HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE .--------:---•-_-- ----- HARDWARE SET #1 HA SET #5 DOOR MANF. TO PROVIDE ALL HARDWARE W/DOOR UNIT. PROVIDE 1-1/2 PR INTERCHANEABLE "BEST" CYLINDER CORES OUTSIDE AND THUMB TURNS STORE ROO L D--STK-626 INSIDE IN ADAMS RITE MS1850S-050 WITH BEST-1 E76181626 DEAD BOLT ��—STK-626 INSTALLED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. CLOSER WARE SET #2 FL00 1— PR BUTTS SILENCER CORRID CK / BEST 93K7D15D— TK 2 HARDWARE SET#6 FLOOR STOP UNIVERSAL FLUSH ACCESS DOOR MODEL DSC-214M CLOSER PRIME COATED STEEL DOOR SILENCER KARP ASSOCIATES, INC. 800-888-4212 HARDWARE SET #3 NAME PLATES: S ENS AT REQUIRED HEIGHTS CONCEALED CONTINIUOS PIANO HINGE 1--1 /2 PR BU S TWO DUAL ACTING HANDLES "BEST" KICK PLATES ET ROOM ENTRANCES) LOCKABLE LATCH W/ CYLINDER CORES PUSH/P LATES ON OUTSIDE LATCH FL STOP HARDWARE SET #7 OR SILENCER LOCKS & WEATHERSTIPPING PER MFR. SPECS. HARDWARE SET #4 1-1/2 PR BUTTS ROOM LOCK/SCHLAGE K B 510 H PANIC/SECURITY HARDWARE — ARM—A—DOR MODEL#A101-016—ST BEST TIBLE CYLINDE E 6" STANLEY PULL HANDLE SPECIFICAT AN L OR AL. CONTACT: VENDOR NO. 16 CLOSER WEATHER STRIPPING & DOOR SWEEP FLOOR ST THRESHOLD 1-1/2 TT DRIP GUARD DOOR S CLOSER FULL LENGTH ASTRAGAL (WELDED) & PAINTED HARDWARE S DOOR SILENCER IN AL LOCK UMBTURN (INSIDE) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL HARDWARE HINGES: STANLEY FBB 179, US26D; HAGER BB 1279, US26D. CLOSERS: #3 — 36", #4 — 36" UP . .:..... : ::: :. :. .. . . ..:_ . -GLASS TYPE SCHEDULE ::= :-: _=:=_= _ ::::=:=_ :=: _=: _= =:=: G1 — 1" INSULATED, TEMPERED 4 ALU VESTIBULE G3 — 1 ONE WAY PERED GLAS. SECTION DDr)\/Tf1C DCKIT Al I IAA DATKI nT\/CDTCD ELEVATION TI STEEL ANGLE — SEE STRUCTURAL DWGS. ROOF JOIST SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 4x4 STEEL POST S TRUCTURAL DWGS. V 0 —PVC CAP (TYP. 2) " STEEL COLUMN DETAIL NT FOR PLANS 15 RAIN DIVERTER DETAIL (1�6AT ROOF DECK A-5 SCALE: 3/4"=1'-0" A-5 % SCALE: 3/4"=1'-0" � 44 C) tn o o \" a) N o �c � � .o • r..� rn Q o 14 U u� U C W O CL O `L V (u C 00 Uj �^L1 UCM C: W 'a J V Em 2 cd LL z • L � �- �mH(� Iz J U cn 0 E E O CD cy) Cu 7L U==0 z o6::0 �Y >+ U 0 Co d to Lu Fn1. YNC a r� Li I Q `Q. 0 O cu P�co V � CU cn CBS 06 Cl3 0 C �. U) C U) w J O w w = co z 5a m� z w > J w'1' .. y s r\ m —7 z 0 CCD � co z 0 m irf F= w al w cn o ml w z 3: 01 w Q w O m coI N 9 u') col N [V u') m1 N cj co Z o O U N Z c w N 3 w C)�n U CD A601 INDEX SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 08800 - GLAZING SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09900 - PAINT AND WALL FINISHES SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Bldg C at Zephyr Commons; I. Project Location: Kossick Rd & US Highway 301, Zephyr Hillis, FL (Pasco County). 2. Owner: Primerica Group One, Inc. B. The Work consists of approximately 20,450 SF of "black box" retail space with limited sidewalks. C. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. D. For any areas where there is a conflict between this Shell Specification and the Staples Prototype Specification, the more stringent of the two shall apply. 1.2 WORK SEQUENCE A. Tlae Work shall be conducted in one phase. I. Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. 1.3 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.4 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. END OF SECTION 01100 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.2 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days, or as indicated after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and cred- its to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not lim- ited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete descrip- tion of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709. D. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Docu- ments. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower -priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be fol- lowed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjust- ments to the Contract. END OF SECTION 01250 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifics administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Submittals Schedule and Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcon- tract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Docu- ments to determine quantities. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Pay- ment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revi- sions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period cov- ered by application. D. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. E. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Appli- cation for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 9. Performance and payment bonds. 10. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. I. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of des- ignated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obliga- tions were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document 6706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. END OF SECTION 01290 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required main- tenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Pro ,gress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect the progress and completion of the Work. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction or as specifically requested elsewhere in the Construction Documents. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration. Discuss and resolve all items related to the activity to be performed. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. I. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be repre- sented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. END OF SECTION 01310 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction daring perfor- mance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: I . Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Name of subcontractor. 4. Description of the Work covered. 5. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black - line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. I . Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend. schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion. B. Activities: Treat each storyor separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with p p �' p p p Y the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include number of days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect on the schedule of the following: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Provisions for future construction. f. Seasonal variations. g. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Pro- ceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous verti- cal line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At intervals appropriate to the construction, update schedule to reflect actual con- struction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 17i t 49"L ' :TJ 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall com- mence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 14 days for processing each resubmittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h, Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review received from sources other than Contractor or for items that do not require submittals in the Contract Documents. 1. Include Contractor's certification stating that the information submitted has been reviewed and complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. G. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit 3 copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 2 copies. Mark u p p p P and retain one returned copy as a Project. Record Document. 2. Complete Submittals: Submit complete submittals in accordance with subsnrtta1 schedule. The architect re serves the right to withhold action on a submittal until remaining information required in that section or division is provided. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product orequipment. g YP p 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in. Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended loca- tion. F. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CS,I Form 1.5A or similar format suitable to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return I Cn 0 1�0 N `__� kn cipO) V U U _,!!�I' � C;d� = � U Cn O f CIS 0 �ll' U (D cd ;::3 U: g U 4-i U i C) i O Q- 0 i 0 o V_ wM Z �'`� a - i J _o 2 a) i _ Qo 0 0� z <Q a w CL M Q J 0 Cn 0 E E U i 0_ N E, CZ = o W n_ 0 (,� «s vS 0 J LL z oc = t3 :2 M U" = LU 0 �N 0- �cn \ E Mg 0 coa M U NI0 W 1 O " LL N o a, 0 N o `r x Q !:t W N zT w OD 0 N Q r~ N � 8- Cn 4.0 CZ U 1_ U) C) LU 0) J te- -0 F_ w CnW = U) Im >� w J m a, d4# 1 w C1. \ LLj u- W) . z a C/) = U' o 2 In W U) w w cc U) rr W _ LLJC)z m CL o r - N Ill 0 0 C� co LO LO O OI O 0) W o 0 Cn NO N CV w r T__nF_ ___F- n __ it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 . SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facilitate compli- ance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having juris- diction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as test- ing agency. 1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples' and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document require- ments. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work. has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service perfor- mance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer- Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project i1 located ed and who is experienced in providing engineeringservices of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as g those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. E Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement forspecialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing ng the Work, nor interfere with local trade -union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. G. Testing Agency Qualifications:. An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as docu- mented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Con- tract Docun: ;nts will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -con- trol services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be per- formed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibil- ity. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality - control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contrac- tor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. END OF SECTION 01400 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and secu- rity and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. 4. Electric power service. 5. Lighting. 6. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Project identification and temporary signs. 2. Field offices. 3. Temporary stairs. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 5. Fire protection. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in construction, at Project site. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECNs "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to inter- fere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction D. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Drinking -water fountains or Containerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water drinking -water units, including paper cup supply in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relo- cate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility com- pany provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. I. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked -in services. B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be u provide in ditches, used, p o de drainage d tc es, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off -site in a lawful manner. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for caring or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. 1. Maintain a mum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activi- ties, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of com- pleted installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. . G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capac- ity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload -protected disconnecting means, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. I. 'Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. 2. Provide an answering machine on superintendent's telephone. 3. Provide a facsimile machine for site use 4. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access, making them accessible for handicap access where required by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remain- ing after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. 1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 2. Construct signs of exterior -type Grade B-B high -density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative -treated wood or steel. 3. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. C. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate bar- ricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire -pro- tection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessiblefrom space being served, with sign mounted above. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure areas. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take pos- session of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the follow- ing: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar docu- ments. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and. model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar ele- ments. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either pro- ceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Comple- tion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or cor- rected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architects Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or other- wise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or cor- rected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit 3 copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equip- ment, and building systems. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed instal- lations. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. g Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemblecomplete set of operation and maintenance datain dicating theoperation and maint enance of each system, subsystem, stem , and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations. 2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance and ser- vice schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, three- ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instruc- tions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom -clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materi- als. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 2) 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. in. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. B. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, including EPA -Registered Label, B. Product certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Soil Ternuticide Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion, re -great soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMITE CONTROL A. Soil Treatment: EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emul- sible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpo- rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin. b. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care. C. DowElanco. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Apply soil treatment at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, accord- ing to the product's EPA -Registered Label. 1. Mix termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. 2. Apply to produce a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone around and under building con- struction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 3. Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 4. Foundations: A Adjacent soil including soil along entire in J e inside perimeter of foundation walls along both sides of interior g g , p g partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perim eter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 5. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 6. Masonry: Treat voids. 7. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution dispersed , d spe sed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. W .r-4 Cis �;= ���/ CU `o N • a o U Q w CA 0 U U Cd O w U h gI 0. Q 0 i CZ o U zM a /i^,, � _o 2 W U - Qo 0 0 ,� z _ 2i a< w M¢ J U �- (n 0 E E 0 0 it lam. 0 fp ■ 41 zs Q Z ♦�i >-0 1- cz = CQ � (J) J _DLL W'«svi 0 z S F- 70 v Cr w Cl) Q_ n 0 w 2 Y N CL �$ 0 00a N U M o� - W 0M LL N o,6 N or ¢ C, 0 �� z'6 w 0 N ¢^ N ItT �_ a 71I 0. 4, • 4 11 0 J ,� CO1�0 a, <c ' Z¢ t w _, W z � I -1 :., .1 .1. .. .. .. .. 0 I0 m a a m w z o I- N ICI 1. CD Q N 0' LLJ o 0' 0 �'11 0 �N �N N _a - - - - -- w N C9 er C9 1` CC).. a Cr 6, w - = 0O o m 0= m 0 U 1. m _' BLDG C SHELL , A002 ) 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Include details of steel reinforcement placement including material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports. D. Material test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and protection of in -place concrete. 2. Formwork and form accessories. 3. Steel reinforcement and supports. 4. Concrete mixtures. 5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Formwork: Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301. B. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. - 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Concrete Materials: L Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1/4-inch nominal size. 3. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. 4. Water: Complying with ASTM C 94. D. Admixtures: 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Types A, D, F or G. If "F", see 2.2A. E. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. F. Preformed Joint -Filler: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. G. Curing Materials: 1. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 2. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.2 CONCRETE MIXES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. P. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days). 2. Slump: 4 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Formwork: Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. B. Vapor Retarder: Install, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. C. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard. Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforce- ment. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. D. Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 1. Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of concrete, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 2. Isolation Joints: Install preformed joint filler at junctions with slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as colurrm ped- estals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, to full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: a. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment 3.3 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. I. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projec- tions. I. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Apply grout -cleaned finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth -formed finished concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uni- formly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.IR for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finish, unless otherwise indicated. D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be cov- ered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. E. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection, and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days as follows: 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests will be performed according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. END OF SECTION 03300 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Integral color split -face concrete masonry units with integral water repellant. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. B. Samples: Showing the full range of colors and textures available for exposed masonry units and colored mortars. C. Material Test Reports: For each type of masonry unit, mortar, and grout required. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freez- ing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1. B. Hot -Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Exposed Masonry Units: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: 1900-psi minimum, average net -area compressive strength. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Type: II, nonmoisture-controlled units. 4. Exposed Faces of Decorative Units: Normal -weight aggregate, split -face finish 5. Special Shapes: Provide for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 6. Water Repellant Admixture: In addition to other constituants previously exstablished as suiatble for use in concrete masonry conforming to ASTM standards, all units shall be manufactured with an integtral water repellant admixture. The integral water repellant admixture shall be certified, by the admixture manufacturer, with the wall showing no visible water when tested in accordance with ASTM E514-90. 7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide concrete masonry units from the following: a. Demaco. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1.329. 1. Products: a. Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. b. Lafarge Corporation; Lafarge Mortar Cement. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Pigmented. Mortar: Colored cement or cement -lime formulation as required to produce the color indicated. 1. Colored Masonry Cement: a. Products: 1) Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Masonry Cement. 2) Essroc Materials, Inc.; Brix ment-in-Color. 3) Holnam, Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCING A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/ A 617M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon -steel wire for interior walls and hot -dip galvanized, carbon - steel wire for exterior walls. 1. Single-Wythe Masonry: Use either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Steel Frame: Two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall. 1. Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch diameter, galvanized steel wire anchor section for welding to steel. 2. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.1875-inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire. D. Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall. 1. Anchor Section: Dovetail anchor section formed from 0.0528-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet. 2. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face; made from 0.1875-inch- diameter, galvanized steel wire. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formu- lated from neoprene. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL water-cooled w r before placing, unless wetting of units i motor -driven � All w units c t with Ovate coo ed saws to d b A. Cut masonry units withsaws. o u s yy p g, g is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical and horizontal lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern indicated; do not use units with less than nominal fl- inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indi- cated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3.6 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, tex- ture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality -control testing indicated below. 1. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in these subparagraphs will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 2. Mortar: Properties will be tested per ASTM C 780. 3. Grout: Sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. 3.8 PARGING A. Parge predampened masonry walls, where indicated, with Type S or Type N mortar applied in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch with a steel -trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp -cure parging for at least 24 hours. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean unit masonry by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as work progresses. END OF SECTION 04810 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING - REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel ladders. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 3. Pipe bollards. 1.2 SUBMITTAL,S A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to other Work. B. Templates: For anchor bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/ A 283M, Grade C or D. 4. Rolled -Stainless -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. 5. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 7. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal channels 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches with flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16-inch- wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches o.c. Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.079-inch nominal thickness. 8. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. 2.2 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with perfor- mance requirements in FS TT P-664 and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Connections, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. I. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and cor- rosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where. possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. B. Steel Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. 2. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. a. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. 5. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or riveting. 6. Galvanize exterior ladders and safety cages. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural -steel framework as necessary to complete the Work from structural steel of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry,e equip with integrally welded anchors at 24 inches o.c. q P � Y 2. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to gird- ers with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches o.c. 3. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. D. Pipe Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in -place construction. Perform cutting, drill- ing, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construc- tion. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections, unless otherwise indicated. Do not weld, cut, or abrade galvanized surfaces. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been posi- tioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. END OF SECTION 05500 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking. 2. Wood nailers. 3. Wood sheathing. 4. Plywood backing panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1 . 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in con- tact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). B. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic- tion. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated tem- peratures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated. 2,4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. C. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. 1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load -bearing construction of same type. 2. Species and Grade: Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north), Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Species and Grade: Southern pine, Select Structural No. 1 grade; SPIB. 4. Species and Grade: Spruce -pine --fir or Spruce -pine -fir (south), Select Structural No. I grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.5 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. B. Paper -Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M, with water-resistant material incorporated into core and with water- repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation. C. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated on drawings. C. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated on drawings. D.. Extruded -Polystyrene -Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths with tongue - and -groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer. I. Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). C. Owens Corning. d. Tenneco Building Products. E. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing. F. Oriented -Strand -Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designa- tion. C. Building Paper: Asphalt -saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate [furring,] nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. U i 0 C� Z 0 U wA Q __ I- 0 � CU Fr 0 LL � o0 Z . .i w_ 0- g J U Cn 0 E E 0 L V Co r CZ _' o Q co, J �LL C-6Cd 0 0 J Z �I w Lij U2 0 Q N � I 04E Mg 0 C 0 CZ -U U) 70 Wcov, CO CO z >� w a, J I W >J Z 0 co Z Z" o M co Z) > � LU LU w Cc 0 Z m o �i r N rl- CD O N 0 0 0 LU o 0 0 N N CJ J v ._ -LL N LO Co d- 1- co o m Urn '3 0 z Cr LU 60 o IIS c� = m a_ c� BLDG C SHELL m$e B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and plywood. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. D. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. E. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to over- lap both flashing and sheathing. END OF SECTION 06100 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Loose -fill building insulation. 3. Vapor retarders. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface -burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. Molded -Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90 lb/cu. ft., with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. For use in nonrated masonry walls. C. Mineral -fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass: 1. Faced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil - scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on one face. D. Perlite Loose -Fill Insulation: ASTM C 549, Type II or Type IV, with a thermal resistance for 4.1- to 7.4-lb/cu. ft. insulation of 3.3 to 2.8 deg F x h x sq. ft/Btu at 75 deg F for 1-inch thickness. For use in rated masonry walls 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Producer Members of Perlite Institute Inc. 2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B. Vapor -Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetra- tions in vapor retarder. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. B. Pour granular insulation into cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Limit fall of insulation to one story in height, but not exceeding 20 feet. C. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufactur- er's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. 2. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends, b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 4. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recom- mended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. 5. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire -containment system to prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire -containment system. 6. Place loose -fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 7. Stuff glass -fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. D. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor -retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose -fiber insulation. 1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. 2. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor -retarder tape according to vapor -retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor -retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor -retarder manu- facturer. 4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. 5. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. END OF SECTION 07210 SECTION 07241- EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Class PB exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over CMU or Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Class PB EIFS: Comply with performance characteristics in EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." I . Impact Resistance: Standard and Ultra -High. 2. Positive and Negative Wind -Load Performance: Capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. Provide test reports indicating compliance with wind load standard of authority having jurisdiction over all substrates indi- cated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each EIFS and for each color and texture required. D. Field quality -control test reports. E. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS through one source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manu- facturer as compatible with system components. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide EIFS and system components identical to those of EIFS and system components tested per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. I. Fire -Resistance Characteristics: ASTM E 119. 2. Full -Scale Fire Test: Tested mockup per ASTM E 108. 3. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Insula- tion board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. . 2. Senergy Inc.; SKW-MBT Construction Chemicals. 3. Sto Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish -coat systems, seal- ants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. B. Substrate: Glass -Mat gypsum sheathing board ASTM C931/C 931 at thickness indicated on drawings from the following manu- facturer. 1. G-P Gypsum Corporation, Dens -Glass Gold Sheathing. C. Water -/Weather -Resistive -Barrier Coating: Formulation and accessories designed for indicated use. D. Primer/Sealer: Substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between sub- strate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. E. Spacers: Furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer. F. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: Factory -mixed adhesive recommended by system manufacturer. G. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type I, and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." H. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali -resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials and complying with EIMA 105.01 and ASTM D 578. 1. Standard -Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 2. Heavy -Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd. 3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. 4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. I. Base -Coat Materials: Standard mixture: Manufacturer's standard. J. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: Waterproof mixture. K. Primer: Factory -mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base -coat surface for application of finish coat. L. Finish -Coat Materials: Standard acrylic -based coating. 1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. M. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fas- tener suitable for substrate. N. Trim Accessories: Manufactured from UV -stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1063. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Insulation: Adhesively or mechanically attach to substrate. 1. Expansion Joints: Apply adhesive to insulation by notched -trowel method to coat entire surface of gypsum sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing, unless system manufacturer's written instructions specify using primer - sealer y p y gp sealer with ribbon -and -dab method. Apply adhesive to a height of not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for factory mixed and not less than 3/8 inch (9.6 mm) for field mixed, measured from surface of insulation board before placement. 2. Install top surface of fastener head flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with minimum penetration according to ASTM PS 49 or system manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Space fasteners according to system manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally and working upward. 4. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (I 50 mm) from corners of window and door openings. a. Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from horizontal and 4 inches (I00 mm) from vertical joints in sheathing. b. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from horizontal joints in sheathing. C. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from aesthetic reveals. 5. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between. insulation boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. 7. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated. 8. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from sur- face of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 9. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than 3/4 inch_ (19 mm). 10. Install foam shapes attached to supporting substrate, where indicated. 11. Interrupt insulation at expansion joints. 1.2. Form -joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 13. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within system and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining sur- faces of width indicated. 14. Treat exposed edges of insulation board as follows: a. Wrap edges after installing insulation board and before applying field -applied reinforcing mesh. b. Wrap mesh of width required to extend not less than 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) onto substrate behind insulation board, cover insulation board edge, and extend not less than 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) onto insulation board face.. C. Wrap edges of insulation board, except those forming substrates of sealant joints, by encapsulating with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. d. Wrap edges of insulation board forming substrates of sealant joints within system or between system and other work by encapsulating with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 15. Treat edges of insulation board at trim accessories by extending base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. C. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. at locations indicated; where required by EIFS manufacturer; where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; at floor lines in multilevel wood - framed construction; and where wall height changes. D. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry -coat thickness. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base -coat material if necessary, so reinforcing - mesh color and pattern are not visible. F. Double -Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of standard impact rein- forcing mesh. G. Double Base -Coat Application: Where indicated, apply in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforc- ing mesh. H. Finish Coat: Apply maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture varia- tions. L Joint -Sealant Installation: 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." 3.2 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard material warranty (3-year minimum) from date of Owner Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 07241 SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies organic felt and fiberglass asphalt shingles. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Color of shingles: Section 09050, INTERIOR/EXTERIOR FINISHES, MATERIALS, AND FINISH SCHEDULE, B. Counterflashing and flashing of roof projections: Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. C. Skylights, roof scuttles, ridge and roof vents, Section 07700, ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES. 1.3 SUMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Samples: Shingles, each type, color and texture. C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data; 1. Shingles, each type 2. Installation instructions 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with the manufacturer's brand and name clearly marked thereon. B. Shingle bundle wrapping shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. C. Store shingles in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Store roll goods on end in an upright position. D. Keep materials dry, covered completely and protected from the weather. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below form a part o this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D226-97..................................... Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing D1970-01................................... Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection D2178-97................................... Asphalt Glass Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing D3018-03................................... Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules D3462-03................................... Asphalt, Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules F1667-02....................................Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples C. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL): UL790-97................................... Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Architectural shingle to be Grand Manor Shangle 425#, 110 MPH certified as manufactured by cerainteed. 2.1 SHINGLES A. Class A: (Fire resistive), per UL790. ASTM D3018, Type I and ASTM 3462, square butt for a maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches), headlap minimum 50 mm (2 inches), wind resistant, self sealing. Minimum weight: 10.3 Kg/sqm (210 lbs/100sft). 2.2 ROOFING NAILS A. ASTM F1667; Type I, Style 20, galvanized steel, deformed shanks, with heads 9.5 mm toll mm (3/8-inch to 7/16-inch) diameter. B. Use nails 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) long for shingles and 19 mm (3/4-inch long) for felt. 2.3 ROOFING FELT A. "Ice and water shield" as manufactured by W. R. Grace. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Roof surfaces shall be sound, reasonably smooth and free from defects which would interfere with roofing installation. B. Roof accessories, vent pipes and other projections through the roof must be in place and roof flashing installed or ready for installation before laying shingles. 3.2 LAYING A. Lay felt under shingles over entire roof. B. Install asphalt felt underlayment, lapping a minimum of 100 mm (four inches) at ends, 50 mm (2 inches) at head and 300 mm (12 inches) over ridge. Extend felt 13 mm (1/2-inch) beyond edges of roof. Nail felt 125 man (five inches) on centers along laps. C. At eaves, install strip of 41 Kg (90 pound) mineral surface roll roofing not less than 460 mm (18 inches) wide and starter course of roof shingles with tabs reversed. Both shall overhang lower edge of roof 13 mm (1/2-inch). D. Lay shingles with maximum exposure of 125 mm (5 inches). Nail shingles in accordance with manufacturer's published directions. 3.3 METAL DRIP EDGES A. At rakes, install metal drip edges made of stainless steels specified under Section, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Apply the g p pp y metal drip edge directly over the underlayment along the rakes. B. Secure metal drip edges with compatible nails spaced not more than 250 mm (10 inches) on center along the inner edges. 3.4 FLASHINGS T Provide metal flashings specified under Section, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL at the intersections of roofs, adjoining walls, or projections through the deck such as chimneys and vent stacks. Give careful attention to the installation of all flashings. 3.5 RIDGE A. Bend each shingle lengthwise down center to provide equal exposure on each side of ridge. Beginning at one end of ridge, apply shingles with maximum 125 mm (5 inches) exposure. B. Secure each shingle with one nail on each side, 210 mm (8-1/2 inches) back from exposed end and one inch up from edge. 3.6 VALLEY FLASHING A. Install metal valley flashing shown and as specified under FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. B. Secure valley flashing in accordance with shingle manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Expose flashing in open portion of valley a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches) and lap the shingles over the flashing a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches). END OF SECTION 07311 SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Factory -formed and field-assembled,exposed-fastener, lap -seam metal wall panels. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: B. Seismic Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads. C. Wind Loads: Comply with wind load requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of metal wall panel and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal wall panels, including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories. 2. Include technical data regarding fastening pattern required to meet wind load requirements into substrate indicated on draw- ings. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 or AZ55 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Finishes: a. High -Performance Organic Finish (Prefinished) : Where panels are indicated to be pre -finished, finish material with two -coat, thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified below: 1) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. 2) Water Resistance: 1000 hours. 4. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M; regular, 1/2 inch Type X, 5/8 inch thick. B. Substrate -Board Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion -resistance provi- sions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to substrate. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Base or Sill Angles: 0.079-inch bare steel thickness, cold -formed, galvanized steel sheet. C. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self -drilling or self -tapping 410 stainless or zinc -alloy steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 LAP -SEAM METAL WALL PANELS A. Exposed -Fastener, Lap -Seam Metal Wall Panels: Factory -formed, designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adja- cent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. I. Manufacturers: a. Berridge Manufacturing Company. b. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems. C. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. d. Reynolds Metals Company. 2. Profile: Tapered rib or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Material: Metallic -coated steel sheet, 0.0159 inch. a. Exterior Finish Pre -finished to color indicated on drawings. b. Color: Match Architect's samples where applicable. 2.6 ,ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.. l . Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed -cell laminated polyethyl- ene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure straps; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessaryry to ensure weathertight construction. B, Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's stan- dard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill. indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNNs "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. C. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Substrate Board: Install substrate board over wall sheathing on entire wall surface. Attach with substrate -board fasteners. 1. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to direction of metal wall panel seams with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 2. Comply with UL requirements for fire -rated construction. B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 32 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. . Anchor- metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition. 5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 6. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by paint- ing contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies. 1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flash- ings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Cn _4_� U ,�D " ciC)0 ro U °d ddu- .0 ch � -� U � w ro 9 cV E Mg co Q M �. o W3: o�; N o1 z N �41 CD CD o>< QC) 0 W z� w O N ti CD It �2_ a z O CD �Q z o :E m =) CO Ir a n o m U) w LU w Z O Il- N r-- O O N Cn Ln Ln 0 CDC. w o 0 0 N N N W J W r c0 1- co U W 0 La_ - cow CDLU o Q p en D . - LO o m I o J CD= UJ Y U U m BLDG C SHELL m$e Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 4. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wait panels are installed, unlessotherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as rec- ommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 07412 SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes built-up asphalt roofing systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system. D. Insulation Compliance Certificate. Submit certificate showing that insulation and R value complies with RIC/TIMA bulletin 281- 1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system approved by roofing system manufacturer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. Provide minimum total number of plies indicated regardless of whether roof system can meet warranty with a number less than specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Built-up Asphalt Roofing: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Firestone Building Products Company. C. GAF Materials Corporation. d. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt. 2.3 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt -,impregnated, glass -fiber felt. B. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Type I or II, polyester -reinforced, APP-modified asphalt sheet; mineral -granule surfaced; and as follows: 1. Granule Color: White 2.4 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type II, 1I1 or IV as recommended by built-up roofing system manufacturer for application. 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roof- ing. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4.586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. C. Cold -Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt -based, one- or two-part, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up roofing base flashings. D. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. E. Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, No. 6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, water -worn gravel or crushed stone, free of sharp edges. 2.6 ROOF INSULATION - DOUBLE LAYER A. General.: Insulation types specified are for a double layer system and are separated according to deck types and group according to layer. The two layers of selected insulation shall have a combined total heat aged "R"value equal to 17.9 minimum. 1. First Layer - Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major sur- faces, 2.0 lbs/cu. Ft. minimum, 2.2 to 2.3 inch thickness.. 2. Second Layer - Contractors Option #1. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal -coated, 3/4 thickness. 3. Second Layer - Contractors Option #2. Glass -Fiber -Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermo- setting resin binders, faced on one side with asphalt -coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper, 3/4" thickness. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabri- cate to slopes indicated. 2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to sub- strate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. 2.8 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: Mineral -granule -surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip -resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick, minimum.. 1. Pad Size: Manufacturer's Standard Size 2. Location: Pad to be located around all mechanical of rooftop equipment, connecting all mechanical or rooftop equipment, and paths to the vertical roof access point, or as additionally indicated on plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system and associated work and condi- tions roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory has been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. The commencement of work on a section of roof will indicate acceptance by the installer and he will be responsible for any corrective work that may be occasioned by his having started over an unsatisfactory surface. Verify that the substrate complies with the following: 1. Top Flanges: No concavity or convexity in excess of 1/16" across any adjacent flanges 2. Side Laps: Properly nested and mechanically fastened at maximum spacing of Y-0" o.c. 3. End Laps: Minimum 2" laps located over and fastened to supports 4. Deck secured to each supporting member in every other rib. (maximum spacing 12" o.c.) with puddle welds or approved mechanical fasteners. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. Fastening to comply with wind load requirements of authority having jurisdiction. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. 1. First Layer. Attach with FM approved screw -type fasteners with plates (minimum one fastener per every two square feet of insulation or per insulation manufacturers recommendation, whichever is more stringent. Lay Units in each layer with long joints continuous and short joints staggered 2. Second Layer. Install over first layer. Embed in full mopping of hot (EVT) Type II, III, or IV asphalt. Overlap all joints to a minimum of 12" each direction. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut boards to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around roof penetra- tions. Fill joints over 3/8" wide with Perlite insulation. E. Cut and replace broken corner and damaged boards with newly cut insulation pieces. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recom- mendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing." B. Where roof slope exceeds 1 inch per 12 inches (1: 12), install sheets of built-up roofing membrane parallel with slope. C. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. D. Install four ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. E. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofing membrane, base flashing, and stripping, flood -coat roof surface with 60 lb/100 sq. ft. of hot roofing asphalt. While flood coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course: 1. Aggregate Weight: 400 lb/100 sq. ft. F. Deficiencies. Repair all membrane deficiencies including voids, bridging, fishmouths, cuts and tears in all affected plies. G. Valleys and Waterways: Apply an extra roofing ply underneath of sufficient width to extend a minimum of eight inches up each side of valley or waterway. H. Cants: Terminate roofing plies 2" above all cant strips. 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing mem- brane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built- up roofing. E. Primer. Prime masonry and concrete walls to receive base flashings with asphalt primer at arate of gallon per 100 square feet. F. Fibrated Aluminum Coating. Cover completed base flashing and wall surface covering system with aluminum coating. Apply at a rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet. Extend aluminum coating from inside to edge of wall down over base flashing. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of hot roofing asphalt. B. Cap Sheet Strips: Install cap sheet strips, approximately 36 inches wide and in lengths not exceeding 10 feet, leaving a space of 6 inches between strips. Adhere in hot roofing asphalt. END OF SECTION 07511 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Manufactured reglets. 2. Formed roof drainage system. 3. Formed low -slope roof flashing and trim. 4. Forrned steep -slope roof flashing and trim. 5. Formed wall flashing and trim. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim. C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpo- rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat, thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluo- ride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. a. Color: Match Architect's samples B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, No. 2D finish. C Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality, mill phospha- tized for field painting. D. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper -bearing lead sheet. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other nuscel-- laneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum and not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 4. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.4 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory mitered and -welded corners and junctions. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. b. Fry Reglet Corporation. C. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indi- cated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with elastom eric sealant concealed within joints. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections. Furnish flat -stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion - joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Fabricate from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.024 thick. C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to inte- rior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in overflows. 1. Fabricate conductor heads from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0,0320 inch thick. 2.7 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide joint cover plates. 1. Fabricate from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and[ drill elongated holes for fasteners on] interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch > thick. E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material as indicated on drawings: 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. E Roof -Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead:. 4.0 lb/sq. ft. , hard tempered. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by paint- ing contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. P g g, g, D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: Use stainless -steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless -steel fasteners. 3. Copper: Use copper or stainless -steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless -steel fasteners. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommenda- tions and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge. 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing and Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Preven- tion Data Sheet 1-49 and the authority having jurisdiction. C. Counterflashin : Coordinate installation of counterflashing wit h installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant. D. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items pen- etrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. END OF SECTION 07620 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Roof hatches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coor- dinate with type of roofing indicated. 2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M with Class AZ-50 coating, structural quality, Grade 40 (Grade 275), or as required for strength. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1. Provide nonremovable fastener heads. E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. E Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. H. Elastomeric Sealant: Recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compat- ible with roofing system. 2.2 ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Available. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Metallic Products Corporation. 3. Vent Products Co., Inc. C. General: Units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with equipment to be supported. I. Provide preservative -treated wood nailers at tops of units and formed flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof. 2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.. 3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot, fabricate support units with height tapered to snatch slope to level tops of units. D. Roof Curbs: 1. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.0747-inch-thick, strue- tural-quality, hot -dip galvanized or alununum-zinc alloy -coated steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. 2. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.063-inch-thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints. 3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid insulation where indicated. 4. Cants: Formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction to ensure that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details in NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated, C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation. D. Flange Seals. Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form seal. E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant. F. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 07720 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 5. Firestop system through fire resistance - rated walls. 6. Exterior joints in sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Firestop System Submittals: For each through -penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting co C�E U `° a N N ¢� o 0 0 U U �' v N O Z N '� g o �-+ LL Q C)C� U' CN U z C w 7� O N ¢o o a� z 111) >co J E LU LW Cn zi O c cf)' o 5�' m' Cf) W w Ir U' w rr z LU o In o I- " I- C? O N co Ln LO 0 0 1 0 0 col w o 0 ca o 0 0 CM w N co rt In W t,- co BLDG C SHELL agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance with requirements for each condition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. B. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates using test method indicated in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Fire -resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 119 under conditions where positive furnaces pres- sures of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 1. Fire -Resistive Rating of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resis- tance Directory" or by another testing inspecting agency. D. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this Section or fail in adhesion within specified warranty period two years from date of Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field expe- rience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: (Gutters & Coping Sealant) 1. Products: a. Dow Corning; 795. b. GE Silicone, SilPruf. C. Tremco Spectrem 2 B. Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. For vertical masonry control joints, provide the following: a. Products: 1) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. 2) Tremco; Vulkem 116. 3) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - la. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class: 25. 2. Exposure: Use T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 3. Substrates: Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Urethane Sealant: 1. Concrete paving joints, horizontal traffic surfaces. a. Products: 1) Bostik, "Chem -Calk 950". 2) Sonneborn, "SL-1". 3) Tremco, Vulkem 45 b. Type and Grade S (singe component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class 25 d. Exposure: T (traffic). e. Substrate: O 2.3 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through -penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through -penetration firestop system under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through -penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and comply with "Performance Requirements" article. Use only components specified through penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, include the following: a. Slat -/rock -wood -fiber insulation. b. Sealants in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of full materials in liquid state. C. Fire -rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 6. Products: a. 3M Fire Prevention Products. b. Hilti Firestop Systems C. International Protective Coatings Corporation (IPC, a Division of W.R. Grace). d. Tremco Inc. ,A JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, prim- ers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type: C (closed -cell material with a surface skin). C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLA.NEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indi- cated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor performing work must be one the Sealant Manufacturer's Approved Applicators. B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose par- ticles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint sealants. 5. All surfaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry. C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migra- tion onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. E. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, appli- cations, and conditions indicated. F. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required to produce optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. G. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. H. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 1. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 2. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3. All deep cracks shall be filled to within 1/2 inch of the surface with an appropriate back-up material and caulked with a caulking gun. Caulking beads shall be smooth and straight. 4. Caulk around all door and storefront openings and where noted on the drawings. I. Masonry control joints shall be caulked with a high -quality paintable urethane caulk. Control depth of caulk at 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch with a continuous closed -cell rod. J. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Joint Configuration: Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. K. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. L. Through -Penetration Firestop Installation: 1. General: Installation through -penetration systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" of the firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for the applications indicated. END OF SECTION 07920 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and model, material description, label compliance, fire -resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Door Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. 3. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. Interior Doors: Complying with ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical -endurance level indicated. 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 (Full Flush). B. Exterior Doors: Complying with ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical -endurance level indicated. 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 (Full Flush). 2.4 FRAMES A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 1. 0.042-inch-for level 1 steel doors 2. 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) for openings wider than 48 inches. C. Door Silencers: Three silencers on single -door frames and two silencers on double -door frames. D. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch-thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings. E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch- thick zinc -coated steel sheet. 1. Masonry Wall Anchors: 0.177-inch diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc -coat items that are to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. B. Exterior Doors: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic -coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from cold -rolled steel sheet. D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. E. Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Door -Edge Profile: Beveled edge. H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. I. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. J. Frame Construction: I. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Provide temporary spreader bars. 2. Fabricate knock -down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly. 3. Fabricate knock -down, drywall slip-on frames for in -place gypsum board partitions. 4. Provide terminated stops where indicated. K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at Project site. L. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. M. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch-thick steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. N. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied coat of rust -inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for accep- tance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. 2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in -place partitions, install knock -down, drywall slip-on frames. 3. Fire -Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80. B. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115AG. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat with compatible air -drying primer. END OF SECTION 08110 SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123 M for steel and iron products and ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware. B. Steel Sheet: 1. Metallic Coated: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60) zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum panels indicated. D. Plaster Bead: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch zinc -coated steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster. E. Paint: 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2. Shop Primer for Metallic -Coated Steel: Organic zinc -rich primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with top- coat. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cesco Products. 2. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 3. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Milcor Limited Partnership. B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: 1. Material: Prime -painted steel sheet. 2. Surface Type: Masonry, Finish on gypsum substrate, or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Locations: Ceilings or as indicated on Drawings 4. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface -mounted trim. 6. Hinges: Spring -loaded concealed pin type. 7. Latch: Screwdriver. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. END OF SECTION 08311 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART I- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior entrance systems. 2. Exterior storefront systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movements indicated without failure when supporting full dead loads and without framing members transferring stresses to glazing. B. Structural -Silicone -Sealant Joints: Less than 20-psi tensile and shear stress in joints. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. 2. Seismic Load: As indicated on Drawings or required by authority having jusrisdiction. D. Structural Performance: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated. 1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: When carrying full dead load, not to exceed amount that reduces glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. E. Structural Testing: ASTM E 330 at 150 percent of inward and outward wind -load design pressures for duration required by design wind velocity without system evidencing material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span. F. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static -air -pressure difference of 1.571bf/sq. ft.. G. Water Penetration: No water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind -load design pressure but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. H. Temperature Change (Range): Accommodate 120 deg F ambient and 180 deg F material surfaces. I. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Not less than 45 per AAMA 1503.1. J. Average Thermal Conductance (U-Value): Not more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F per AAMA 1503.1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work. 1. Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports indicating compliance with applicable wind load provisions required by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials n r and workmanship within two ears from date fSubstantial Completion.i r includes, p y o Fa lu e i c udes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for systems is based on Kawneer Tri-Fab 450. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Arch Aluminum and Glass Co. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 extrusions. B. Finish: Clear Anodic Finish. Class I, AAMA 607.1. C. Glazing: Specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Glazing Gaskets: Pressure -glazing system of black resilient glazing gaskets with sealed corners, setting blocks, and shims or spac- ers. E. Structural -Sealant -Glazing System: 1. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended in writing by manufacturer, and compatible with sealant. 2. Structural Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 1184, recommended in writing by sealant and system manufacturers for application indicated, and compatible with system components with which it comes in contact. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. b. Tensile Strength: 100 psi minimum. C. Modulus of Elasticity: Allows maximum movement of 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by system design. 3. Secondary Sealant (Weatherseal): ASTM C 920, compatible with structural silicone sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact, and accommodates 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at the time of application when tested according to ASTM C 719. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. F. Gaskets, Sealants, and Joint Fillers: 1. For joints within framing system, as recommended in writing by manufacturer for joint type indicated. 2. For joints at perimeter of systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, cold -applied asphalt mastic paint formulated for 30-mil thick- ness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fas- tened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie -rods, and with snap -on extruded -aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. a. Stile Design: Medium, 3-1/2-inch maximum width. 2. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 door hardware Section. B. Fasteners, Flashings, and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. B. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Doors and Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads and for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed hardware before finishing components. D. Factory assemble framing and components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 2. Install secondary sealant (weatherseal) to produce weatherproof joints. 3. Remove excess sealant before sealant has cured. D. Install sealants at system perimeter to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, Ili -nit offset to 1/16 inch For surfaces meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. F. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. END OF SECTION 08410 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART I- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications: 1. Doors. 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Storefront framing. B. See Division 8 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts". 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Work under this specification includes the furnishing of all labor, material and services necessary and reasonably incidental to the providing and installing of all glazing in sash and doors shown on the drawings. B. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where appli- cable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. C. Glass Design: Glass thickness indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thickness by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thickness indicated, but not less than thickness and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thickness: Select minimum glass thickness to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following require- ments: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated. C. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 inch tempered. e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat -Absorbing Glass: "Insulated", 1/4 inch tempered inside and outside with 1/2 inch air- space. D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C), in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's pub- lished test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass liter, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. Center -of -Glass U-Values: National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 3. Center -of -Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer pro- gram. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for tinted glass product indicated upon request of architect. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS C�E C1, g N Q M o o a, U N om N oX x o� 0 �� z� w 0 N ¢o N C3 O Q 0 i 0 CZ 0 U_ Z- M M W C)o o QI z �Q rn a' W M Q J U Cl� 0 E E O V L Q N o -� } o CZ = o 0 o J w Cf.)_ LU 0 OLU Y N a z 0 W z 0 W m � w w m Cr w m o z 0- m o 1- N r' O O N ' 0' O ' to o 0 0 CO N N N W T N M LO CD 1- W � W m ¢ m F- o w L ¢ (Yj (NW NCn O C:3 = m a m o 0 BLDG C SHELL A006 F- 11 _r1 r lT it 1 r i I--- - --- -- 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: l . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. a. ASA Industries, Inc. b. Libby -Owens Ford -Glass Company C. Mississippi Glass Company d. Pittsburg Plate Glass Company 2. Trade names herein denote grade, type and quality of material required. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3 1. Fabrication Process: At manufacturer's option. 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Colors of Exposed Sealants: As indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifica- tions for type, grade, class and uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASMT C 920 for uses indicated. C. Cylindrical Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and other- wise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of type and material indicated below and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene or EPDM dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 846. 2. Silicone dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Neoprene, EPDM or Silicone soft compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufactur- ers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to main- tain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). E Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -resistance rating. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing stan- dard, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair perfonnance and appearance from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing. 4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass liter. 5. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 min) unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances. B. Protection: 1. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. 2. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged, including natural causes, accidents, and vandal- ism, during construction period. D. At completion this contractor shall wash and polish all glazing and clean adjacent surfaces soiled by his work. END OF SECTION 08800 SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portland Cement Plaster Finishes: Stucco. 2. Non -load -bearing steel framing and furring. 3. Metal lath and metal accessories. B. See Division 5 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for load -bearing steel framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each texture required upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide assemblies identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 1.19 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply q a1: Co p y with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommenda- tions of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Sheet Components, General: Metal complyingwith ASTM C 645 requirements. p 1. Protective Coating: a. Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. b. Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: Size metal ceiling supports to comply with ASTM C 1063, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: Anchors fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holesorloops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 3. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, and in depth indicated. 4. Furring Channels (Furring Members): a. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange, 3/4 inch deep. C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, and in depth indicated. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2.2 LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847. 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet, structural quality, with coating complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 2. Diamond -Mesh Lath: Self -furring. a. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd.. B. Paper Backing: Factory bonded to back of lath, complying with FS UU-B-790, Type I. 1. Vapor -Permeable Paper: Grade D, Style 2. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: ASTM C 1063. Coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large -mesh, diamond -metal lath fabricated from zinc -alloy or welded -wire mesh fab- ricated from 0.0475-inch diameter, zinc -coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch thick. C. Cornerbeads: Small nose comerbeads with expanded flanges of large -mesh diamond -metal lath allowing full plaster encase- ment. 1. Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. D. Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with expanded flanges. 1. Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. E. Curved Casing Beads: Square -edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated. F. Control Joints: Prefabricated with removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. 1. Material: Zinc alloy or aluminum. 2. Type: 2-piece, casing beads with back flanges formed to produce slip -joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 to 5/8 inch. G. Corner Reinforcement: Special Stucco type woven wire corner reinforcing strips. H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base -Coat Cements: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Job -Mixed Finish -Coat Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. C. Stucco Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory -packaged stucco, including portland cement, aggregate, and other propri- etary ingredients. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpo- rated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Florida Stucco Corp. . b. Highland Stucco. C. IPA Systems, Inc. d. United States Gypsum Co. D. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S; or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897. F. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 system, manufactured or natural sand, white. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932. C. Acid -Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (10 percent solution of commercial hydrochloric acid) mixed 1 part to not less than 6 nor more than I parts water. D. Dash -Coat Material: 2 parts portland cement to 3 parts fine sand, mixed with water to a mushy -paste consistency. E. Steel Drill Screws: 1. ASTM C 1002 for fastening metal lath to wood or steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. 2. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. C. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. F. Three -Coat Work over Metal Lath: 1. Scratch and Brown Coat Mixes: Scratch, 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime,,2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate; brown, 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts aggregate. G. Two -Coat Work over Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Base Coat Mix: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to I- 1/2 parts lime, 3 to 4 parts aggregate. H. Job -Mixed Finish Coats: 1. Mixes with Sand Aggregates: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LATH AND FURRING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and ASTM C 1063. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer. C. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abut building structure i,orizontally and where partition or wall abuts overhead structure, isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. I. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. D. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing system. 3.2 NON -LOAD -BEARING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Suspension Systems: 1. Preparation and Coordination:Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead struc-tural tural systems to ensure inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacings required to support ceiling. 2. Hanger Installation: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with referenced standards. a. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 3. Install ceiling suspension system components of sizes and spacings indicated, but not in smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by referenced lathing and furring installation standards. B. Partition Framing and Furring: Comply with ASTM C 754 and ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Fur- ring." 1. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath: a. Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend partition support systems to finish ceilings and attach to ceiling suspension members, unless otherwise e indi- cated. 3.3 LATHING A. Install where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from mate- rials indicated that comply with referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards. 1. Suspended and Furred Ceilings: Use flat, diamond -mesh lath. 2. Vertical Metal Framing and Furring: Use flat, diamond -mesh lath and cold -rolled channel stud framing. 3. Exterior Sheathed Wall Surfaces: Use paper -faced, self -furring, diamond -mesh lath 4. Monolithic Surfaces: Use [self -furring, diamond -mesh lath or vertical metal framing and furring as required for plaster thickness. 3.4 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING A. Protect contiguous Work from damage and deterioration caused by plastering with temporary covering and other provisions neces- sary. B. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. C. Etch concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Scrub with acid -etching solution on previously wetted surface and rinse thoroughly with clean water. Repeat application, if necessary, to obtain adequate suction and mechanical bond of plaster (where dash coat, bonding agent, or additive is not used). D. Apply bonding agent on concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. E. Apply dash coat on concrete surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Moist -cure dash coat for at least 24 hours after appli- cation and before plastering. E Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch -coat work. G. Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds. H. Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashing. I. Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete and concrete unit masonry substrates, except where a bonding agent has been applied, to produce optimum suction for plastering. 3.5 PLASTERING ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold acces- sories in place and in alignment during plastering. 1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners. 2. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect: a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet in either direction or a length -to -width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. c. Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft. d. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. in area. e. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. B. Where sound -rated plaster work is indicated by STC ratings or other notation, seal work at perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Comply with ASTM C 919 and plaster manufacturer's written instruc- tions for location of sealant beads. C. Install sound attenuation blankets within stud cavities where indicated. 3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Plaster Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Mixing: Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced applica- tion standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. 2. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. 3. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials. B. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface. C. Grout hollow -metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base -coat plaster material, and before lath- ing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire -resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor. D. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other. E. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. E Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with comerbeads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work. G. Number of Coats: 1. Metal Lath: Three coats. 2. Concrete Unit Masonry: Two coats. 3. Concrete, Cast -in -Place or Precast: Two coats when surface condition complies with ASTM C 926 for plaster bonded to solid base. H. Finish Coats: 1. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine -textured finish matching sample.. 2. Trowel -Textured Finish: Apply finish coat with hand -troweled -textured finish matching sample. 3. Moist --cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 92-6, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." 3.7 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND CLEANING A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point -up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as neces- sary to comply with required visual effects. B. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimizespattering of laster on other work. Promptly remove plaster p Y g p p P Y from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair- surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. END OF SECTION 09220 SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL, 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. 3. Non -load -bearing steel framing. 1.2 SUBMIT'TALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work upon request of Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency accept- able to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM L 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. a. Protective Coating: 1) Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized. 2) Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475- inch-diameter wire. 2. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: a. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified indepen- dent testing agency. 3. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. 4. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, and in depth indicated. 5. Furring Channels (Furring Members): a. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. b. "Z" Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 1 1/2 inch deep. C. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 1. Products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Fire Front 630 System. C. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. D. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2. Deep -Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges. 3. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch or as indicated. 4. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange, and in depth indi- cated. a. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. 5. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire. 6. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: Ir_ thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. 2. Type X: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular - type panels of the same thickness, 1/4 inch thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. D. Sag -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on ceiling surfaces. E. Exterior Gypsum Panels for Ceilings and Soffits: 1. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with core type and in thickness indicated. a. Product: G-P Gypsum Corp; Dens -Glass Gold. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners . 3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. I. Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; As indicated by designation on Drawings. b. Gordon, Inc.. C. MM Systems Corporation; As indicated by designation on Drawings. d. Pittcon Industries; As indicated by designation on Drawings. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion -resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: I. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-1.0 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. I. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type, taping compound. 2. Embeddingand First Coat: For embedding tape, and first coat on joints, flanges of trimaccessories, and fasteners, use set- ting -type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting --type, sandable topping compound.. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommenda- tions. l . Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 min) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hang- ers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to ,support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit. 4. Screw furring to wood framing. 5. Wire -tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. 6. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall. 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install fram- ing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. OOOF to � to CV mg C-) N a U � ¢6 N O 0 0 O i, N � o04 Z cV W n U WCD _V r O� • r--4 O vU L.-4 C� U vn O N U wCq N }, '� _J ti CV.'., ¢ \J f/� N V \/ P_ 1 w-1 a- � :.. �. .1 .. ! ... I : . s= 6 11 Q i 0 CZ °°' z O U W M' MI _ z U1. �++ o E�o o� z �Q _ W Q . M c� (n = 0 E E 0 i >+ i CDL Q) N p o CZ = o d U) ZD - X 0 .16" O p _'J z Cc: _, WIL CO S 2 � Oe LU N IL Cn 0 40 CZ U .0 QD Q Cn U W CMI h LU 00w = en z iii > o , W CO -, m M Q N. < w� >� W 4 � i7 z 0 W z U) O �i C/) m U) > W Cr U) w cc o z a M o I� N r -I O O CV M LO LO co 0 0 w a o 0 QCDN N N J - LU r N C°i LL? CO I� aD m U LJ it IL rn M o w � L, Cn U)O o m o m CL a Y i U m I BLDGC SHELL � A007 ) 2. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 3. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resis- tance -rated assembly. 4. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 5. Laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. B. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: Apply exterior gypsum panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Fasten with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 FINISHING A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. 4. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 09260 SECTION 09900 - PAINT AND WALL FINISHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed items and surfaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. 1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.. 2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg E Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. C. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: 3 percent, but not less than I gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCT'S 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part. 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory for- mulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.3 PREPARATORY COATS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex -based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous -Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust -inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc -Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat. C. Interior Primer: Interior latex -based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous -Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust -inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc -Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat. 2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Low -Luster - Satin Finish Acrylic Paint: 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec 100% Acrylic Exterior Satin No. 184. 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402 series Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Satin Finish. 3. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series. B. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish. 3. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be painted. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protec- tion before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on deliv- ery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommen- dations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recom- mended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. E. Material Preparation: 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and pro- vide desired protection. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient seal- ing. N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfec- tions will not be acceptable. 0. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregular- ity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. C. Provide' Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA PL 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): I . Acrylic. Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. B. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. C. Mineral -Fiber -Reinforced Cement Panels: 1. Acrylic Finish:Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. D. Ferrous Metal: L Acrylic Finish Two finish coatsover a rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer (not required on shop -primed items). b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. E. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. J. Aluminum: 1. Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes. b. Finish Coats: See section 2.4. END OF SECTION 09900 SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed, extruded -aluminum louvers. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and wind loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward, without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from a temperature change (range) of 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces, by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connec- tions, and other detrimental effects. C. Air -Performance, Water -Penetration, and Wind -Driven Rain Ratings: As demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500-L. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each type of finish upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports verifying compliance with applicable wind loads by testing methods approved by the authority having jurisdic- tion.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Louvers: a. Airline Products Co. b. Cesco Products. C. Greenheck. d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view. C. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manu- facturer, concealed from view. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Greenheck ESU or a comparable product of one of the following: a. Airline Products Co. b. Cesco Products. C. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Blade Profile: Plain blade without center baffle. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Performance Requirements: a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. ft. for 48-inch- wide by 48-inch- high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 700 fpm. C. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at free -area velocity. 2.5 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver. B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. C. Louver Screening: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire. 2.6 FINISHES A. Aluminum, High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brassorlead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the fac- tory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. K END OF SECTION 10200 c' .V_ C R 0 C= N 0 0 L CZ O Z M _ 113 s- o 0 C� 0 o �, 0 L" z _ �c a W M Q J 0 i it 0 I i 0 N o 4 CZ z a CO CE C) -1 C' 0 d ' 0 LU W x a. co 04E ,Ag 00a ce) �? 03 3b N M V y 30 N v W 0 CZ U (D 0- (D U) 0 ui 0) W w M x us z L M W m W W z 0 U) z W 0 m U) U)LU m W W 0 Z a m o I- N �I O O CV M L6 L6 OI O CO00 I �O UJ CD CD Q N �N N w C,4 C7 v- to CO h- co r' z CD N Cn o C`3 C) = m Ir0 a_ L 0 BLDG C SHELL A008 CLADDING AND COMPONENTS PRESSURES, PSF EXPOSURE C H<30' 1=1.0 V=110 0°<ROOF ANGLE<l0' ROOF WALL OVERHANGS TRIB. AREA ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 A<20 -30,5 -51.1 -77.0 -33.0 -40.7 -44.0 -72.2 14.0 14.0 14.0 30.5 30.5 20<A<50 -29.7 -45.6 -63.7 -31.6 -38.1 43.1 -56.7 14.0 14.0 14.0 29.1 29.1 50<A<100 -28.7 -38.5 -46.3 -29.8 -34.4 _43.1 -56.7 14.0 14.0 14.0 27.3 27.3 100<A -27.9 -39.3 -39.3 -28.6 -31.6 -41.3 56.7 14.0 14.0 14.0 25.9 25.9 CLADDING AND COMPONENTS PRESSURES, PSF EXPOSURE C H<35' 1=1.0 V=110 30°<ROOF ANGLE<45° ROOF WALL OVERHANGS TRIB. AREA ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 A<20 -44.2 -51.8 -51.8 -47.9 -59.0 -75.0 -75.0 40.5 40.5 40.5 44.2 44.2 20<A<50 -42.1 -49.3 -49.3 -45,8 -55.2 -72.6 -72.6 39.4 39.4 39.4 42.2 42.2 50<A<100 -39.0 -46.5 -46.5 -43.2 -49•9 -72.6 -72.6 37.7 37.7 37.7 39.6 39.6 100<A -36.7 -44.2 -44.2 -41.5 -45.8 -72.6 72.6 -36.7 36.7 36.7 37.6 37.6 CLADDING AND COMPONENTS PRESSURES, PSF EXPOSURE C H<45' 1=1.0 V=110 300<ROOF ANGLE<45° ROOF WALL OVERHANGS TRIB. AREA ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 A<20 -46.7 -54.6 -54.6 -50.5 -62.3 -79.1 -79.1 40.5 42.7 42.7 46.7 46.7 20<A<50 -42.1 -52.0 -52.0 -48.3 -58.3 -76.7 -76.7 39.4 41.6 41.6 44.5 44.5 50<A<100 -39.0 -49.1 -49.1 -45.6 -52.6 _76.7 -76.7 37,7 39.8 39.8 41.8 41.8 100<A -36.7 -46.7 -46.7 -43.8 -48.3 _76.7 T_ -76.7 36.7 38.7 38.7 39.6 39.6 NET UPLIFT PRESSURES, PSF EXPOSURE C H<30 1=1 V=110 00<ROOF ANGI F<50 ROOF TRIB. AREA ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 JOIST -27.7 -43.6 -61.7 -36.3 GIRDERS -24.9 -36.3 PR SR SCALE: N.T.S. 4 ZONES SCALE: N.T.S. GENERAL A. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2004 WITH 2O05 AND 2006 AMENDMENTS, AS ADOPTED AND SUPPLEMENTED BY LOCAL REGULATIONS. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS AT THE SITE AND SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ACTUAL CONDITIONS AND INFORMATION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. C. THE CONTRACT STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REPRESENT THE COMPLETE DESIGN OF THE STRUCTURE. THEY DO NOT INDICATE THE MEANS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION UNLESS SO STATED OR NOTED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MEASURES NECESSARY TO PROTECT THE WORKERS, OR OTHER PERSONS DURING CONSTRUCTION. D. OBSERVATION VISITS TO THE SITE BY FOR OR REPRESENTATIVES OF THE FOR MAY BE MADE DURING CONSTRUCTION. ANY SUPPORT SERVICES PERFORMED HEREIN SHALL BE DISTINGUSHED FROM INSPECTION AND/OR TESTING SERVICES PERFORMED BY OTHERS, AND ARE NOT TO BE CONSTRUED AS SUPERVISON AND/OR MANAGEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION. E. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY ERECTION BRACING AND SHORING OF ALL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AS REQUIRED FOR STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE DURING ALL PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY CONDITION WHICH, IN HIS OPINION, MIGHT ENDANGER THE STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE OR CAUSE DISTRESS WITHIN THE STRUCTURE. F. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE STACKED ON FLOORS OR ROOFS IN EXCESS OF THE DESIGN LIVE LOADS WHICH ARE INDICATED IN THE GENERAL NOTES. IT IS THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE THAT THE SUBCONTRACTORS ARE INFORMED AND DO NOT VIOLATE THIS IMPORTANT REQUIREMENT. IMPACT SHALL BE AVOIDED WHEN PLACING MATERIALS ON FLOORS OR ROOFS. G. DRAWINGS ARE NOT TO BE SCALED. H. FOR ACTUAL ELEVATION OF FIRST FLOOR (REF. ELEV. 0'4" HEREIN), SEE SITE PLAN, 1. DRAWINGS INDICATE GENERAL AND TYPICAL DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION. WHERE CONDITIONS ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY INDICATED BUT ARE OF SIMILAR CHARACTER TO THE DETAILS PRESENTED, SIMILAR DETAILS SHALL BE USED SUBJECT TO THE REVIEW OF ENGINEER OF RECORD. J. ALTERATIONS TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ARE NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE ENGINEER. ANY UNAUTHORIZED DEVIATION FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, AND CORRECTION THEREOF, IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. SUBSEQUENT DOCUMENTATION / REQUESTS TO BUILDING ENGINEERING OF RECORD FROM GC SHALL INCLUDE EVALUATION OF DEVIATIONS BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA. K. THE MOST STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS APPLY IN CASE OF CONFLICT BETWEEN SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS, CODES AND DRAWINGS. L. DESIGN DATA ROOF LIVE LOADS 20 PSF ROOF DEAD LOAD 20 PSF MAX. (10 PSF TO BE USED FOR UPLIFT) WIND DESIGN: VELOCITY: 110 MPH (ASCE 7-02) IMPORTANCE: 1.00 BLDG. CATEGORY: II, ENCLOSED WIND EXPOSURE: C INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFF: +l- 0.18 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWING REVIEW IS FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE DESIGN CONCEPT. CORRECTIONS OR COMMENTS MADE ON THIS REVIEW DO NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR ERRORS AND OMMISIONS, AND FROM COMPLIANCE WITH THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. CORRECTIONS OR COMMENTS DO NOT AUTHORIZE AN INCREASE IN THE CONSTRUCTION BUDGET. B. APPROVAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS DOES NOT INDICATE ACCEPTANCE OF DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR PREVIOUS SHOP DRAWING REVIEW, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED THEREIN BY ENGINEER OF RECORD. C. ANY CHANGES TO THE DESIGN CONCEPT SHOWN IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING AND APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. ALL SUCH CHANGES SHALL BE "BUBBLED" ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS AND REFERENCED TO THE PROPER R.F.I. D. SUBMITTALS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS (REFERENCE ITEM C ABOVE FOR EXCEPTION). NON -CONFORMING OR NON -REVIEWED SUBMITTALS WILL BE RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW. 1. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE "APPROVED", SIGNED AND DATED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL TO ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT OF RECORD. 2. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL NOT CONTAIN REPRODUCTIONS OF THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS. 3. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: SHOP DRAWINGS / DATA TO BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL 9 CONSTRUCTION JOINT LOCATIONS IN STRUCTURAL SLABS 1 WALL / VENEER CONTROL JOINT LOCATIONS CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS (INDICATE INTENDED USE OF EACH) REINFORCING STEEL STRUCTURAL STEEL (INCLUDING JOIST & JOIST GIRDERS) METAL DECK SHOP DRAWINGS /DATA TO BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL SUBMITTALS SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER LISCENCED IN THE STATE OF THE PROJECT LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING, TRUSSES AND TRUSS SYSTEMS ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS PRE-ENGINEERED CANOPIES, AWNINGS AND MARQUEES E. PROVIDE COPIES OF MANUFACTURERS LITERATURE FOR ALL MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS USED IN CONSTRUCTION ON THE PROJECT. FOUNDATIONS / SITE WORK A. FOUNDATION DESIGN IS BASED UPON THE FOLLOWING SOILS REPORT: NO REPORT PROVIDED: PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, CONTRACTOR SHALL RETAIN THE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR HEREIN IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PERFORMING ALL EARTHWORK OPERATIONS IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS. IF THE FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS AND/OR DESIGN VALUES DIFFER FROM THAT ASSUMED, MODIFICATIONS TO THE DRAWINGS MAY BE REQUIRED. DO NOT PLACE CONCRETE PRIOR TO GEOTECHNICAL APPROVAL, B. ALLOWABLE SOIL PRESSURE ASSUMED TO BE 2000 PSF (REF A., ABOVE). SHALLOW FOUNDATION SYSTEM IS ASSUMED TO BE ADEQUATE. ESTIMATED SETTLEMENT ASSUMED TO BE NO GREATER THAN 1" OVERALL AND �' DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT. IT IS ASSUMED THAT ALL PROBLEMATIC SOILS (ORGANIC, EXPANSIVE, ETC.) WILL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH SUITABLE STRUCTURAL FILL. C. ANY FILL REQUIRED TO BACKFILL EXCAVATED AREA OR ACHIEVE FINISHED GRADE IN STRUCTURAL AREAS SHALL BE AS INDICATED BY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. THE FILL SHALL BE PLACED IN LEVEL LIFTS NOT TO EXCEED 12 INCHES LOOSE THICKNESS AND COMPACTED TO A MINIMUM OF 95% OF THE SOIL'S MODIFIED PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY AS DETERMINED BY ASTM SPECIFICATION D-1557. D. IN -PLACE DENSITY TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN EXPERIENCED ENGINEERING TECHNICIAN. TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED FOR EACH 2,000 SQUARE FEET, IN EVERY COLUMN FOOTING LOCATION AND EACH 50 FEET ALONG WALL FOOTINGS. COPIES OF THE TEST REPORTS SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. E. REMOVE FREE WATER FROM EXCAVATIONS BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE, F. CAUTION SHOULD BE USED WHEN OPERATING VIBRATORY COMPACTING EQUIPMENT NEAR THE EXISTING STRUCTURE TO AVOID THE RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE STRUCTURE. G. REFER TO ARCHITECTURE DRAWINGS FOR ANY NECESSARY WATERPROOFING REQUIREMENTS. REINFORCED CONCRETE A. CONCRETE WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ACI-05 SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS. B. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED (U.O.N.): PORTLAND CEMENT PER ASTM C150 PROPORTIONED FOR MAX. ALLOWABLE UNIT SHRINKAGE OF 0.03% 25% MAXIMUM FLYASH BY WEIGHT SLABS 3000 PSI 28-DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, NORMAL WEIGHT, MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE OF 1 ", 0.55 MAX. W/C, 4"-5" SLUMP FOOTINGS 3000 PSI 28-DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, NORMAL WEIGHT, MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE OF 1", 0.55 MAX. W/C, 3"4" SLUMP COLUMNS/BEAMS 4000 PSI 28-DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, NORMAL WEIGHT, MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE OF 3/4", 0.45 MAX. W/C, 4%5" SLUMP C. CONCRETE COVER OVER REINFORCEMENT: FOOTINGS 3" SLABS, COLUMNS AND BEAMS EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WHEATHER 2" (#6 TO #18 BARS), 1 1/2" (#3 TO #5 BARS) SLABS NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WHEATHER 3/4" (#3 TO #11 BARS) BEAMS AND COLUMNS NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WHEATHER 1 1/2" (#3 TO #18 BARS) D. REINFORCING, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED (U.O.N.): 1. REINFORCING BARS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60. 2. WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A185. WIRE FABRIC SHALL BE CONTINUOUS, LAPPED ONE CROSS WIRE SPACING PLUS 2" MINIMUM. 3. WHERE CONTINUOUS REINFORCING IS SPECIFIED, SUCH REINFORCING MAY BE SPLICED WHERE APPROVED IN WRITTING BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. 4. AT CHANGES IN DIRECTION OF CONCRETE WALLS, BEAMS, AND FOOTINGS, PROVIDE CORNER BARS OF SAME SIZE, QUANTITY AND SPACING AS HORIZONTAL STEEL. 5. LAP SPLICES SHALL BE 48 BAR DIAMETERS, WIRED TOGETHER. E. CONTRACTOR SHALL EMPLOY A QUALIFIED TESTING LABORATORY TO PREPARE ONE SET OF FOUR TEST CYLINDERS PER DAY OR ONE SET FOR EACH 50 CUBIC YARDS POURED, MAXIMUM. LABORATORY REPORT SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SHOWING STRENGTH OF CONCRETE AT 7 (1 CYLINDER) AND 28 (2 CYLINDERS) DAYS, FINAL CYLINDER SHALL BE HELD IN RESERVE. F. THERE SHALL BE NO HORIZONTAL JOINTS IN ANY CONCRETE POURS UNLESS SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. THE ENGINEER OF RECORD SHALL APPROVE ALL DEVIATIONS OR ADDITIONAL JOINTS IN WRITING. G. SAW CUT CONTROL JOINTS SHALL BE LOCATED @ 15' O.C. MAXIMUM, U.O.N. WITH LENGTH TO WIDTH RATIO NOT TO EXCEED 2:1. REFER TO SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING COORDINATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. REFER TO PLANS FOR EXPANSION JOINT LOCATIONS. H. ALL EPDXY ANCHORS USED AT REINFORCED CONCRETE SHALL BE HILTI HVA, U.O.N, I. POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS (PAFS) NOT PERMITTED AT CONCRETE. STRUCTURAL STEEL A. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO AISC SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS - ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN,13TH ED. B. MATERIAL SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING, EXCEPT AS NOTED: W BEAMS ASTM A992 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES AND SHAPES ASTM A36 THREADED ROD ANCHO:7' )LTS ASTM F1554 GRADE 36 OTHER ANCHOR BOLTS ASTM A307 PIPE SECTIONS ASTM A53, GRADE B. TUBE SECTIONS ASTM A500, GRADE B. C. WELDING, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED (U.O.N.): 1. ALL SHOP AND FIELD WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO AWS STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE, ANSI/AWS D1.1. 2. ALL WELDING IN THE SHOP AND IN THE FIELD SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CERTIFIED WELDERS ONLY. 3. WELDING ELECTRODES SHALL BE E70XX LOW HYDROGEN. D. CONNECTIONS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED (U.O.N.): 1. TIGHTEN BOLTS BY THE "SNUG -TIGHT" METHOD. 2. FIELD CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE WITH 3/4" DIA. MIN. HIGH -STRENGTH BEARING TYPE BOLTS (A325N) WITH THREADS ASSUMED TO BE INCLUDED IN SHEAR PLANES. 3. CONNECTIONS NOT FULLY DETAILED IN PLANS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY CONTRACTOR ACCORDING TO AISC STANDARDS. IF FORCES ARE NOT PRESENTED IN PLAN OR DIRECTLY IMPLIED THEREIN, CONNECTIONS SHALL BE BASED ON THE FULL CAPACITY OF THE SECTION(S) - EXCEPT THAT STEEL CONNECTIONS FOR BEAMS SIMPLY SUPPORTED AND UNIFORMLY LOADED MAY BE BASED ON 55% OF THE AISC UNIFORM 'LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF THE BEAMS. 4. CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DOUBLE ANGLE OR STANDARD SHEAR TAB TYPE U.O.N.. SINGLE ANGLE AND EXTENDED SHEAR TAB CONNECTIONS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY i DETAILED AS SUCH HEREIN. t. 6H UF UKAVVIINUb (5tt bUISMi I f F''_",.=>) bHALL INL;L.UUt UUMh Lt It Ut I AILINU Ul- b I KUC; f UKAL 6 I ttL MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED TO FABRICATE AND ERECT ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. F, GROUT UNDER BEARING PLATES SHALL BE NON-METALLIC, NON -SHRINK TYPE WITH A COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF AT LEAST 6000 PSI WHEN BEARING ON 3000 PSI CONCRETE, AND 8000 PSI WHEN BEARING ON 4000 PSI CONCRETE. G. ALL STEEL EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL BE HOT -DIP GALVANIZED OR OTHERWISE PROTECTED. H. ALL STEEL EXPOSED TO SOIL SHALL BE ENCASED IN CONCRETE OR OTHERWISE PROTECTED, COLD -FORMED STEEL FRAMING / TRUSS SYSTEMS A. ALL COLD -FORMED STEEL FRAMING SHALL CONFORM TO THE "NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF COLD -FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS," AISI, 2001 EDITON AND 2004 SUPPLEMENT. B. ALL LOAD BEARING STUDS SHALL BE "C" SHAPE EQUAL TO A MINIMUM OF 43 MIL THICK, U.O.N. C. MATERIALS, U.O.N.: 54 MIL AND HEAVIER STUDS 50 KSI MIN. 33, AND 43 MIL STUDS 33 KSI MIN. RUNNERS AND ACCESSORIES 33 KSI MIN. D. PROVIDE MANUFACTURERS STANDARD STEEL RUNNERS, BRIDGING, BLOCKING, BRACING, CLIPS, REINFORCEMENTS, ETC. - TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT - AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE FRAMING SYSTEM CAPABLE OF ACCOMMODATING THE LOADS PRESENTED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. ALL FIELD INSTALLED ITEMS SHALL BE PRESENT ON INSTALLATION DRAWINGS. E. ALL PARTS AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE FORMED FROM STEEL HAVING A G-60 GALVANIZED COATING MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM A525 /ASTM A653. F. FRAME BOTH SIDES OF EXPANSION JOINTS, ALLOWING FOR ADEQUATE MOVEMENT AS REQUIRED. G. FIELD SPLICES IN MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED IN SHOP AND/OR INSTALLATION DRAWINGS AND APPROVED BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. H. U.O.N., ANCHORAGE OF LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING SHALL BE BY THE SPECIALITY ENGINEER. ALL ANCHORAGES TO BUILDING STRUCTURE SHALL BE ENGINEERED PARTS/ASSEMBLIES, OR ENGINEERED PRODUCTS FOR USE WITH LIGHT GAUGE METAL (OR READILY ADAPTABLE TO LIGHT GAUGE METAL). ENGINEER OF RECORD SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE ALL ANCHORAGES. INSTALLATION DRAWINGS SHALL INDICATE ALL ANCHORAGES REQUIRED. I. DEFLECTION LIMITS, U.O.N. IN SPECIFICATIONS OR PLANS: U360, U.O.N. U480, BRICK AND MASONRY VENEER .11 LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING "SYSTEMS", INCLUDING TRUSS SYSTEMS SHALL INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY PARTS AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED TO FORM A COMPLETE "SYSTEM," INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO BRIDGING, BRACING, CLIPS, SHEAR BLOCKING, WEB STIFFENERS, AND HARDWARE - TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS REQUIREMENT WILL RESULT IN REJECTION OF SUBMITTALS WITHOUT FURTHER REVIEW. K. REFERENCE SUBMITTAL SECTION THIS SHEET. STRUCTURAL INSPECTION A. THE CONTRACTOR OR OWNER SHALL EMPLOY A QUALIFIED INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCY. THIS AGENCY (REFERRED TO AS INSPECTOR HEREIN) SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING THAT PROJECT STRUCTURAL WORK IS ACCOMPLISHED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. B. DURATION AND FREQUENCY OF JOB VISITS SHALL BE SUFFICIENT FOR THE INSPECTOR TO STATE AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT THAT THE STRUCTURAL WORK IS ACCOMPLISHED, AND ITS RELATED ELEMENTS HAVE BEEN ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. SPECIFIC SYSTEMS TO BE INSPECTED INCLUDE: FOUNDATION CONCRETE (COLUMNS /BEAMS) CONCRETE (GENERAL, SLAB ON GRADE) MASONRY STRUCTURAL STEEL (INCLUDING BAR JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS) METAL DECK (FLOOR AND ROOF) LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING (INCLUDING TRUSSES AND TRUSS SYSTEMS) C. THE FOREGOING LIST IS NOT INTENDED TO BE ALL INCLUSIVE. THE INSPECTOR SHALL USE HIS PROFESSIONAL JUDGMENT AND HIS KNOWLEDGE OF THE JOB SITE CONDITIONS AND THE CONTRACTORS' PERFORMANCE TO DECIDE WHICH ADDITIONAL STRUCTURAL SYSTEM OR ITEMS MAY REQUIRE ATTENTION. D. THE INSPECTOR DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACTUAL OR STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR HAS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE OFFICIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE INSPECTOR WILL NOT REPLACE THE QUALITY CONTROL PERSONNEL OF THE CONTRACTOR. E. ALL INSPECTION REPORTS SHALL BE FORWARD BY THE INSPECTOR TO THE ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT OF RECORD. STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD / CDX. 5/8" MIN. THICKNESS -ZONES 1, 2, AND 4 (REF. S001) #10 BUGLEHEAD SCREWS @ 4" O.C. EDGES AND 6" FIELD -ZONES 3, AND 5 (REF. S001) #10 BUGLEHEAD SCREWS @ 4" O.C. EDGES AND 4" FIELD DENSGLASS -ZONE 4 (REF. S001) #10 MIN. WAFERHEAD SCREWS @ 4" O.C. EDGES AND 6" FIELD -ZONE 5 (REF. S001) #10 MIN. WAFERHEAD SCREWS @ 4" O.C, EDGES AND 4" FIELD LIST OF STRUCTURAL ABBREVIATIONS AB ANCHOR BOLTS T & B TOP AND BOTTOM ADDL ADDITIONAL T & G TONGUE AND ALT ALTERNATE GROOVE ANCH ANCHOR THK THICK APPROX APPROXIMATE THIRD THREAD/THREADED ARCH ARCHITECTURE/ARCHITECTURAL TB TIE BEAM BB BOND BEAM TOC TOP OF CONCRETE BLDG BUILDING TOM TOP OF MASONRY BM BEAM TOS TOP OF STEEL BO BOTTOM OF (SEE TO) TYP TYPICAL BOT / BTM BOTTOM TS TUBE STEEL BP BASE PLATE/BEARING PLATE LINO UNLESS NOTED BRG BEARING OTHERWISE BTW BETWEEN LON UNLESS OTHERWISE CANT CANTILEVER NOTED CB CONCRETE BEAM VERT VERTICAL CC CONCRETE COLUMN VIF VERIFY IN FIELD CIP CAST IN PLACE W WIDE FLANGE CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT WB WALL BEAM (TILT) CL CENTERLINE WC WALL COLUMN (TILT) CLR CLEAR/CLEARANCE W/ WITH COL COLUMN W/o WITHOUT CONC CONCRETE WD WOOD CONNX CONNECTION WGT WEIGHT CONST CONSTRUCTION WH WEEP HOLE CONT CONTINUOUS WP WORKING POINT CORR CORRUGATED WT STEEL TEE SECTION CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT WWF WELDED WIRE DIET DETAIL FABRIC DIA/DIAM DIAMETER @ AT DIM DIMENSION & AND DIST DISTANCE DIN DOWN DR DRAIN DWG DRAWING DWL DOWEL EA EACH EE EACH END EF EACH FACE EJ EXPANSION JOINT EL, ELEV ELEVATION ELECT ELECTRICAL EMB EMBEDMENT ENGR ENGINEER EQ EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT EQUIV EQUIVALENT ES EACH SIDE EXIST EXISTING EXP EXPANSION EXT EXTERIOR EW EACH WAY FAB FABRICATE FD FLOOR DRAIN FDN FOUNDATION FF FINISHED FLOOR FIN FINISH(ED) FLOOR. FTG FOOTING GA GAGE/GAUGE GALV, GV GALVANIZED GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR HAS HEADED ANCHOR STUD HB HIGH BEAM (MASONRY) HORIZ HORIZONTAL HSB HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS HSS HOLLOW STEEL SECTION HT HEIGHT INT INTERIOR JST JOIST JT JOINT K KIPS KO KNOCK OUT KSF KIPS PER SQUARE FOOT KSI KIPS PER SQUARE INCH L ANGLE LB LOW BEAM (MASONRY) LBS POUNDS LID DEVELOPMENT LENGTH LDH LONG DIMENSION HORIZONTAL LDV LONG DIMENSION VERTICAL LGTH LENGTH LLBB LONG LEG BACK TO BACK LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL MAIL MATERIAL MAX MAXIMUM MB MASONRY BEAM MC MOMENTCONNECTION MC MASONRY COLUMN MCJ MASONRY CONTROL JOINT MECH MECHANICAL MEZZ MEZZANINE MFR MANUFACTURE/MANUFACTURERS MIN MINIMUM MISC MISCELLANEOUS MTL METAL NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NOM NOMINAL NTS NOT TO SCALE oC ON CENTER OPNG OPENING OPP OPPOSITE PB PARAPET BEAM (MASONRY) PCC PRECAST CONCRETE PL PLATE PLF POUNDS PER LINEAR Fool PLY PLYWOOD PREENG PRE-ENGINEERED PREFAB PREFABRICATED PRELIM PRELIMINARY PROJ PROJECTION PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PT PRESSURE TREATED PT POST TENSIONING) (ED) PW PANEL WIDTH RAD RADIUS RB ROOF BEAM (MASONRY) RCP REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE RD ROOF DRAIN REF REFERENCE REINF REINFORCING REQ'D REQUIRED REV REVISION RTU ROOF TOP UNIT RW RETAINING WALL SECT SECTION SCHED,SCH SCHEDULE SIM SIMILAR SP,SPC SPACE/SPACES SPECS SPECIFICATIONS SQ SQUARE SS STAINLESS STEEL STD STANDARD STL,ST STEEL STRUCT STRUCTURAL SYM SYMMETRICAL 00 N _ Mo a w rn -d G O� �w a , ¢o0 o� I �n vo 3 O1 a 3 cn 0 0 co CIO LL c) C) Lu z od!EU `> 5,o ' CD CL U) w 0 Y cu N IZ ry m CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. ALL MASONRY WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ACI SPECS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES (ACI 530.1-02). B. CONCRETE BLOCK SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C90, TYPE II, WITH A MIN. NET COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT 28-DAYS OF 1900 PSI (F'M =1500 PSI). NORMAL WEIGHT UNITS U.O.N. C. BELOW GRADE, MORTAR SHALL BE TYPE M. ABOVE GRADE, M OR S. GROUT TO CONFORM TO ASTM C270. D. GROUT FOR FILLED CELLS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C476, AND SHALL HAVE A SLUMP OF BETWEEN 8" AND 10". GROUT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH SHALL BE 3000 PSI AT 28 DAYS. 4"l MINIMUM CLEANOUTS REQUIRED FOR GROUT POURS EXCEEDING 4'. E. PLACE ALL MASONRY IN RUNNING BOND WITH 3/8" MORTAR JOINTS. PROVIDE COMPLETE COVERAGE FACE SHELL MORTAR BEDDING, HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL. PROVIDE FULL MORTAR WEBS IN ALL COURSE OF GROUTED CELLS AND CELLS ADJACENT TO GROUTED CELLS. F. MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS SHALL BE LOCATED AT 26-0" O.C. FOR EXTERIOR WALLS AND 32'-0" O.C. FOR INTERIOR WALLS, U.O.N., TIE BEAM I BOND BEAM REINF. SHALL BE CONT. G. PROVIDE 8" DEEP PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE LINTELS OVERALL MASONRY OPENINGS NOT SHOWN TO HAVE A STRUCTURAL BEAM. MINIMUM END BEARING SHALL BE 811. LINTEL WIDTH TO MATCH MASONRY WIDTH. H. ALL EPDXY ANCHORS USED IN MASONRY SHALL OCCUR AT GROUTED, REINFORCED CELLS AND BE HILTI HIT-HY150, I. ALL EMBED PLATES SHALL OCCUR AT GROUTED, REINFORCED CELLS WITH FACE SHELLS REMOVED. J. WHEREVER LARGER WIDTH CMU BASE COURSES BECOME SMALL WIDTH CMU ABOVE, A SINGLE COURSE BOND BEAM MUST BE PROVIDED. THIS BOND BEAM SHALL BE K.O. / LINTEL BLOCK WITH (2) #5 CONT., UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN PLANS. K. REINFORCING, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED (U.O.N.) IN PLANS: 1. REINFORCING BARS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60. 2. ALL OPENINGS IN CMU SHALL BE REINFORCED WITH AT LEAST (1) #5 BAR AT THE TOP, BOTTOM AND BOTH SIDES OF THE OPENING 3. BOND BEAM AT ROOF LEVEL SHALL BE DOUBLE COURSE K.O. / LINTEL BLOCK WITH (2) #5 CONT. BARS EACH COURSE, AND BOND BEAM AT PARAPET LEVEL SHALL BE SINGLE COURSE K.O. / LINTEL BLOCK WITH (2) #5 CONT. BARS. 4. LAP SPLICES SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: LENGTHS BAR SPLICE NOTE: SIZE LENGTHS MECHANICAL SPLICES OF #5 45" ACI TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2 MAY #6 54" BE USED IN LEIU OF LAP SPLICES #7 63" 5. HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING SHALL BE 9 GA. GALVANIZED LADDER TYPE @ 16" O.C. VERT, ,6. , All REINFORCING HOOKS AND BENDS SHALL BE STANDARD ACI TYPE. 7. ALL WALL DOWELS SHALL MATCH REINFORCING SIZE AND QTY. L. PAFS NOT [PERMITTED AT MASONRY M. ALL MASONRY LOCATED BELOW GRADE SHALL BE GROUTED SOLID. ;-i_ - - LOCATE STEP AS REQ'D TO MAINTAIN PROPER BEARING ELEVATIONS PER PLANS •, • ............. ........................... ... 6" MIN SPLICE USE PRE -FABRICATED CORNER OR OVERLAP AND TIE JOINT REINFORCEMENT @ ALL CORNERS 8" CMU SHOWN, REF: PLANS FOR ACTUAL CMU SIZE AND REINFORCING #9 MIN. WIRE LADDER STYLE HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT 4" X4" MIN. CLEAN OUT REQUIRED @ ALL FILLED CELLS FOR HIGH -LIFT GROUTING REF: PLANS FOR FOUNDATION INFORMATION MASONRY WALL DETAIL SCALE:314"=1'-0" REF: R q STEP 2-0" STEPPED BOND BM. 8 STEPPED BOND BEAM A (, -0 R MU SHOWN, REF: PLANS FOR 'UAL CMU SIZE AND vFORCING • BB1 B UnrALA .O.N. MC-1A MC-3A 8"X8" MASONRY 8"X24" MASONRY PILASTER COL. PILASTER COL. GENERAL NOTES THIS SHEET LAP SPLICE LENGTH IUIREMENTS, TYR ALL VERT. HORIZ. REINFORCING, U.O.N. ` ; MC-2A 8"X16" MASONRY ® MC-4A WX32" MASONRY PILASTER COL. PILASTER COL. : PLANS FOR FOUNDATION )RMATION ` 3" MIN CLR 7 TYP. MAS. WALL PRO[_�LE U.O.N SCALE:3/4"=1'-0' REF: El . Eli MAS. COL 1X 8" SCALE:314'=1'-0' REF: CONTINUOUS HORIZ. JOINT INFORCEMENT @ E.J. LOCATIONS IERE OCCURS, REF: PLANS, HERWISE PROVIDE PRE -FABRICATED OR CORNER OR OVERLAP AND TIE NT REINFORCING 8" CMU SHOWN, REF: PLANS FOR ACTUAL CMU SIZE AND REINFORCING #9 MIN. WIRE LADDER STYLE HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT 4" X 4" MIN. CLEAN OUT REQUIRED @ ALL FILLED CELLS FOR HIGH -LIFT GROUTING REF: PLANS FOR FOUNDATION INFORMATION 2 MASONRY WALL DETAIL SCALE:3/4'=1'-0" REF: CONCRETE RAKE BEAM, WIDTH TO MATCH CMU BELOW _VERT. REINF. SPACING REF: PLANS 9 ICE BEAMS SCALE:3/4"=1'-0' REF:s6 • MC-113 8"XS" MASONRY ®° MC-313 8724" MASONRY PILASTER COL. PILASTER COL. •`°a• • s° ® ®, MC-213 8"X16" MASONRY • ® PILASTER COL. MC-46 8"X32" MASONRY PILASTER COL. MAS. COL 2X 811 SCALE:3/4"=1'-0' 3 REF: MIN. SPLICE LENGTH AT CORNERS / INTERSECTIONS ONLY, REF: GENERAL NOTES THIS SHEET FOR LAP SPLICE LENGTH REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL OTHER 48 X BARD, REINFORCING, U.O.N. TYPICAL A CORNERS TYPICAL @ INTERSECTIONS 3 CONTINUITY CORNER, TYR SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" REF: "nNutuusxmum. 5 MASONRY WALL COLUMN SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" REF: PLAN El J U CV EQ. EQ. DOUBLE BAR EDGE SPACING PLAN ®` w EQ. EQ. SINGLE BAR CENTER SPACING 0 VERTICAL BAR PLACEMENT SCALE:314'=1'-0' REF: ~; MC-1A 12'l MASONRY a; „-�' MC-3A 12"X24" ' PILASTER COL. MASONRY PILASTER COL. a. MC-2A-2A 12"X16" MASONRY a ;. �.'.: t. d. MC-4A 12"X24" MASONRY I-E PILASTER COL. PILASTER COL. MAS, 1X 12" 4 SCALE:3/4'44 REF: :LS TO MATCH VERT. REINF. SIZE )TY U.O.N. IN PLANS ITED VERTICAL CELLS W/ VERT. "ORCING (MASONRY COLUMN), REF: 5 'IN FIRST 6" OF VERT. REINF. J CLR 4 MASONRY CONTROL JOINT SCALE:314"=1'-0" REF: IETNLgI_",If-3mTl ul 6 CONCRETE WALL COLUMN SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" REF: "erNL _5~aimio�m MC-113 12"X8" MASONRY ® MC-313 12"X24" PILASTER COL. MASONRY E�. PILASTER COL. a• a� p° MC-213 12"X16" MASONRY MC46 12"X32" MASONRY n. PILASTER COL. PILASTER COL.. e° MAS. COL 2X 121" 5 SCALE:3/4'=1'-0' REFS"a 8" CMU. FILLED CELL, TYP CONT, PVC CONTROL JNT, INSERT, W/ CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT, BOTH SIDES NOTES: PROVIDE DUMMY JOINT @ BOND BEAMS IN LINE W/ M.C.J. SHOWN DO NOT CUT REINFORCING @ BOND BEAM DISCONTINUOUS HORIZ. JOINT REINFORCEMENT @ M.C.J. LOCATIONS TO MATCH VERT, REINF. SIZE 'U.O.N. IN PLANS BLOCK ON SIDE EVERY OTHER FOR POUR TO "KEY' INTO TYP' I., REF: PLANS :IRST 6" OF VERT. REINF. LR J � C � <o N ® O O cd W � Y U w U cn 0 (u=D�. U) c =) co w Q. co .' Lu a' O O ca '€ ZEYN� a' M p sgo Ot �w ¢'p o 0 U � a oZ I � U "n a> 3 a 3 h t, ( ME L12 0 LL uj uj ((` 0 w U) w w m c. maco w`j_ � m z 0 ia ccf)Lu z o m > co z uj ®_ 0- ml O� Il CV h O O CV w C'7 u7 u") CI Q w c1 O Co O �I O w O N O N O N ZI CiY O V---�i, M CIDN �f7 3 N w p ? m all 0 CAGD (,DA\/ITV I nAnc CnD .Q" DDGrACT \All 0" DCrCCc nooD I I_I IAITDI c SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT LENG�TYPE \ gRU6 8RF6-0B 8RF10-OB 8RF14-OB ! BRF18-OB 8RF22-OB 8RF26-OB 8RF30-OB 8RF6-1B 8RF10-lB 8RF14-lB i 8RF18-lB 8RF22-lB 8RF26-lB 8RF30-lB 4'-4" (52") PRECAST 1635 1749 3355 3280 j 4349 5421 6493 7567 1891 3699 5206 6639 8060 9479 10893 4'-6" (54") PRECAST 1494 1 1596 3063 1_ 2992 3968 4946 1 5924 6904 1756 3699 5206 6639 8060 9479 10893 5-8" (68") PRECAST 5'-10" (70") PRECAST - 6-8" (80") PRECAST T-6" (90") PRECAST 866 - 810 797 669 920 1770 1716 2277 2839 3402 3966 1167 859 1113 901 1 2481 11653 2342 - 1825 _ 4567 1600 4242 - 3120 6389 2124 6639 5048 8060 _ 2649 8060 --- 7747 7917 3174 7402 ---- 9448 9311 3700 8706 7360 901 755 _1825 1490 ----- 3120 2459 5048 3776 7915 5743 9479 7239 10893 5623 755 1490 2459 3776 5743 8998 10893 9'4" (116") PRECAST 411 466 999 15 2253 3129 4091 3146 526 999 1568 2253 3129 4150 5891 fi I a ; _ I NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.C. MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING AFF GRAVITY LC ADS FOR 8" PRECAST & PRFSTRFSSFD U-LINTFI .1; 4~p-4~m SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT TYPE 8F8-OB 8F12-0B 8F16-0B BF20-OB 8F24-0B 8F28-0B 8F32-0B LENGT 8U8 8F8-1B 8F12-113 8F16-1B 8F20-1B 8F24113 8F28-113 8F32-16 3069 4605 6113 7547 8974 10394 11809 2'-10" (34") PRECAST 2231 3069 4605 6113 7547 8974 10394 11809 3069 3719 5163 6607 8054 9502 1 10951 T-6" (42") PRECAST 2231 3069 4605 6113 7547 8974 1 10394 11809 2561 2751 1 3820 4890 5961 1 7034 8107 44" (48") PRECAST 1966 2693 �_ 4605 6113 7547 8974 1 10394 11809 4'-6" (54") PRECAST 1599 1969 2189 2110 2931 4375�__ 6113 3753 7547 4576 I 54000 8672 ; 10294 6224 11809 _ 1438 1999 2560 _ 3123 3686 4249 5' 4" 64" PRECAST ( ) 1217 -1349- 1663 3090 5365 r 7547 7342 8733 10127 1105 1173 1631 2090 2549 3009 3470 5'-10" (70") PRECAST 1062 1 _ 1451 2622 1 4360 80 7168 6036 _ 7181 8328 „ 1238- 217 437 3031 3707 4383 5061 6 -6' PRECAST (78) 908 1238 2177 3480 5381 8360 10394 8825 1729 - 2632 1011 2205 2698 3191T 3685 T-6" (90") PRECAST 743 - 1011 1729 2661 3898 5681 8467 j 6472 9'-4" (112") PRECAST 554 699 1160-1625 2564 3486 -- 2818 3302 752 1245 1843 2564 1 3486 4705 6390 535 s90 1247 2093 2777 2163 2536 10' 6" (126") PRECAST 475 -- - 643 1052 T ._� 1533 1 2093 2781 36_43_ 4754 582 945 ~ 1366 1 1846 2423 -- 3127 4006 11'4' (136") PRECAST 362 - --`- 582 945 1366 1846 2423 3127 4006 _ -- - - -- - - _ - 540 873 \ 1254 1684 2193 2805 3552 12e-01e (144") PRECAST 337 540 873 1254 1684 - 2193 2805 3552 4_71 ;__755 1075 1 1428j1838 2316 2883 13' 4" (160") PRECAST 296 471 T_ 755 1075 ^ 1428 1002 1326 1838 1697 2316 2883 I 2127 2630 _ 424 706 14' 0" (168) PRECAST 279 442 706 _ -__F__ 1002 1326 --_ \----- 1697 2127 2630 NR NR NR NR 14' 8" (176 _- - ----- -- - -- -- -- - N.R. _ -;- - 7 PRESTRESSED -_ 58 3 1370 19 2 2245 2517 2712 --- NR NR NR NR NR NR NR � 15'-4" (184") N.R. --- � �- -T ---- _ _ ---- PRESTRESSED 412 710 1250 1733 2058 2320 2513 NR NR NR NR NR NR NR N.R. - - -- - - - rt --- ------------ - - - - 7411 (208") _...._._ PRESTRESSED _� 300 548 950 1326 1609 1849 2047 19'-4" (232") N.R. NR NR NR NR NR NR NR 1 PRESTRESSED 235 420 750 ! 1037 1282 T 1716_ NR NR NR NR NR _ _ NR NR 21' 4" (2 N.R. _ j PRESTRESSED 180 340 � - � 598 845 t 1114 1359 1468 22'-0" (264") NR NR NR NR N.R. -- -- -\-- ; - --� 165 315 NR NR NR PRESTRESSED 550 784 1047 1285 1399 NR NR 1 NR NR NR NR 24L11" �R°' � - -NR - N R -1 129 - 250 `- 450 654 884 ! 1092 1222 - PJ3E TSTS RESEED NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.C. MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING cACC r-PAUTV I nAnc CY'9D IT' DDCrACT 11_I IKITCI c SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT LENGTFI-- TYPE 12U8 I 12F8-2B 12F12-2B 12F16-2B 12F20-2B 1 12F2.4-28 12F28-2B ' 12F32-2B 3'-6" (42") PRECAST 3428 5000 I 5838 7619 9352 11060 12755 14438 -4'-0" -(48") -PRECAST 2923 4232 5838 7619 9352 11060 12755 14438 4' 6'° (54") PRECAST 2396 3464 5304 7619 9352 ! 11060 12755 14438 5'-10" (70") PRECAST 1612 2320 3218 5234 1 8487 11060 12755 1 14438 6'-6" " 78 ( ) PRECAST 1383 1986 2679 4196 6421 10032 12755 14438 -- 1 I - I T-----I�- T-6" (90") PRECAST 1138 1628 2131 3218 1 4676 6756 9763 13528 3083 4167 5593 7552 9'4" (112") PRECAST 795 1216 1535 2230 10'-6" (126") PRECAST 614 I 1043 12.95 1853 2516 3323 4334 5632 ll'-4'° 136" PRECAST 518 945 1162 1649 2216 1 2893 1 3719 4746 12'-0" (144") PRECAST 456 878 1073 1513 I 2020 2617 3333 4206 13e41 (160") PRECAST 359 _ 767 926 1294 1709 2188 2743 3409 14'-0" (168") PRECAST 321 720 865 1204 1584 2017 2451 3106 e n n 17-4 208 PRECAST N.R. 451 II 631 881 1141 1428 1750 2102 ---- ---- ---- - L_------------_--- - �----... L.__..---.--- ------ 194(232e) PRECAST N.R. 343 477 700 925 1152 1380 1609 _ __ -_-- _------._,-__-__ -___ __.__._- ...... NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.C. MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING tZACC 1 ATCDAI I OAnc CnD Q" DDCrACTW/0" Dcrccc nnOD 11_I IKITCI c cw;a'i®m SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT TYPE LENGT \ 8RU6 8RF6 REINF. CMU* 4'4" (52") PRECAST 758 757 1365 4'-6" (54") PRECAST 694 693 1249 T-8" (68") PRECAST 408 407 734 5'-10" (70") PRECAST 6'-8" (80") PRECAST 382 595 j 381 788 687 510 T-6" 90" PRECAST 509 674 393 9'-8" (116") PRECAST 370 490 227 I j I I i 1 _ NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.C. MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING CAGD I ATGDAI I nAnC GnD R" DDDrACT £ DDFCTDGCCGn 1 1_I IAITDI C 4~1194~111141111 SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT LENGT TYPE 8U8 SF8 REINF. CMU* 2'-10' (34') PRECAST 1293 1642 2135 T-6" (42") PRECAST 1025 1024 1830 4'4' (48") PRECAST 765 763 1365 4'-6" (54") PRECAST 592 5911 1057 64" (64") PRECAST 411 411 1, 734 5'-10" (70") PRECAST 340 339 607 j 6-6" (78") PRECAST 507 721 483 r T-6" (90") PRECAST 424 534 357 j 9'4" (112") PRECAST 326 I 512. 227�� I — 10'-6" (126") PRECAST � 284 401 178 I e 11-4" 136" PRECAST 260 ! li 452 152 12'-0" (144") PRECAST 244 402 135 I 13'-4" (160") PRECAST 217 324 109 14'-0" (168") PRECAST 205 293 98 14'-8" 176" N.R. 284 89 RESTRESSED PRE") __- 164" 184' ( N.R. 259 82 -' - PRESTRESSED -- ---- --- -' -- -'' - 17'4" (208") N.R. 194 63 PRESTRESSED 19'4" (232") N.R. N.R. 148 51 PRESTRESSED ------- - - - - -- ---�- -- 21'-4" (256") N.R. 125 42 PRESTRESSED 22 0 (264 N.R. 116 I 39 PRESTRESSED --- -- - - -- -- 24 -0 (288) N.R. 1 91 33 PRESTRESSED 1 II i .71 - I ' NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.C. MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING CAGG I IDI IGT I nAncz FnD R" DDC(`ACT tied 9" DDrFCC nnnD 1 1-1 IAITDI C ICMM4Ism SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT LENGT TYPE 8RF6-IT 8RF10-lT 8RF14-lT 8RF18-lT 8RF22-lT 8RF26-lT! 8RF30-IT 8RF6-2T 8RF10-2T 8RF14-2T 8RF18-2T j 8RF22-2T 8RF26-2T j 8RF30-2T 4'-4" (52") PRECAST 905 1748 2635 3522 4409 5296 6183 905 1748 2635 3522 4409 5296 6183 4' 6" (54") PRECAST 867 1675 2525 3374 4224 5074 5924 867 1675 2525 1 3374 4224 5074 5924 5'-8" (68") PRECAST 675 1301 1960 2618 3277 3935 4594 675 - 1301 1960 2618 3277 3935 4594 5'-10" (70") PRECAST 655 1262 1900 2538 3176 3815 4453 _ 655 1262 1900 2538 3176 3815 4453 64" (80") PRECAST 570 ! 1012 1651 2204 2758 3312 3865 --- 570 1097 1651 2204 2758 3312 3865 T-6" (90") PRECAST _ 9' 8" (116") PRECAST 506 797 1462 1952 2442 ! 2931 3257 506 395 96_7_ 491 1462 931 1952 1301 2442 1640 2931 1980 3421 2322 395 L 589 1135 1514 1893 2272 2652 I j I I 1 NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.C. MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING " PRECAST & PRESTRESSED U-11NIFIS wm SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT TYPE 8F8-1T SF12-1T 8F16-1T 8F20-1T 8F24-1T 8F28-1T 8F32-1T LENGT SF8-2T 8F12-2T 81=16-2T 8F20-2T BF24-2T 8F28-2T 8F32-2T 1972 3173 4460 5747 7034 8321 9608 2'-10' (34") PRECAST 1972 3173 4460 5747 7034 8321 9608 1569 1 2524 3547 4569 5591 6613 7636 3' 6" (42") PRECAST 1569 ; 2524 3547 4569 5591 6613 7636 1363 1 2192 3079 3966 4853 1 5740 6627 4'-0" (48") PRECAST 1363 2192 3079 3966 4853 5740 6627 4'-6" (54") PRECAST 1207 1940 2724 3508 4292 ! 5077 i 5861 T 1207 _ 1940 2724 3508 4292 5077 5861 1016 _1632 2290 2949 3607 4265 4924 5'-4" (64") PRECAST 1016 1632 2290 2949 3607 j 4265 4924 _ 909 1492 2093 2694 3295 3897 4498 _ 5'-10" (70") PRECAST 929 1492 2093 2694 3295 I 3897 4498 _ 835 1340 1880 2419 2959 1 3498 4038 6'-6" (78") PRECAST 835 1340 1880 � 1634 2419 2102 - 2959 -2571 -- 3498 4038 ----- _ 1-3039 3508 --------- --- e ee ee) 727 1021 7 -6 90 PRECAST ( 727 1166 1634 2102 2571 3039 3508 591 680 1133 1471 1811 k 2152 2494 9-4- (112") PRECAST 591 851 1 1326 1705 2084 2463 10'-6" 530 -� 552 -i 914 - 1185 1458 _2842 1732 2007 (126") PRECAST� 530 L_ 686 1183 1526 1 1865 2204 2544 -- - 474 485 -_798� 1034 1272 1, 1510 1749 -4 11'" 136" PRECAST ( ) - -'' - - - 494 470 599 441 1028 723 1422 1738 936 1151 2053 2369 1366 1582 12'-0" (144") PRECAST 470 543 928 r 1349 1649' 1948 2247 418\ 60�6 1 783 962 141 3 --- 13'4" (160")PRECAST 428 455 770 1145 1444 1718 192931 11 Y 384 346 559 723 887 1052 1218 - 14'4- (168") PRECAST - - 410 420 709 1050 1434 -- 1694 1954 14'-8" (176' 239 323 519 1 671 23 ' -- --- -__ - --- 976 1129 - - 1 - --- - - PRESTRESSED 246 390 655 96.8 1324 ! 1625 1874 _ 224 302 485 626 767 909 1052 15'4" (1841 PRESTRESSED 230 364 609 897 1224 1562 1801 _ 187 255 404 5 0 637 872 17'-4 (208) - - 192 303 500 -- 162 222 347 732 �754 993 1268 1470 - - , - - 646 - 546 646 746 , PRESTRESSED 19'-4" (232") - - 1 446 - --- - --r- 166 261 424 616 831 1057 -1225 PRESTRESSED 21' 4" (256") 142 198 306 393 480 567-- 654- PRESTRESSED 142 230 i 369 531 713 903 1046 137 192 295 378 461 545 629 \- - 22'-0" (264") PRESTRESSED 137 221 354 508 681- -' 861 997 - 124 175 267 341 } 416 ' j -- I � 1491 566 24'-0" (288") - - - -- - 124 200 316 450 600 756 875 -PRESTRESSED - - -' -- - - - -------------- NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.0 MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING SAFE LOAD - POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT LENGTH TYPE 12F8 2T 12F12-2T 12F16-2T 12F20-2T 12F24-IT 12F28-2T ! 12F32-2T ll 3'-6" (42") PRECAST 2752 3849 ! 5408 6967 8526 1 10084 11643 Imo- _ - y- - - ------ - - - - +- --- --- -- --- 2389 3343 ;- 1 4696 6048 7401 8753 10106 4'-0' (48" PRECAST - -- - 4-6 (54) PRECAST 2113 2959 4154 5350 6546 1 7741 8937 5'-10" (70") PRECAST 1623 1 2275 3192 4109 5026 5943 1 6860 6-6" (78") PRECAST 1444 2044 2867 3689 1 4512 5335 I 6158 I T-6" (90") PRECAST 1267 1743 2492 3207 3921 � 4636 � 5350 �I 11 9'-4" (112") PRECAST 1028 1 1156 -- - 1980 2600 3179 -�---- 3757 4335 - -- ----- 10'-6" (126") PRECAST 920 935 1591 Iit 2276 2804 3335 3867 1 V-4" (136") PRECAST 858 819 1386 1978 2436 2896 3357 12'-0" (144") PRECAST 814 744 1253 1784 2196 2610 3025 13'-4" (160") PRECAST 678 626 1045 1482 1822 2165 2508 14'-0" (168") PRECAST 622 579 963 1362 1675 I 1989 2304 17'-4" (208") PRECAST 434 423 687-- 962 1180 1400 1619 - ------ -- - .- r ;- ------ 19'4' (232") PRECAST 366 366 1 587 816 1000 1185 1370 NOTE: ALTERNATIVE LINTELS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS PRESENTED HEREIN. G.C. MUST SUBMIT MANUFACTURER DATA SUPPORTING SAFE LOADING REBAR AT TOP C.M.U., K.O.OR LINTEL BLOCK GROUT REBAR AT BOTTOM OF LINTEL CAVITY BOTTOM REINFORCING PROVIDED IN LINTEL (VARIES) 7-518"ACTUAL 8" NOMINAL WIDTH 8Fl 6-1 B/1 T QUANTITY OF REBAR AT TOP QUANTITY OF REBAR AT BOTTOM OF LINTEL CAVITY NOMINAL HEIGHT F = FILLED WITH GROUT / U = UNFILLED NOMINAL WIDTH CASTCRETE TYPE DESIGNATION ISCALE:3/4"=1'-0' REF: oera L1A L16 L3B "• 8"X8" LINTEL W/ ' ' : 8"X8" LINTEL W/ • l 8"X24" LINTEL W/ PRECAST BASE & PRECAST BASE & PRECAST BASE & (1) #5 BTM. U.O.N. IN (2) #5 BTM. U.O.N. IN (2) #5 BTM., (2) #5 PLANS PLANS TOP U.O,N. IN PLANS i L2A 2 8" LINTELS SCALE.3/4 -1-0 REF: 4 LIIV I tL KtlNrUKLo_IIVU REF: oe ae: PRECAST LINTELS A. PROVIDE FULL MORTAR BEAD AND HEAD JOINTS AT ALL LINTEL SECTIONS. B. SHORE FILLED LINTELS AS REQUIRED, C. U-LINTELS TO BE SUPPLIED WITH NOTCHES AT THE ENDS FOR VERTICAL CELL REINFORCING AND GROUTING. D. U.O.N., PROVIDE MINIMUM OF 8" END BEARING (NOMINAL) AT EACH END OF LINTELS. E. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MAY BE USED IN LOU OF CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS FOR COMPOSITE LINTEL CONSTRUCTION. F. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL LINTEL REINFORCING SHALL BE #5 REBAR. G. REF. GENERAL NOTES FOR MASONRY AND CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. B. SAFE LOADS ARE SUPERIMPOSED ALLOWABLE LOADS. C. SAFE LOADS ARE BASED ON GRADE 60 FIELD REBAR. D. ALL SAFE LOADS ARE IN POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT. E. ALL SAFE LOADS ARE BASED ON SIMPLY SUPPORTED SPAN. L1A L1B L3B • 12"X8" LINTEL WI PRECAST BASE & ' 12"X8" LINTEL W/ PRECAST BASE & • �:' .° 12"X24" LINTEL WI PRECAST BASE & (1) #5 BTM. U.O.N. IN (2) #5 BTM. U.U.N. (2) #5 BTM., (2) #5 PLANS IN PLANS TOP U.O.N. IN PLANS 4 9.lfl L4B L2A L213 8"X32" LINTEL W/ • 12"X16" LINTEL W/ PRECAST BASE & •` . 12"X16" LINTEL W/ (2) #5 BTM., (2) #5 PRECAST BASE & PRECAST BASE & (1) #5 BTM., (1) #5 (2) #5 BTM., (2) #5 TOP U.O.N. IN • TOP U.O.N. IN •> • TOP U.O.N. IN PLANS PLANS PL ANS 3 12" LINTELS SCALE:3/4'=1'-O' REF: D 5 LINTEL BEARING ON MASONRY • L4B 12"X32" LINTEL W/ PRECAST BASE & (2) #5 BTM., (2) #5 TOP U.O.N. IN PLANS CD O CD co co u- � 0:: cU: w 70 •i 5 0 mYN0- ;> a Z O Z (U) O g U) lr_ LjJ W c Z O a- m O NI O CD O CN W m ui Lo Q I I M I M W c C)a)CDJ wN O O N O N Q � Z 0 to JJ UJ cv CV C) m O Fuj - W /nX .1 NIL LAILI Al)nCLI nni YO Cnr) JOISTS BEARING ON GIRDERS AT COL. SCALE:314"=1'-0" REF; L4X4X3/8X0-6" MIN. BEARING SEAT W/ PL 1/4 STIFFENER AT CENTER, TYP. STL. COL., REF: PLANS DO NOT WELD PL1/2X4X0'-4" 6 JOIST BEARING AT COL. SCALE:314"=l'-0" REF: OEiNLF_�.Wv PROVIDE X-BRACING AT ALL HORIZONTAL BRIDGING INCLUDING UPLIFT BRIDGING AT INTERVALS NOT TO EXCEED 100 FT IN LENGTH TYPICAL X-BRACING SCALE:RTS. REF: oEfNL'II.GTYKLAi�lli b� l TYPICAL X-BRACING SCALE:N.T.S. REF: OEiNL'95,—LY.TitB -M PL 1/2 MIN. CAP AT COLUMN, SIZE AS REQ'D FOR MIN. JST BRG REQUIREMENTS STL. COL., REF: PLANS DO NOT WELD, TYP. PL1/2X4X0'4, TYP, STABILIZER PL. 2 JOISTS BEARING ON STEEL COLUMN SCALE:314'=1'-0" REF: oEraLs_ass�o_" 7 JOIST BEARING ON COL" SCALE:314"=l'-0" REF: "EiNLF_66CI�"pl 2 TYPICAL X-BRACING SCALEA.T.S, REF: oeuL��sxaranm PL 1/2 MIN. CAP AT COLUMN, SIZE AS REQ'D FOR MIN. JST BRG REQUIREMENTS DO NOT WELD PL1/2X4X0'-4" STL. COL., REF: PLANS TYP. U.0.1 j., I YK U.U,N, LACE BY JST. ATIONS ALONG )ETERMINED BY .D BRACE ONLY AFTER FULL DEAD LOAD 3 JOISTS BEARING ON GIRDER APPLIED TO ROOF SYSTEM SCALE:314"=l'-0" REF: oeruts w 5_sv�o_c . , .— V, ,. - �,.r,�E EVERY OTHER JOIST LOCATION U.O.N. IN PLANS, GC TO COORDINATE, L2X2X3/16" U.O.N. IN PLANS, WELD BRACE ONLY AFTER FULL DEAD LOAD APPLIED TO ROOF SYSTEM 4 JOISTS BEARING ON W BEAM SCALE:314"=l'-0" REF: oHlN %-0W3— " 1y" 0 0 (4) 3/4" MIN. A325N BOLTS FOR CONCENTRATED LOADS UP TO K 0 o ERECTION ONLY L2X2X3/16 TO NEAREST JST. PANEL PL3/4 MIN. W/ PL1/2 MIN. SLOTTED POINT, TYP. THROUGH COL., COORDINATE W/ STL. SUPPLIER 8 CONCENTRATED LOADS ON JOISTS SCALE:314"=1'-0" REF: PROVIDE X-BRACING ON BOTH SIDES OF W BEAMS, TYP. ALL HORIZONTAL BRIDGING LINES EXCEPT UPLIFT BRIDGING EITHER DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO W BEAMS OR NEXT BAY FROM W BEAMS AS SHOWN HSS COL., REF: PLANS DO NOT WELD, TYP. STABILIZER PL 3/4X6X0'-6", TYP. 9 GIRDERS BEARING ON COL. SCALE:314"4-0" REF: PROVIDE X-BRACING AT ALL HORIZONTAL BRIDGING INCLUDING UPLIFT BRIDGING AT OUTSIDE (END) W BEAMS WHERE OCCURS TYPICAL X-BRACING SCALE:N.T.S, REF: "EfNL"L.tWA�S91SO4N BTM. CHORD BRACE EA. JOIST LOCATION U.O.N. IN PLANS, GC TO COORDINATE, L2X2X3/16" U.O.N. IN PLANS, WELD BRACE ONLY AFTER FULL DEAD LOAD APPLIED TO ROOF SYSTEM 5 JOIST BEARING ON W BEAM SCALE:3/4"=l'-0' REF; OEiNLE}li9.MY (2) 3/4" MIN. A325N BOLTS FOR ERECTION ONLY PL3/4 MIN. W/ PL1/2 MIN. SLOTTED THROUGH COL., COORDINATE W/ STL. SUPPLIER DO NOT WELD STABILIZER PL3/4X6X0'-6" HSS COL., REF: PLANS GIRDER BEARING ON COL. SCALE: 3/4"=l'-0" 0 REF: "EfNLS_"Illi�p"I"W 41 I I TYPICAL X-BRACING SCALE:N,TS, 4REF: OEWL9L"3Yq)N Y.tl_% STEEL JOISTS AND STEEL GIRDERS "r A. ALL STEEL JOISTS, JOIST GIRDERS AND ASSOCIATED PARTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE STANDARDS OF THE STEEL JOISTINSTITUTE. B. ALL JOISTS AND GIRDERS SHOWN IN THE PLANS ARE MINIMUM SIZES. DEPTH CANNOT BE DECREASED OR INCREASED WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. C. CONTRACTOR TO FOLLOW SJI REQUIREMENTS AS A MINIMUM. D. PROVIDE BRIDGING AND X-BRACING AS PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF SJI. SHOULD PLANS INDICATE BRIDGING AND X-BRACING IN EXCESS OF THAT REQUIRED BY SJI, PLANS WILL GOVERN. E. PROVIDE SEATS, HEADER CHORD EXTENSIONS, OR OTHER ELEMENTS AND FEATURES SHOWN IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND THOSE WHICH ARE REQUIRED FOR PROPER ERECTION AND PERFORMANCE OF STEEL JOISTS. F. STEEL JOISTS, JOIST GIRDERS, BRIDGING AND X-BRACING SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR NET UPLIFT. NET UPLIFT, IF NOT PRESENTED IN PLANS SHALL BE BASED ON THE CLADDING AND COMPONENTS WIND LOADS INDICATED IN THE PLANS PER APPLICABLE ZONE AND TRIB. AREA. LOAD COMBINATIONS SHALL COMFORM TO THE CODES SPECIFIED IN THE PROJECT DOCUMENTS. G. REF. PLANS FOR CONCENTRATED LOADS AND/OR UNUSUAL LOAD PATTERNS. H. AT A MINIMUM, PROVIDE BOTTOM CHORD BRACING EVERY OTHER JOIST AT JOIST -GIRDERS AND SUPPORTING W BEAMS. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL BRACING AS SPECIFIED HEREIN AS TYPICAL AND AS INDICATED IN PLANS. I. MINIMUM WELDS, U.O.N.: 1. BAR JOIST ENDS 3/16" FILLET, 2" LONG, EACH SIDE 2, JOIST GIRDER ENDS 1/4" FILLET, 3" LONG, EACH SIDE J. NOT ALL DETAILS MAY APPLY, REF. PLANS 0 a 0 V 0 € Q V cuco U�co .� co N L_ v co) C 0 U m u- cu E2 cow: Q a (D �S�N E >' w � m — coH (n J U V) c 0 E E 0 cu =Lf-- �0' od :c C.> (� A_ U Lu 0 �. to 0 0 cu mYNCL Elf EL N M p w �S:? 09 �w a , ¢o0 o� I a� U 3 w z Y 0 w V J J �0 LLJ - w m z 0 z cmi3 O m > r ~ uj z W p 3�: m O Imo- NI I —I O O N W m L,o Lo cI Lu 0I 0I J ofN Cl Co N O N d O Z cn O ~ C7 cc N Z 3 N Ll.l O U m q� of Q [L = O- U STEEL DECK A. DECK SHALL CONFORM TO SDI SPECIFICATIONS. B. SPECIFICATION AND FASTENING REQUIREMENTS, REF. PLANS C. WELD METAL SHALL PENETRATE ALL LAYERS OF DECK MATERIAL. END LAPS AND SIDE JOINTS SHALL BE COMPLETELY FUSED TO THE SUPPORTING MEMBERS. USE PROPER SIZE WELDING ELECTRODE AND WELDING MACHINE CURRENT, SO THAT WELDS ARE GOOD PENETRATION AND FREE FROM "BURN -THROUGH". D. METAL DECK SHALL BE ERECTED CONTINUOUS FOR A MINIMUM OF THREE (3) SPANS AND SHALL LAP AT THE CENTERLINE OF SUPPORTS A MINIMUM OF TWO (7) INCHES, PROVIDE A MINIMUM END BEARING OF 2" OVER SUPPORTS. E. PROVIDE SUPPORTS FOR METAL DECK AS REQUIRED WHERE METAL DECK IS CUT OUT. WELD DECK TO SUPPORTS SAME AS EDGE CONDITION. F. DO NOT HANG OR ATTACH DUCTWORK, CONDUIT, PIPING, EQUIPMENT, CEILINGS, ETC. FROM METAL DECKING. G. PROVIDE STL. SHIMS AND EMBEDS AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT DECK ON "TYPICAL" BAY SPACING. PUDDLE WELD, REF: GENERAL NOTES FOR SIZE & QTY PER SHEET JST. OR BM., REF: PLANS �j TEK SCREW SIDE -LAP FASTENERS OR PUDDLE WELDS, REF: GENERAL NOTES FOR TYPE, SIZE & QTY PER SHEET FILLER SHEET WHERE REQUIRED REF: PLANS FOR SPECIFIC DECK INFORMATION DECK DETAIL SCALE:314"=l'-0" REF: lIETNtApU.(�q"i L6X6X1/4X0'-6", TYP. JST. OR BM., REF: PLAN, TYP, L4X4X1/4, TYP. VERT. BRACE BTW. JST. TOP AND BTM. CHORDS TO NEAREST PANEL POINT, TYP. RTU OPENING (<1000 LB) SCALE:314'=l'-0" REF: STL. DECK, REF: GENERAL NOTES 4"X3/8"XCONT. PL. CENTERED ON WALL W/ 112"X6" HEADED ANCHOR STUDS @ 24" O.C. MASONRY CONSTRUCTION ONLY TOP COURSE OF BOND BEAM FORMED AND POURED AS REQ'D TO MATCH SLOPE OF ROOF, 4" MIN., 12" MAX., TYP. WHERE REQUIRED TO MATCH ROOF SLOPE OR ACCOMMODATE BEARING HEIGHT DIFFERENT THAN BLOCK COURSING MAS. / CONC. WALL, REF: PLANS DECK DETAIL (WHERE OCCURS) SCALE: 3/4"=l'-0" REF: CONT, DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF. PLANS ON STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORT <— JOIST/BEAM DIRECTION 3116" CONT. DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, Li REF. PLANS, ATTACH TO CMU BEAM DIRECTION INTO PAGE / USING 3/4"X5"EPDXY BOLTS INTO GROUT FILLED CELLS, , ATTACH TO CONC. USING 3/4"X5" EPDXY 3116" 2-12 BOLTS, REF. PLAN FOR O.C. DIST. J I ® rnwir ro�ry ri r%L ion nnin_i e CLOSURE ANGLE CONNECTIONS SCALE:1"=T-0" 10 REF: TYF RTU [48" MAX. HEIGHT ABV, FRAME] RTU DETAIL SCALE:3/4"=l'-0" REF: NOTE: PRE-ENGINEERED CURB BY RTU SUPPLIER NAILER SUPPLIER W/ CURB, ATTACH TO CURB AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS / SPECS. RAIL, SUPPLIED WITH RTU SECURE CURB TO STEEL FRAME USING #12 TEK SCREWS, 2 @ EA. 1 CORNER & 12" O.C. BTW. STL. DECK, REF: GENERAL NOTES RTU OPENING (<1500 LB) SCALE:314"=l'-0" 5REF: "ETNIAAIgt'�1,9 s L_.__J MICRO -HOLD (8 MIN.) (2 EA. SIDE) MICROMETL, 16 GA. MICRO -HOLD HOLD DOWN. ATTACH TO UNIT RAIL REF: MANUF. FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, REF. S001 FOR DESIGN CRITERIA L6X6X3/8X0'-6", TYP, JST. OR BM., REF: PLAN, TYP, L4X4X1/4, TYP. VERT. BRACE BTW. JST. TOP AND BTM. CHORDS TO NEAREST PANEL POINT, . Y`P,. �n�ir��n ini ie ncnv ni OSURE ci FRAMING DETAIL (WHERE OCCURS) SCALE:314"=l'-0" REF: [EfNL4}91l'P.9 ss�a DECK TYPES 1.5 (B,F,A,VL) T-0" PUDDLE WELD PATTERNS SCALE:1"=T-0" REF: OSURE N, REF. r 36/7 PATTERN 36/5 PATTERN 36/4 PATTERN 3613 PATTERN TYF TYF TYF TYR 3/16" \ OPEN SUPPOR LOADS UP TO 500 L AXIMUM i 4'-0" MAXIMUM TYP, 3116" RTU OPENING (<500 LB) SCALE:314"=l'-0" 3 REF: RTU OPENING (<2000 LB) SCALE:314"=l'-0" 6REF: "EfN1AAlA_WID.pi SHOP CUT VERT. LEG, MIN.1/2" FILLET AT NOTCH JST. OR BM,, REF: PLAN, TYP. L4X4X1/4, TYP. VERT. BRACE BTW. JST. TOP AND BTM. CHORDS TO NEAREST PANEL POINT, TYP. L6X6X3/8X0'-8", TYP. L4X4X1/4 (LLV), TYP. (2) JST. OR BM., REF: PLAN, TYP. L6X4X5/16 (LLV), TYP. (2) VERT. BRACE BTW. JST. TOP AND BTM. CHORDS TO NEAREST PANEL POINT, TYP. VS, SPLICE ONLY )R BEAMS )ECK CLOSURE DECK DETAIL (WHERE OCCURS) SCALE: 314"=l'-0" REF: OEiNL LOCATE SPLICE BTW. ANCHOR BOLT SPACING. 1 1/4" DIA. X 1'-4" A36 STL, ROD STL. ANG. REF: PLANS RER PLANS CLOSURE ANGLE CONTINUITY SCALE:1112"=1'-0" 12REF: E O II cu L cn O". Lu 06 Y Vco CL� I" o m Y N 0- �h o 2: ao:< o:< W ll : tY m z 0 can z O D) m > Lu c ~ w w � cn o z d m O r— O NI o II N W (n m o to O, to O Q I CD I o' I co -� LU o N N o N 'i d Z rn co o 0 CDNLij Z N LLjH o Of 0 m O ft! d Ld S S005 Lf a-lolk m il-gr�lm u L� m 33-6" 3T-W2" 4'-3Y" 642" �, 6'-0" 514" 5,41 L 9141 1264' C-C.1 C-C C-B.8 C-B.7 C-B.6 (C-B.5 C-B.3 6-0" I V. r I V. CL. - 1 -`F D.F.F. '-5' 20'4' 1 WITH REF. ELEVATION BLDG "D" _ J 16 4" ol 38'-6" T-D I 40'-33/a" C-B.2 IA\ WI Q CV UUNJ I KUL; I IUN • • 'loC1 8"X24" CONC. COL. W/ (8) #5 VERT., #3 TIES @ 8" O.C. 1 1/2" MIN. CLR., TYP. CC-1 CONT. TOP OF WALL 0( MARK SIZE DEPTH TOP REINFORCMENT BOTTOM REINFORCMENT F-1 4'-0" SQUARE 12 N/A (6) #5 E.W. F-2 5'-0" SQUARE 12 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. (8) #5 E.W. F-3 6'-0" SQUARE 14 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. (9) #5 E.W. F-4 6-0" SQUARE 14 #5 @ 12" O.C. E.W. #5 @ 12" O.C. E.W. F-5 T-0" SQUARE 16 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. (10) #5 E.W. F-6 8'-0" SQUARE 18 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. (11) #5 E.W. F-7 V-0" SQUARE 18 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. (12) #5 E.W. F2.0 2'-0" CONT 12 N/A (3) #5 CONT F3.0 3'-0" CONT 12 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. (4) #5 CONT. #5 @ 32" O.C. TRANS F5.0 T-0" CONT 14 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. 5 #5 @ 24" O.C. TRANS FSP-1 23'-0" X 20'-4" 20 #7 @ 10" O.C. E.W. #7 @ 10" O.C. E.W. IQTFFI rr)l IIRAIUC MARK DESIGNATION BASE PLATE REINF. NOTES COL "A" HSS4X4X3/16 REF. DETAIL N/A REF. DETAIL S501.13 COL "B" HSS603/8 A N/A COL"C" HSS6X6X318 B N/A ECCENTRIC BASE PLATE COL "D" HSSBX8X318 C N/A COL"E" HSS8XBX3/8 D N/A 1RO4Z9: DI &TDC MARK SIZE MATERIAL THK. ANCHOR BOLTS A 14"X14" A36 STL. 1" (4) 1" THREADED HEADED STUDS [ASTM 1554 GRADE 36] B 14"X14" ECC A36 STL. 1" (4) 1" THREADED HEADED STUDS [ASTM 1554 GRADE 36] C 16"X16" A36 STL. 1" (4) V THREADED HEADED STUDS [AS 1554 GRADE 361 D 011/2' (4 1 1/2" HREADED HEADED STUDS 16"X16" A36 STL. [A GRADE 551 1 Al A ,rnKjrpF-TF P. MAROKIPY rOl I IMN4 MARK DESIGNATION TIES VERT. REINF. NOTES MG16 8X8 N/A (2) #5 EA. CELL REF: S002-13 MC-213 8X16 N/A (2) #5 EA. CELL REF: S002-13 MG3B 8X24 N/A (2) #5 EA. CELL REF: S002-13 MC4B BX32 N/A (2) #5 EA. CELL REF: S002-13 14PArFC MARK DESIGNATION FROM TO NOTES NOT USED -UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, INSTALL12) #5 VERTICAL BAR (EDGE SPACING) IN CONCRETE FILLED CELL [AT3_2"_0_/`C`.l PROVIDE SAME FILLED UELL AT M= JOINTS AN EXPANSION JOINTS, (2) FILLED CELLS AT WALL ENDS, AND (3) FILLED CELLS AT CORNERS. -INTERIOR FOOTINGS HEREIN ARE RELATIVE TO FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION OF 0'-0". THE TOP OF ALL INTERIOR FOOTINGS SHALL BE THUS: Ml -EXTERIOR FOOTINGS HEREIN ARE RELATIVE TO ADJACENT GRADE. THE TOP OF ALL EXTERIOR FOOTINGS SHALL BE THUS: -1'-4 -REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND CONSTRUCTION OF NON -LOAD BEARING MTL STUD WALLS, FIXTURES, AND OTHER ITEMS NOT PRESENTED HEREIN -4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ 3000 PSI CONC. W/ 6X6 W2.lXW2.1 W.W.F. OVER 6 MIL MIN VAPOR BARRIER ON TERMITE TREATED COMPACTED SOIL. (TYP. U.O.N.) -C.J. = CONTROL JOINT / CONSTRUCTION JOINT, TO BE COORDINATED (REF. SUBMITTAL SECTION OF GENERAL NOTES). CONTROL JOISTS SHALL BE V DEEP SAW CUTS TO BE MADE WITHIN 24 HRS OF POUR. -OPENING/ RE-ENTRANT CORNER, TYP. PROVIDE (2) #4 REBAR X 4'-0" LONG AT MID -HEIGHT OF SLAB -DIAGONAL OR K-BRACE MEMBER "UP" p -DIAGONAL OR K-BRACE MEMBER "DOWN" v CONC. COL. W/ (14) #5 VERT., #3 TIES @ 8" O.C. 1 1/2" MIN. CLR., TYP. CC-2 CONT. TO ROOF BRG. r 2'-0" CC2 7 8+ C ® c U w N U o 0 cl U 0 ��i O1a 3 PENO U U--t� %, CU W C O Q" 0 V (u N 00 c N � �LCD cumc U u J -U �� N Q- N F- ^^� N w L.LMI�(n I U 1n a. 0 E E U L M N� cu(�c Uj`�0 `L °6 L U w ��Q Cn mYNa 0 a Z Q a. Z 0 Q 0 Z J 0 w w cn c La � (� 4 m z O z cn O Ln m c ~ w w cn z o � a m 0 1�_ NI ICI CD O N C 5 t[� 61� L o CD of f co co CD w N N N d co Z m o U wa crc N w N O $ U m Ix a _ d O O U FOUNDATION PLAN SCALE:118"=1'-V REF: " ft 2 CONCRETE COLUMNS SCALE:112 4.0" REF: 3 CONCRETE COLUMNS SCALE:117=1'-0" REF: Ww U LOWER STEEL FRAMING PLAN SCALE:118"=1V REF: "�ruo TT -fig' INTERMEDIATE STEEL 2 FRAMING PLAN SCALE:1/8"44" REF: 4'-3Y" IN ' B16 C-4 04 N ® T-4 0 O N T-3 o Fo O — :ET-2® — I C-4 CN N ;' B2 �� JT-3 CV ���. ; N m JT-2B2 S502-16 TOWER LOWER STEEL 3 FRAMING PLAN SCALE:1/8"4.0" REF: "EiNL 1;FAM..' MARK DESIGNAT101 B1 W10X22 B2 W16X26 B3 W16X26 B4 W16X26 85 W16X26 B6 W16X26 B7 W18X40 B8 W21X44 B9 W21X44 B10 W21X57 B11 W24X55 B12 27X84 B13 W30X108 B14 HSS4X4X1/4 B15 HSS6X6X1/4 B16 HSS6X6X1/4 O O U y 0.Y w 00 00 M_q 0 �c cdi U A" C-D C-C T C-A.4 TC-A.2 rC-A.lC-A 24'-0" I 3T-9Y" I 47'-3Y" 16-3%" I 10'-0" 1 -0" 10 N 6' ^,1 O i ® .I li< M PB1 �, PB1 I RB1 � RBI LB1 L1A LB1 JOIST BRG. _ — o,� — m ao m 16-8"A.F.F. C-0.5 DC1 a op I N J2 CN m C-0.9 P61 � PB1 �, WE D DC3 C-0.9 RB1 RB1 � � 0 DC2 _ _ LB1 LB1 I B8 _ v C-1 16-0"A.F.F. DC DC3 — C-1 a m DC1— , C1 DC2 --DC2 U - S502_4 S502-5 1 - � C NIT. DC1 W DC2 by N r-- I I PB7 RB1a�m up o o LB1 L1A STEEL B CING; r I I REF. ETAIL _ ._......_ — F3 m m L-- — S005-7 R OF HAT — S502-22 — C-1.6 1 3 J4 JII aim �m 02 N C-2 — — — G3 G2 R1 R1 D G3 — — — C-2 R1 R1 RTU LO ATIONS RE SHO N FOR RE ERENCE S502-2 AND CC ORDINAT ON ONLY. RTU'S ROOF CURBS WILL 6 PROVIDE D AS PAR OF THE F UTURE TENAN BUILD OtIT. REF. ENANT BU LD OUT `D "'' DRAWINGS FOR VIEIGHTSO BE ADD D TO c `' JOISTS (MIN. DES GIN WEIG T TO BE 0 LBS), 4 TYP. J4 S004-14 I 0 C-3 — — — G3 R1 D G1 D R1 G3 — — — C-3 00 9 S502-3 ROOF LINE OF ADJACENT BUILDING "B"; REF. BLDG. "B" TO PLANS J4 ROOF LINE OF ADJACE T io cc BUILDING "D"; REF. BL Lo cn CM PLANS i I I i I N cn cn C-4 — — — B12 D B13 D B12 — — C-4 — — S502-12 S502-4 I I i S004-12 S303-2 L — — J3 — M c� u? N O O O O) N m m m m J5 J5 M WEL HSS/PLAT END TO S502-23 N WELD HSS/PLATE END TO C-4.6 N — EMBE PLATE; F. DETAIL B6 B7 B6 o EMBED LATE; REF DETAIL n 0 0 T-4 C-4.7 — N — — �L C A. 0 0 N T-3 C3-- — ---DC3 J2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — DC3 --DC3 m m DC --DC3 S502-21 0 C-4 9 f CON ;Cl ! C2 CO T. DC1 / C2 — o Eo a Uo °°oDC * * * * DC1 DC2 S 2-9 �— C2 DC1 * * * * * * * DC10 m m m JOIST BRG C-5 PB2 PB2 B11 D B6 D B11 DPB2 PB2 a J R1131 RB1 S502-7 — T-2 LB1 L61 RB1 RB1 0 0 S502-8 LB1 LB1 ' CV 0 N $ S502-6 N 0 O — T-1 ICD cn cn �� licn I G6_ — — — — — D D D D I * DENOTES L2.5X2.5XJ AT EACH JOIST LOCATION I I I I I I / '-6' '-10" ALONG STORE FRONT WALL; REF. TO DETAIL N I : , N < " S502-1 FOR MORE INFORMATION (` 0 0 16� cn cn cn 33'-6" 4'_3Y�� 6'-4Y° 6'-0" 5'4' 5'4' 9-4„ 6'_0�' 8'-10%" 1; ' 38'-6" T-D T-C T-B T-A oe 37'-8Y" I I I I 4'-wY" I I 40'-33/8" 125'-4" nC- C-C1 C-C C-B.8 C-B.7 C-B.6 (CC-B.5 C-B.3 C B.2 -C-B C-A.9 C-A RO®F FRAMING PLAN SCALE: 118 4-0" REF: "nw T- 1 1/2" DEEP 22-GAUGE (WR) PAINTED DECK, MINIMUM (I=0.169 IN4/FT. SP=0.186 IN3 /FT. SN=0.1921N3/FT). FASTEN USING (7) 5/8" PUDDLE WELDS AT EACH SUPPORT PER 36"WIDTH [ 36/71, (7) #10 TEK SCREWS AT MIDSPAN OF SIDELAPS, AND 5l8" PUDDLE WELDS AT 6°' O.C. ALONG EDGES. TaFAMCJST T.O.S. MARK DESIGNATION NOTES B1 W10X22 DECK BRG. B2 W16X26 14'-5 3/411 TOWER STEEL LOWER FRAMING A.F.F. B3 W16X26 � F � TRUSS BRG. B4 W16X26 23-2 TOWER INTERMEDIATE STEEL FRAMING A.F,F. B5 W16X26 32-0 TOWER HIGH STEEL FRAMING A.F.F. B6 W16X26 JST BRG. B7 W18X40 JST BRG. 68 W21X44 JST BRG. B9 W21X44 DECK BRG. B10 W21X57 DECK BRG. JST B11 W24X55 BRG. B12 W27X84 JST BRG. 613 W30X108 1 BRG. B14 HSS4X4X1/4 A F STORE FRONT ENTRY VESTIBULE B15 HSS6X6X1/4 10-6 STORE FRONT WIND GIRT B16 HSS6X6X1/4 124 STORE FRONT STEEL LOWER FRAMING A.F.F. _InI_,QT-q v zl, MARK Ti DESIGNATION MAX SPACING BRIDGING &BRACING J1 HSS2.5X2.5X114 5'-0" J2 10K1 5'-0" -1 ROW STD. BRIDGING &BRACING J3 16K2 5-0" -2 ROW STD. BRIDGING &BRACING J4 22K6 5'-0" -3 ROW STD. BRIDGING &BRACING J5 22KCS4 5'-0" -4 ROW STD. BRIDGING &BRACING 1 IQ rnl I InnNc BASE MARK DESIGNATION PLATE NOTES SC1 HSS6X6X114 NIA STUB COL.; REF. DETAILS SC2 HS0014 NIA STUB COL.; REF. DETAILS RnNn RFAM4 r. MARK SIZE HORZ. REINF. VERT. REINF. NOTES BB1A 61XS" (1) #5 REBAR REF: PLANS BB1B 8"X8" (2) #5 REBAR REF: PLANS B15213 8" X 16" #5 REBAR 2B/2T REF: PLANS FNFRAI NnTFC IRDE IL -ALL LOADS GIVEN ARE ASD -JST. ENGINEER TO DESIGN FOR ADDITIONAL LOADS PRESENTED HEREIN. -REF: SECTIONS /DETAILS AS REQUIRED FOR ADDED JST. BRACING AND ASSOCIATED LOADING. -POSITION ALL RTUS ON SPECIAL JST.S AS SHOWN, BTW. BRIDGING AND BRACING FOR REQUIRED CLEARANCES -A MIN. OF A SINGLE LINE OF BOTTOM CHORD BRIDGING MUST BE PROVIDED NEAR THE FIRST BOTTOM CHORD PANEL POINTS @ EA. END OF ALL JST. (TYP. UPLIFT BRIDGING) -REF. JOIST AND GIRDER GENERAL INFORMATION FOR ADDITIONAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS -DIAGONAL OR K-BRACE MEMBER "UP" � -DIAGONAL OR K-BRACE MEMBER "DOWN" ---7 ON CENTER MARK SIZE FASTENER SPACING NOTES DC1 L4X4X114" 24" O.C. @MASONRY DC2 11-44114" REF: 5005-10 @STL• DC3 1-30114" REF: 5005-8 @STL. MARK DESIGNATION JOIST BEARING NOTES G1 44G11N8.OK REF. PLANS Q G2 36G11N8.OK REF. PLANS G3 36G8N8.OK REF. PLANS AnNll RFAAA I n('.ATInNC I I n N MARK BOND BEAM ELEVATION LB1 661A TOP @ 9'-4" A.F.F. RB1 B132B TOP OF ROOF BRG., TYP. (STEP AS REQ, G.C. COORDINATE) PB1 BB113 TOP OF PARAPET/MAS. (20-0 A.F.F.) PB2 BB2g TOP OF PARAPET/ MAS. (20-0 A.F.F.) 1 INTFI F III14K DEAD LOAD I GPM11Lei ►IL10 kf79 1+ MARK SIZE HORZ. REINF. VERT. REINF. NOTES L1A 8"X8" (1) #5 REBAR REF: PLANS 8" MIN. END BRG., PRECAST BASE L1B 8"X8" (2) #5 REBAR REF: PLANS 8" MIN. END BRG., PRECAST BASE 1_213 8" X 16" #5 REBAR 2B/2T REF: PLANS 8" MIN. END BRG., PRECAST BASE 1_313 8"X24" #5 REBAR 2B/2T REF: PLANS 8" MIN. END BRG., PRECAST BASE L4113 8"X32" #5 REBAR 2113/2T REF: PLANS 8" MIN. END BRG., PRECAST BASE MARK DESIGNATION FROM TO NOTES BR1 HSS6X6X1/4" WF BEAM ! HSS COL. WF BEAM CENTER K-BRACING BR2 HSS5X5X1/4" WF BEAM CENTER WF BEAM CENTER HORIZONTAL -BRACING 0 o 0 tH M ~ O N d 6 I U W C U_jM V M a) z �L 0) > w � M I— (n J C�CD to U L M N� cu���LL W U�o o,�I :c ULL VJ� L 8 U 31 cn Q- to mYNa a � 0 �o V 4� W iL J mco z o z can g �= w w al ml 0I O O N W c; tt") US Q of OI OI co coco W O 0 O Z O O LLI N W N C Z � w � m S103 I u HIGH STEEL FRAMING PLAN SCALE:1/8"=1'-0" REF: u m m p B3 p S502-17 C#4 4'-3Y" 6'-4Y" a _m 4'-3Y," m B3 p B3 A AL B4 'Q� S5C 1,?, C-4 N N T-4 T-3 0 6,Q j N C � m ' � o iv i y°` o —N T-1 TOWER INTERMEDIATE 2 STEEL FRAMING PLAN SCALE:118"=l'-0" REF: 10'-8" C-4 in N —.% v---% T-4 0 CV 7 T-3 n ao n o iv T-2 — 0 —`V T-1 14FAMC T.O.S, MARK DESIGNATION NOTES B1 W10X22 DECK BRG. B2 W16X26 14'-5 3/4" TOWER STEEL LOWER FRAMING A.F.F. B3 W16X26 22-8 TRUSS BRG. A.F.F. B4 W16X26 23-2 TOWER INTERMEDIATE STEEL FRAMING A.F.F. B5 W16X26 32'_01, TOWER HIGH STEEL FRAMING A.F.F. B6 W16X26 JST BRG. B7 W18X40 JST BRG. B8 W21X44 JST BRG. B9 W21X44 DECK BRG. B10 W21X57 DECK BRG. JST Bll W24X55 JST B12 W27X84 BRG. B13 W30X108 JST 1 BRG. B14 HSS4X4X1/4 1 F STORE FRONT ENTRY VESTIBULE B15 HSS6X6X1/4 STORE FRONT WIND GIRT B16 HSS6X6X1/4 12-0 ) STORE FRONT STEEL LOWER FRAMING A.F.F. I v TRUSS SYSTEM STEEL SUPPORT BELOW ANCHORAGE OF LIGHT GAUGE METAL TRUSS SYSTEM BY SYSTEM SUPPLIER ARArP..q MARK DESIGNATION FROM TO NOTES BR1 HSS6X6X1/4" WF BEAM I HSS COL. WF BEAM CENTER K-BRACING BR2 HSS5X5X1/4" WF BEAM CENTER WF BEAM CENTER HORIZONTAL -BRACING 6" 2'-10" 101-8" 16'4' oo T. T-C T-B T-A E .W U U W'. 01 CL 0'. "' (D NW C U_(JuM •�I U co C �I-0 J 0 w LL cu cu E.ILL � fl.N �L,N E > Lu M I-- fA U cn 0 E E', 0 U 0 M N� Cu L Uod0 Lu V oo U uj iN � N 0. mYN IX VZ/ C� Z W J H H w L.L W U) O tN I Z O � m � ~ w co w z o 0- ml I OI O O N W C7 co 4= cl cl w m� m� m� C,4 N N Ir O co Z m o N 0(J,� co Yof CD N UJ fV o m O H W f) MANSARD ROOF FRAMING JSCALE:1/8"=1'-0" REF: onw 4 TOWER HIGH STEEL FRAMING PLAN SCALE:1/8"=1'-0" REF: MAL 5 TOWER ROOF FRAMING PLAN SCALE:1/8"44" REF: ml S104 o 0 T.O. FRAMING IV REF; ARCH, 5/8" MIN. STRUCTURAL EXTERIOR GRADE STRUCTURAL SHEATHING, REF. GENERAL NOTES FOR FASTENER INFORMATION. PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE METAL TRUSS SYSTEM, TRUSSES @ 24" O.C. MAX. BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS T.O. WALL / TRUSS BRG. REF. PLANS JOIST BRG. REF.PLANS DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF. PLANS FRAMING SYSTEM / METAL DECK, REF.PLANS CMU WALL; REF. PLANS LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 16" O.C. MAX. SPACING BY SPECIALTY ENGINEER, REF, GEN. NOTES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION T.O. BOND BEAM REF. PLANS BOND BEAM; REF, PLANS FIN. FLOOR IF -REF ATTACHMENT BY SPECIALTY ENGINEER, REF. GEN. NOTES, TYP. HSS CONT.; REF. PLANS DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF. PLANS FRAMING SYSTEM / METAL DECK, REF. PLANTS jh T.O. FRAMING REF: ARCH. 5/8" MIN. STRUCTURAL EXTERIOR GRADE STRUCTURAL SHEATHING, REF. GENERAL NOTES FOR FASTENER INFORMATION. PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE METAL TRUSS SYSTEM, TRUSSES @ 24" O.C. MAX. BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS TO, WALL / TRUSS BRG. REF.PLANS JOIST BRG. REF. PLANS DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF. PLANS FRAMING SYSTEM / METAL DECK, REF.PLANS CMU WALL; REF, PLANS REF. S001 FOR LIGHT GAUGE INFORMATION, DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THOSE PRESENTED HEREIN I BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS FIN. FLOOR REF.PLANS T.O. FRAMING REF; ARCH, 5/8" MIN. STRUCTURAL EXTERIOR GRADE STRUCTURAL SHEATHING, REF. GENERAL NOTES FOR FASTENER INFORMATION. PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE METAL TRUSS SYSTEM, TRUSSES @ 24" D.C. MAX. T.O.06 STEEL / TRUSS BRG. REF. PLANS t— HSS CONT.; REF. PLANS DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF PLANS FRAMING SYSTEM / METAL DECK, REF. PLANS W BEAM ,REF. PLANS BRACING, REF. PLANS HSS COL., REF. PLANS T.O. STEEL REF. PLANS W BEAM ,REF. PLANS REF. SOC INFORM/ REQUIRE THOSE F LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 16" O.C. MAX. SPACING BY SPECIALTY ENGINEER, REF. GEN. NOTES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION T.O. STEEL REF. PLANS W BEAM ,REF. PLANS I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J— �! I I I I I I I I I I I ---J-L7I--T_-I----I� I I i I I I-i�-l-T.--I.rJ-L---Ll I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I WALL SECTION SCALE:112"=1'-T REF: 2 WALL SECTION SCALE:1/2"=1'-0" REF: 3 MALL SECTION SCALE:1/2"=1'-0" REF: o L; wil T n Conuuirl 5/8" MIN. STRUCTURAL E; GRADE STRUCTURAL SHE REF. GENERAL NO FASTENERINFOF PRE-ENGINEERED LIGH' METAL TRUSS SYSTEM,1 @ 24" T. W BEAM ,RE OL T.O.STEEL IT REF. T.O. STEEL I JI REF. HSS COL.; REI LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING C MAX. SPACING BY SP ENGINEER, REF. GEN. NO' FURTHER INFOF HSS BEAM. ,REI T RI T RI PRE-ENGINEERED AWNING, REF SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE ANCI AND SPECIFY STRU REINFORCING AT SUPF BUILDING ELEMENTS AS RE( GENERAI FIN. FLOOR REF. PLANS WALL SECTION SCALE:112"=1'-0" REF; o N< W BEAM ,REF. PLANS 2 WALL SECTION SCALE:1/2"=1'-0" REF: De BOND BEAM; REF, PLANS T.O. WALL A REF, PLANS Y FRAMING SYSTEM / METAL DECK, REF. PLANS DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF. PLANS JOIST BRG. REF. PLANS BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 16" O.C. MAX. SPACING BY SPECIALTY ENGINEER, REF. GEN. NOTES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS T.O. BOND BEAM Ak REF. PLANS CMU WALL; REF. PLANS RER PLANS 3 WALL SECTION SCALE:112"=1'-0" REF: WNL O O C BOND BEAM; REF, PLANS T.O. WALL REF.PLANS FRAMING SYSTEM / METAL DECK, REF.PLANS DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF. PLANS JOIST BRG, .10- REF. PLANS BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS T.O. BOND BEAM ri REF.PLANS CMU WALL; REF. PLANS FIN. FLOOR REF.PLANS V ^^♦♦w W O Q V (u c c0 V J G .� M N L UM C' O J •— :' "a U , gW LL CO G f6 LL Q C1 N LNE> N; J M I- fn U O ill � M CQ=LLLL.-' (q e U r� 0 LLJ0, Lij mYNd V Z «>_; co e o.- LL- m I Z O u�i Z O m > Lu U) ce ~ w c w z Lu 0 o a m �I O NI O �I N W m Lo u') Q W J �I CDO c� m� O W N N N c5 Z rn 00 O U co N 13 N cliZ W C) °' Y U m 0 Q � 2 S302 1 jh TO. FRAMING IV REF; ARCH. 5/8" MIN. STRUCTURAL EXTERIOR GRADE STRUCTURAL SHEATHING, REF. GENERAL NOTES FOR FASTENER INFORMATION. PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE METAL TRUSS SYSTEM, TRUSSES @ 24" O.C. MAX. T.O. FRAMING REF: ARCH. FRAMING BEYOND; REF. PLANS W BEAM ,REF. PLANS T.O. STEEL/ TRUSS BRG. REF. PLANS gak T.O. STEEL I JOIST BRG. REF. PLANS LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING @ 16" O.C. MAX. SPACING BY SPECIALTY ENGINEER, REF. GEN. NOTES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION HSS BEAM ,REF. PLANS T.O, STEEL REF, PLANS OL T.O. STEEL REF. PLANS PRE-ENGINEERED AWNING, REF. ARCH., SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE ANCHORAGE AND SPECIFY STRUCTURAL REINFORCING AT SUPPORTING BUILDING ELEMENTS AS REQ'D, REF. GENERALNOTES HSS COL.; REF. PLANS FIN. FLOOR REF. PLANS I I I I L__®.__.___.____J L_®_—e.---__®—_J W BEAM ,REF. PLANS ATTACHMENT BY SPECIALTY ENGINEER, REF. GEN. NOTES, TYP. W BEAM ,REF. PLANS BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS T.O. WALL /_6 REF. PLANS lq✓ DECK CLOSURE ANGLE, REF. PLANS FRAMING SYSTEM / METAL DECK, REF.PLANS BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS ADJACENT BUILDING WALL; REF. PLANS BOND BEAM; REF. PLANS T.O. BOND BEAM REF. PLANS CMU WALL; REF. PLANS FIN. FLOOR REF. PLANS 0 �a 00 00 ^1 •�W o Qop w U U CL ct U oZ I ao U U u O CL V Nc co ''♦♦ V J � M N �L U co C . O ttf J ._ 0u- U.> ��cc (6u"' z w(D CL a) �LN E > N N ."-+ J MI—(!) 0 Cn I, Cis LL U) D 0 g 06:EU �(Cl) CL Lu o O O ca W Y N CL a ui W w w U) a Z fA \VVl �j i r Lo W U- My m Z O CO Z C O En cn elf ~ w w U) z Lu p CLl cal OI O O N W co � � a) CD O� Q 00 co 00 J O O O O co Z rn O N w N V w o m a a o v WALL SECTION SCALE:112"=1'-0" REF: 2 WALL SECTION SCALE:1/2"44' REF: "ewc Z w 1� 1 MAX. FOOTING STEP SHALL BE 2'-0" A FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" REF: DnN�e�ax iD�% FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4'4-T 7REF: DerNls s�w%m m 2" y-- i PLAN VIEW W.W.F. REF: PLANS s • • 3°'CLR REF. PLANS COV (TYP) -— FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:314"44' REF: DEIMLD_YLUU89S' TYP. SLAB, REF: FDN. PLANS 8" CMU. DWL.S TO MATCH VERT. REINF. REF: PLANS REF: PLANS & FTG. SCH. FOR SIZE, DEPTH & REINF. REQ'D IN FTG.'S �TYP. 8X8X1/4" EMBEDED PLATE W/ (2) 3/8" HEADED STUD CENTERED ON PL. REF: PLANS FOR SIZE, DEPTH & REINF. REQ'D IN FTG.'S C.J. oao U FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4'=1'4" 2REF: DnNlx� It%mm y" ISOLATION JOINT PER ARCH DRAWINGS 2ND POUR, SIZE TO CLR. BASE PLATE AND BRACING (WHERE BRACING OCCURS) C.J. NOTES: S5019 -ANCHOR BOLT EMBEDMENT LENGTH TO BE FTG THICKNESS-4" -SECOND POUR NOT SHOWN FOR CL CLARITY -SEE COLUMN AND BASE PLATE SCHEDULE FOR SPECIFICS I I STL. COL., REF: PLANS I I ANY PORTION OF STRUCTURAL STL. BELOW FINISHED FLOOR l l MUST TO BE COATED WITH AN 1/4" ASPHALTIC BASED CORROSION RESISTANCE COATING UPON l INSTALLATION. II NON -SHRINK GROUT, 1 1/2" MAX FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" 8REF: ETNLCJM1>,I® % FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:1/2"=1'-0" 14REF: DErN.x_s=DeyiNa%I�% REF: PLANS & FTG, SCH. FOR SIZE, DEPTH & REINF. REQ'D IN FTG.'S EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL, REF: ARCHITECTURAL DWGS. x X� �X X Expansion Joint TYP. "E.J " PRE-FAB GALV. METAL KEYWAY x X� �X X X Construction Joint OCCURS ONLY @ "C.J" LOCATIONS BTW. POURS 1/8 TO 3116 WIDE X 1" DEEP GROOVE WI SAW CUTS TO BE MADE WITHIN 24 HOURS HIGH TRAFFIC SEALANT FILER OF POUR, WWF SHALL BE CONTINUOUS @ 3 ALL C.J.S. U.O.N. ON PLANS X X X X X X WWI a FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:314"=V-0" 3REF: DEfaLCj"R ISIDyyI EQ. EQ. 1.5 X BOLT DIA., MIN. TYP c� w d w BASE PLATE DETAIL SCALE:11/74-0' 9 REF: OEfNISYR0.311"B_% HSS COL., REF: PLANS BASE PL„ REF: PLANS ANCHOR BOLT, REF: PLANS RA PAPA G) 17" (1 (` 8" ALTERNATE CONSTRUCTION JOINT TYP. "AJ." FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" 4REF: DEINlL381r I"1"AI NOTES: - ANCHOR BOLT EMBEDMENT LENGTH TO BE FTG THICKNESS-4" - SECOND POUR NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY S501-1111 SEE COLUMN AND BASE PLATE v SCHEDULE FOR SPECIFICS. CONC. COL., REF: PLANS STL. COL., REF: PLANS (2) 3/8" STL. GUSSET PLS. III 1/4" ill 1 NON -SHRINK GROUT, 1 1/2" MAX l < REF: PLANS & FTG. SCH. FOR SIZE, DEPTH & REINF. REQ'D IN FIG.'S FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3W=1'-0" 10 REF: Era�x_xm��%aa% REF.PLANS REF. PLANS RER PLANS RER PLANS REF -PLANS FL. COL., REF: PLANS • "T.E." TYP FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4'=1'-0" 5REF: DEiNL9DjN_I"1" % 1.5 X BOLT DIA., MIN. TYP cu w d w EQ. �- EQ. W.W.F. REF: PLANS (2) #5 CONT. BASE PL., REF: PLANS HSS COL., REF: PLANS ANCHOR BOLT, REF; PLANS (2) 3/8" GUSSET PLATE ANY PORTION OF STRUCTURAL STL. BELOW FINISHED FLOOR MUST TO BE COATED WITH AN ASPHALTIC BASED CORROSION RESISTANCE COATING UPON ECCENTRIC BASE PLATE DETAIL INSTALLATION11 SCALE:11/2"=1'-0" REF: e DErNLAR0.6�% )JACENT BUILDING; MUST COORDINATE Wl )JACENT BUILDING ONSTRUCTION FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" 6REF: OEiN��I"H%JI FOUNDATION DETAIL SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" 12REF: GROUTED VERT, CELL, REF: FOUNDATION PLANS OPENING/RE-ENTRANT CORNER, TYP. PROVIDE (2) #4 REBAR X 4'-0" LONG AT MID -HEIGHT OF SLAB AS SHOWN Y" TOY16' WIDE X 1" DEEP GROOVE W/ HIGH TRAFFIC SEALANT FILLER W.W.F (1) 9 CONT. VERT. REINF. REF: PLANS BUILDING; OORDINATE W/ BUILDING .TION FDN.PLANS 'vH VERT. REINF. REF: PLANS rxr-r. FTG. SCH. FOR SIZE, DEPTH & REINF. REQ'D IN FIG.'S Q 0 rIEA U Ed p 8 iw >o E •mow o do0 FS cd U � I Dn v 3 U r- U 0 Q_ 0 V (� (D 00 UcuQ co N' "L VM CI ^ ♦ cN _j .O W a � E�N`� Q aa� .�N E > 0—m c�U c7HU), z U 0 E E 0 (1) co N � ® , od ` � , z 0-� >% O U U) Q c i w O a)m �YNa a < LLj w w H 0 w w LL x m z O z cU)ia O m > ccn �= w w m z a -I 00l ml O O VV W m Lo u') Q'�I �I W w O O O 5�I W N N N O co Z o O uj cljo N o Z � m O Fw- Qom' W S501 BEAM SIZES W18 AND LARGER MAY USE A 25% DEPTH REDUCTION OPTION TO ACHIEVE A ® U g 4" BRIDGING & BRACING BY JST. MASONRY COURSING BRIG. CONC. COL. REF: PLANS v SUPPLIER, BEYOND CONDITION. G.G. TO COORDINATE.cd 3116 a cD � M ~O GROUT POCKET SOLID AFTER CIO a o\ WELDING INSPECTION FACE SHELL OF BLOCK REMOVED77477 v o PL1/2X6X1'-0" ON NON -SHRINK ) { GROUT POCKET SOLID AFTER AT PL. LOCATIONS ONLY o _ N o WELDING INSPECTION 112"X8"X"BM DEPTH" W/ o GROUT W/ (2) 1/2"X6" HEADED BOND BM. /TIE BEAM, REF: PLANS GROUT POCKET SOLID AFTER PL DE ANCHOR STUDS * r PL314X6X1' 0" ON NON SHRINK WELDING INSPECTION 2 ROWS OF 3/4"X6" H.A.S. o ld 11 L3X3X3/16 @ EA. JST. LOCATION, GROUT W/ (2) 3/4 X18 THREADED SPACED IN PAIRS @ 6" O.C, BOND BEAM / TIE BEAM, REF: I ATTACH TO CMU USING (2) 5/8X5 HEADED ANCHOR RODS F1554 GR. w ' o ( o PL1/2 STIFFENER PL., TYP. EA. SIDE MAX. APART, 3 PAIRS MIN. PLANS SIMPSON TITEN HD SCREW 36 MIN,) _ SHOWN w ANCHORS BOND BEAM (TIE BEAM, REF: (SHOWN) V ¢ o- • KICKER @ EA. JST. DOWN TO w ov PL314"X6XV-0" ON NON -SHRINK # STD. SHEAR CONNECTION MIN. PLANS, BTM. BARS UNDER m o 03 U CONT. L4=i BRACE. ATTACH ` ' { GIRDER, OUTSIDE VERT. REINF. � GROUT WI 2 3/4"X18" THREADED FCC. TO WALL CENTER, REF: G� 3 ~ () PL 1/2X7"X0'-10" VERT. EMBED W/ N L4X4 BRACE TO CMU W/ 5/8 X5� • CONT. TO T.O,M. C° v HEADED ANCHOR RODS (F1554 GR GENERAL NOTES IF FORCES TO BE Q 3 •'' z SIMPSON TITEN HD ANCHORS INTO 36) DEVELOPED NOT PRESENTED IN (2) 3/4"X12" THREADED HEADED U GROUT FILLED CELLS, REF: PLANS D NOT WELD PLAN DRAWINGS ANCHORS AS SHOWN of FOR O.C. DISTANCE (32" MAX. „ li L6X6X3/4"X0'-6", ATTACH TO CMU • • BOND BM./TIE BM., REF: PLANS f USING (2) 5/875" SIMP5ON TITEN HSS6X6X1/4", CUT TO FIT `t U.O.N. IN PLANS), WELD BRACE ( HD ANCHORS MAS. / CONC. COL., REF: PLANS )7 ONLY AFTER DEAD LOAD IS APPLIED TO ROOF SYSTEM STL. BM., REF: PLANS MAS. COL., REF: PLANS MAS. COL., REF: PLANS nP>_w VERT. REINF. REF: PLANS STD. SHEAR CONNECTION, KNIFE 3 PL, THRU COL, REF, PLANS FOR KICKER WALL' HSS COL., REF: PLANS BRACE SIZE & LOCATIONS _ JOIST BEARING AT CMU / CONC. JOIST BRIDGING AT CMU / CONC. FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL SCALE:3/4"=1'-T SCALE:314"=1'-0" SCALE:314"=1'-0" SCALE:314"=1'-0" 5SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" SCALE:314"=1'-0" REF: 2REF: 3REF: 46 REF: REF: REF: � w � pE NL STL. COL., REF: PLANS STL. CAP PL. STL. BM., REF: PLANS TYP. TYPICAL HSS. TO HSS. STL. BM., REF: PLANS STL. BM., REF: PLANS STD. SHEAR CONNECTION, KNIFE STL. BM,, REF: PLANS SIDES, PL. THRU COL. U.O.N. It 0 0 STD. SHEAR CONNECTION, KNIFE HSS. GIRT, REF: PLANS, TYP. 0 0 STD. SHEAR CONNECTION, KNIFE 0 0 STD. SHEAR CONNECTION, KNIFE o 0 0 STD. SHEAR CONNECTION, KNIFE o f l 0 PL. THRU COL. TYP 0 l 0 PL. THRU COL, o 0 PL. THRU COL. 0 o o PL, THRU COL. o 0 T&B, 0 o 0 ° 0 0 0 U.O.N. 1/4" I I EHSS. GIRT, REF. PLANS, TYP. 0 0 0 0 0 o o I I I I I 3/8" PL. FOR ERECTION ONLY I i 4 I I L6X6X1/4 BEARING SEAT W/ PL1/4 L6X6X1/4 BEARING SEAT W PL1 4 L6X6X1/4 BEARING SEAT W/y L6X6X1/4 BEARING SEAT W/ia i / I STIFFENER PL., TYP(FOR I( I STIFFENER FOR ERECTION ONLY STIFFENER FOR ERECTION ONLYSTIFFENER PL. TYPFOR ERECTION ONLY) �1/21MAX. ERECTION ONLY, AS REQ'D TYP. TYP. C� i i I I C , I i STL. BM. REF: PLANS HS S COL. REF: PLANS , HSS COL., REF: PLANS S HSS COL., REF: PLANS S ., 3116 o o � HSS COL., REF. PLANS H J I 0 Z HSS COL. REF: PLANS o0o c: mm - I NOTE: LONG DIMENSION OF HSS GIRTS & I I I I I COLUMNS TO BE ORIENTED I f? i PERPENDICULAR T STOREFRONT 10 CU 0 S 0 REF RO i i I WALL, U.O.N. IN SECTIONS OR L PLANS FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL 1 SCALE: 314 -1 " p 0I:=I " 007 8 9 0 12 REF: REF: REF: REF: REF: REF: ' 1 c r °� a)1 NM STL BM., REF: PLANS, TYP. S L. C L., REF: PLANS STL. BRACING, SLOT FOR PL. AND Im _j •O U I' O (� . WELD ALL SIDES. REF: PLANS -0 LL W � � ci � TYPICAL HSS. TO HSS. �. STD. SHEAR CONNECTION STL. B FOR PL. AND /�) 3/8" STL. PL, STL. BRACING SLOT FOR PL. AND STL. BM., REF: PLANS N E j -N ^ W STL BM. REF: PLAN TYP. Z �I PLANS, , � WELD ALL SIDES. REF: PLANS w L WE L SIDES. PLANS L.J.. M F- fA it TL. KNIFE T U COL. HSS COL., REF: PLANS s' 3/8" PL., ANGLED FOR STL BRACE. U 318" STL. PL. SS. T, TYP. -Q- HSS. GIRT, REF: PLANS, TYP. TYP. O 3116" STL. BRACING, SLOT FOR PL. AND WELD SIDES. r' D ALL DES. REF: PLANS TYP. 3116" 3 II I REF: PLANS, TYP, G RTL. B REF: TYP. TYP. S M. R PLANS C � � PL. 3/8 MIN. AT MIDPOINT s II p 311 114 3 -- -- - 6 3 -- - - - � CENTERLINE OF STL. BM. {I STL BM., REF: PLANS, TYP. - - -- -- - _ STD, SHEAR CONNECTION, KNIFE - ----- - - P ---- - -_ __ PL. FOR ERECTION ONLY - PL. THRU COL. -- - - - - - � 77 STD. SHEAR CONNECTION -_ _ o Air/_ o STL. BRACING, SLOT FOR PL. AND a f I o WELD ALL SIDES. REF: PLANS N TYP. ?� TYP. -�-1/2 MAX. � 0 SIDES, I '� b U.O.N . O z o i O �.�z TYP. Q O o TYP. II J n CO T&B, co 3116 i y L6X6X1/4 SEAT EAT W/ U.Q.N. a , I B I I �, I Ii STIFFENER PL., TYP FOR NOTE: ERECTION ONLY, AS REQ'D TYP. o LONG DIMENSION OF HSS GIRTS & >__1w_ 4 114" COLUMNS TO BE ORIENTED HSS COL., REF: PLANS PERPENDICULAR TO STOREFRONT FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL WALL, U.O.N. IN SECTIONS OR I 13T t:: SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" SCALE: 3/4"44' PLANS SCALE:314"44' SCALE:314"=1'-0" SCALE:314"=1'-0" SCALE:314"=1'-0" REF: EF: 15REF: REF: REF: REF: m A �meµ` �� "ET.1L MiPA', "ETPIL HSS BEAM., REF: PLANS $ '� 3116" HSS BM. REF: PLANS STL, CAP PL. _ � O L u 3i16 �- ch STL BM., REF: PLANS, TYP. HSS STUB COL. REF: PLANS, AT SLOT TUBE FOR (3/4 TRUSS SUPORT BM., REF: PANS 1 " «. ) EACH JOIST/BM. LOCATION OR 5'-0" A325-N THRU-BOLT W/ 2 3116 - -- -- - - -- - HSS COL., REF: PLANS 9 4-a 3/8" STL. PL. " O.C. MAX. SPACING ALONG W +/- VERT. MOVEMENT o cu _i 3116° BEAMS, CUT DECK EA. LOCATION, PL. 3/8"X8"X8", AND (4)1/2"X4" `�� `�� - -- -- - -- - - -- - - - - 0 -- u- Z PROVIDE PL1/2 CAP AS SHOWN z 0 ` HEADED ANCHOR STUDS AS (2) L6X4A LLV W U —__ O 1 y Up 3116 2 W BM,, REF: PLANS SHOWNme Lu TYP.L L6X4X5/16X0'-8" STUB COL., REF: PLANS o _ v 3116 W/ (2) 5/8X5 MIN. s Lu 0 N m w TYP, E c� u) CL co SIMPSON TITEN HD o LL 3116° ANCHORS �1 N u=i �-- - � 3116" HSS CONT. REF: PLANS — 4p 3116" -- HSS STUB COL. REF: PLANS, AT V, • TYP. p EACH JOIST/BM. LOCATION OR 6-0"-Eo s �� 3116 I� I � STL. BRACING, REF: PLANS 3116" O.C. MAX. SPACING ALONG W 3116" BEAMS, CUT DECK EA. LOCATION, 3116 PROVIDE PL112 CAP AS SHOWN^ a ¢ c _ 4 BM. 3/8 REF: PLANS W/ m o s V co 3/16 �� 3116 TYP. STIFFENER PLATES EA. SIDE OF JST. REF: PLANS m 1= �. TY P. TYP. 3116 BEAM AT STUB COL. m Lu w z 3116" ! m HSS COL., SLOTTED AT�j TOP AS SHOWN; JOIST/BEAM DIRECTION MAY BE REF. PLANS ' JL OPP. OF SHOWN, REF. PLANS AJ U to FRAMING DETAIL 0 FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL FRAMING DETAIL 19 SCALE:3/4"=1'-0" SCALE:314"=1'-0" 21SCALE:314"=1'-0" SCALE:3W=1'4" 3SCALE:3/4"=14' 24SCAL E:3/4"=1'-0" REF: REF: REF: REF: REF: REF: 22 osno_ �,� oemx: cerna oeran ttrul.'. . . a a m n Z 0 Ys 2 m `m Y+ � m p 8 � Q `m m U) o m .2 ~ W Lu � cn Z ai m' oI _m O O N W ch Lo Lo m (n c�I �1 OI a Q co W N O O :r= m co 3 Z rn o Q F- t; N cl co w N O Z C=7 � W O H W 0 o a_ C) L. S502 C-Oa0 �--- %r I•, C-3 C4-__.-.._.. C-4.6 } C-4.7 - �C-4.9 j / G-5 (�C6� REAR LEFT RIGHT Fire Protection Floor Plan N1 Scale 1/8"=1'-0" FRONT DRAWING CRITERIA THE FOLLOWING PUBLICATIONS SHALL BE USED AS A REFERENCE FOR DESIGN OF THE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ON THIS PROJECT. 1. NFPA 13, INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 2. NFPA 24, PRIVATE FIRE SERVICE MAINS AND THEIR APPURTENANCES 3. FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE - 2004 EDITION ENTIRE BUILDING (EXCEPT AS NOTED): OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: SYSTEM TYPE: DESIGN DENSITY: HYDRAULIC REMOTE AREA: SPRINKLER ORIFICE SIZE: SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE RATING: DURATION OF SUPPLY: MAXIMUM COVERAGE/SPRINKLER HEAD: HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE: BATHROOMS: OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: SYSTEM TYPE: DESIGN DENSITY: HYDRAULIC REMOTE AREA: SPRINKLER ORIFICE SIZE: SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE RATING: DURATION OF SUPPLY: MAXIMUM COVERAGE/SPRINKLER HEAD: HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE: ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 2 WET PIPE .20 GPM/SQ. FT. 1,500 SQ. FT. 1/2" 155°F 60 - 90 MIN. 130 SQ. FT./QUICK RESPONSE TYPE 250 GPM LIGHT HAZARD WET PIPE .10 GPM/SQ. FT. 1,500 SQ. FT. 1/2" 155°F 30 MIN. 225 SQ. FT./QUICK RESPONSE TYPE 100 GPM FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION O - CONTROL VALVE WTFAMPER SWITCH N - CHECK VALVE -O - FLOW SWITCH SPRINKLER AND DRAIN RISER - - NEW SPRINKLER PIPING Q- REVISION REFERENCE 1 - DETAIL REFERENCE: TOP -DETAIL#, FP-1 BOTTOM -DRAWING# SHOWN ON NOTE: SOME SYMBOLS SHOWN ON THIS LEGEND MAY NOT PERTAIN TO THIS PROJECT STAPLES UTILITY REQUIREMENTS FIRE PROTECTION WATER SERVICE: 6" MINIMUM HYDRAULIC INFORMATION REQUIRED: 788.3 GPM OVERHEAD 500 GPM HOSE STREAM 1288.3 GPM WITH 40.4 PSI @ B.O.R. TO SPRINKLER SYSTEM FLOW SWITCH oH INSPECTOR'S TEST & DRAIN CHECK VALVE W/ DRAIN ,E VALVE AND GAGES 1 T CONTROL VALVE W/ 0-0 °-° TAMPER SWITCH O O IN TO EXTERIOR iH BLOCK SUPPLY PIPE JE FINISHED FLOOR 7x"- Sprinkler Riser - Wet Pipe System Scale: None ROCKWOOL PIPE INSULATION THROUGH PARTITION OR WALL - PENETRATION, (INSULATED PIPE ONLY) 6" 6" I~- PIPE INSULATION (WHERE REQUIRED) PIPE SLEEVE (CONC. OR FIRESTOP MATERIAL MASONRY WALL ONLY ---/V ELEVATION - WALL PENETRATION Firestomina of Penetrations Throuah Walls Scale: None GENERAL NOTES 1. THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA 13 - 2004 EDITION, THE FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE AND ALL LOCAL CODES AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE AND APPROVAL SHALL BE CONDUCTED BY STATE FIRE MARSHAL AND ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE SYSTEM LAYOUT DRAWINGS PER CHAPTER 14, OF NFPA 13 - 2004 EDITION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS. CONTRACTOR'S SPRINKLER SYSTEM LAYOUT (SHOP DRAWINGS), HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND MATERIAL DATA SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO SYSTEM INSTALLATION. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM HYDRANT -FLOW TEST TO VERIFY WATER PRESSURE REQUIRED FOR HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS. 5. THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SHOWN REPRESENT THE DESIGN INTENT OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD, IN ACCORDANCE WITH STATE REGULATION 61 G15-32. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH ALL OTHER TRADES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COMPLETE SPRINKLER SYSTEM LAYOUT DRAWINGS WITH ANY ADDITIONAL OFFSETS, SPRINKLERS OR SYSTEM COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM AND TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH OTHER TRADES. 6. SEE ARCHITECTURAL. REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR CEILING TYPES, HEIGHTS AND ALL ASSOCIATED DATA. 7. ALL DRAIN AND DRY PIPE SYSTEM PIPING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE GALVANIZED BOTH INSIDE AND OUTSIDE. 8. INSTALL ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS UNDER ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK OR OBSTRUCTIONS EXCEEDING 48" IN WIDTH. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER COVERAGE OF OBSTRUCTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13. 9. ALL SPRINKLERS INSTALLED WITHIN MECHANICAL ROOMS, STORAGE ROOMS, JANITORS CLOSETS OR AREAS SUBJECT TO MECHANICAL INJURY SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH LISTED GUARDS. 10. COORDINATE PIPE ROUTING WITH DUCT ROUTING, EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL PANELS. PIPING ROUTED OVER ELECTRICAL PANELS SHALL BE REROUTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. 11. PROVIDE TAMPER SWITCHES ON ALL CONTROL VALVES. 12. SLOPE ALL PIPING TO THE SYSTEM MAIN DRAIN AS REQUIRED TO INSURE PROPER DRAINAGE, IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO INSURE THAT ALL PIPING IS DRAINABLE. ADDITIONAL DRAINS AND PLUGS SHALL BE INSTALLED WHERE REQUIRED TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE REFERENCED CODES. 13. ALL ROLL GROOVED AND CUT GROOVED COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. 14. SPRINKLERS SHALL BE CENTERED IN CEILING TILES IN AREAS WITH LAY -IN TILES AND VISUALLY ALIGNED IN AREAS WITH SMOOTH CEILINGS. 15. THIS BUILDINGS STRUCTURAL SYSTEM HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO SUPPORT THE ADDITIONAL WEIGHT ASSOCIATED WITH THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. 16. PIPING IN AREAS WITH EXPOSED STRUCTURE SHALL BE INSTALLED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE TO ALLOW THE OWNER MAXIMUM USE OF THE SPACE. 17. SPRINKLERS IN AREAS WITH EXPOSED STRUCTURE (OBSTRUCTED CONSTRUCTION) SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH DEFLECTOR 1" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE BEAM (MAXIMUM 22" BELOW ROOF DECK). EXPOSED BAR JOISTS THAT HAVE SPRAY -ON FIRE PROOFING THAT MAKES THE JOIST SOLID SHALL BE TREATED LIKE A BEAM WITH THE SPRINKLERS 1" BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE FIRE PROOFING. 18. SLEEVE AND/OR FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS, CEILINGS, AND FLOORS WITH U/L LISTED ASSEMBLIES. FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE EQUAL OR EXCEED THE RATING OF THE WALL, CEILING OR FLOOR. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR FINAL FINISHES. SEE FIRE RATED PIPE PENETRATION DETAILS. 19. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS TO ALL VALVES ABOVE NON -ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS AND CHASES. FLORIDA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE CHAPTER 61 G15-32 NOTES 1. THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE THE PREPARATION AND DESIGN OF THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM LAYOUT DOCUMENTS (WORKING PLANS). PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, COMPONENTS, ASSEMBLIES AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS REQUIRED, AS DESCRIBED, IN NFPA 13. THE FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL CONDUCT A HYDRANT FLOW TEST AND PERFORM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM. 2. THE FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN, CALCULATIONS, INSTALLATION AND THE ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13, 2004 EDITION; NFPA 24, 2002 EDITION; THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE AND THE FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE 2004 EDITION AND ALL LOCAL CODES REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 3. AREA OCCUPANCIES AND HAZARD CLASSIFICATIONS ARE LISTED IN THE DESIGN CRITERIA NOTE LOCATED ON THIS SHEET. 4. ALL SYSTEM CONTROL VALVES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH TAMPER SWITCHES AND INTERFACE WITH THE FACP ON THE SUPERVISORY CIRCUIT, ALL FLOW SWITCHES SHALL INTERFACE WITH THE FACP ON THE ALARM CIRCUIT. 5. THE FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE AND PROVIDE SIGNED AND SEALED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM LAYOUT DOCUMENTS WITH HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND SHALL BE THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. SIGNED AND SEALED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM LAYOUT DOCUMENTS WITH HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND THE LOCAL AHJ FORACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO PERMITTING. 6. ALL FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE LISTED AND TESTED FOR FIRE PROTECTION USE AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13. ALL FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE THE U.L. LISTED AND FM APPROVED. 7. THE POINT OF SERVICE AND THE WATER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTIC'S FOR THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS SHOWN ON THE CIVIL SITE PLAN. 8. THE WATER SUPPLY FOR THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM HAS NOT SHOWN ANY EVIDENCE OF MICROBIAL INDUCED CORROSION (MIC). THE FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY EVIDENCE OF MIC AND PROVIDE NECESSARY WATER TREATMENT AS NEEDED TO REDUCE OR ELIMINATE MIC. 9. ALL METERING AND BACK FLOW PRVENTION DEVICES SHALL MEET WITH ALL WATER PURVEYORS REQUIREMENTS. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER LEGEND SYMBOL ORF TEMP RESPONSE K-FAC FINISH MODEL STYLE PLATE MFG. • 1/2" 1550 QUICK 5.6 CHROME F1FR RECESSED CHROME RELIABLE 0 1/2" 1550 QUICK 5.6 BRASS F1FR UPRIGHT HD/GD RELIABLE O 1/2" 155° QUICK 5.6 BRASS F1FR UPRIGHT NONE RELIABLE DRAWING LIST NO. TITLE FP001 Fire Protection Floor Plan & General Information 12111 ,�;L Key Plan [ �Kossik Rd u V 7`� I III } US Hwy 301 0 m E ■ U'iI CI (D CI 0 �I 0I V (V'(D00 c N � .V�M a) ^� U CO C N Cu w LL • C- a) z L fA > w co I.- J i U CIS OI E E UI a) M N� J Cu NLL c e co 0�U C-ti ` 0 �cnaai & m2Na a 0 Cu E L C Cu L. ra) V 06 _Cu L 0 LL O O w J L w w U- w 12 W z N W N WY m o u_ co aLL w R Q z Iz O _ L o C0 m > ~ w w m z w o 3: a. col OI O O N W e; to ui 0I 00 �1 CD CD CD Lu N N N Lu O aD Z m O Cl) 0 N W W O N w cLu m � d D U FP001 C-0.9 1 C-1 - -- -- (:C)-3--- - G4.6 C-4.7 - QC-4.9 ` -- C-6 REAR LEFT RIGHT 1 Plumbing Floor Plan NScale 1/8"=l'-0" FRONT PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. 18. METERING AND SITE UTILITY CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON SITE UTILITY DRAWINGS. ALL I.E.: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2004- PLUMBING. SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS SET OF PLANS TERMINATE 5'-0" FROM BUILDING, UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO SITE 2. ALL SANITARY PIPING SHALL HAVE A 1/8" PER FOOT SLOPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL UTILITIES. STORM WATER PIPING SHALL HAVE A 1/8" PER FOOT MINIMUM HORIZONTAL SLOPE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 19. FURNISH AND INSTALL HOSE BIBBS AND/OR WALL HYDRANTS 24" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE/FLOOR AND PROVIDE VACUUM BREAKERS. 3. VALVES AND FITTINGS SHALL BE OF SAME SIZE OF LINE ON WHICH THEY ARE LOCATED, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 4. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING FIRE RATING AND WEATHERPROOFING INTEGRITY OF ALL PIPING AND PENETRATIONS. 5. ALL WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY LINES SHALL RUN AS CLOSE TO PLANS AS POSSIBLE WITH NO CHANGES IN SIZING. 6. CHANGES IN THE DIRECTION OF SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SHALL NOT BE MADE WITH FITTINGS WHICH WILL CAUSE EXCESSIVE REDUCTION IN THE VELOCITY OF FLOW OR CREATE ANY OTHER ADVERSE EFFECT. I.E.: USE OF SANITARY TEE IN A HORIZONTAL CONNECTION, USE OF A DOUBLE SANITARY TEE IN A VERTICAL STACK, USE OF SHORT RADIUS FITTINGS FOR BRANCH TO HOUSE DRAIN OR STACK CONNECTION. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE 24 HOURS NOTICE TO APPLICABLE UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO PERFORMING WORK INVOLVING UTILITIES. 8. ALL DRAINAGE PIPING SHALL BE MARKED WITH THE SEAL OF APPROVAL OF THE NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION. 9. WHERE SANITARY SEWER LINES CROSS UNDERGROUND WATER SUPPLY LINES WITH LESS THAN 8" MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCE, THE SANITARY SEWER SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE (10' EACH SIDE OF WATER MAIN) OR THE WATER LINES SHOULD BE MODIFIED TO PROVIDE 8" MINIMUM CLEARANCE. 10. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MAYBE REQUIRED TO DROP PIPE OUTSIDE OF BUILDING TO REQUIRED DEPTH TO PROVIDE CONNECTION TO AREA DEVELOPMENT UTILITY STUB. ALL DROPS IN DEPTH SHALL BE MADE WITH THE USE OF 450 FITTINGS. 11. ROUTE ALL PIPING CONCEALED ABOVE CEILINGS, WITHIN WALLS, OR IN CHASES. EXPOSED PIPING SHALL BE SLOPED AND PAINTED TO MATCH ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES. PIPING IN MECHANICAL ROOMS MAY BE EXPOSED. 12. SLEEVE AND FIRE STOP ALL PENETRATIONS (IF ANY) OF RATED WALLS, FLOORS, CEILINGS, ETC., IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE UL STANDARDS AND LOCAL CODES TO MAINTAIN RATINGS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR RATED WALLS, CEILINGS AND FLOOR INFORMATION. 13. ALL WATER PIPING INSTALLED IN EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE WALL.THE WALL INSULATION SHALL BE PLACED ON THE EXTERIOR SIDE OF THE PIPE. ANY PIPING INSTALLED IN UNCONDITIONED SPACES SHALL BE INSULATED AND PROTECTED FROM FREEZING TEMPERATURES. 14. SPACES SHALL BE INSULATED AND PROTECTED FROM FREEZING TEMPERATURES. SEE RISER DIAGRAMS FOR BRANCH PIPING DETAILS AND SIZES NOT SHOWN ON PLANS. 15. COLD AND HOT WATER PIPING SHALL BE COPPER WATER TUBE (ASTM B88) TYPE "L" WITH WROUGHT -COPPER (ANSI B16.22), OR CAST BRASS (ANSI B16.18) PRESSURE FITTINGS AND ALLOY GRADE (ANSI-ASTM B32) 95TA LEAD-FREE SOLDER JOINTS. DISINFECT WATER PIPING AFTER PRESSURE TEST WITH CHLORINE SOLUTION 50 MG-L) FOR 24 HOURS. FLUSH LINES CLEAN AFTER COMPLETION. 16. SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING SHALL BE PVC. PROVIDE CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING LOCATED IN CEILING PLENUMS. PROVIDE PVC PIPING: ASTM D2665 SCHEDULE 40. FITTINGS: PVC DWV JOINTS: ASTM WELD. 17. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AT BASE OF EACH VERTICAL STACK INCLUDING BACK, AT EACH CHANGE OF DIRECTION OF HORIZONTAL RUNS AND AT 75 FOOT INTERVALS OF HORIZONTAL RUNS. 20. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF ROOF DRAINS, PLUMBING FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS. 21. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY INVERT ELEVATIONS OF EXISTING SEWERS IN WHICH NEW SEWER LINES ARE TO BE CONNECTED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 22. ALL VENTS THRU ROOF SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 10'-0" FROM ANY AIR INTAKE. 23. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL DIELECTRIC UNIONS AT CONNECTIONS OF DISSIMILAR METALS. 24. CONTRACTOR SHALL ROUGH -IN ALL WASTE AND SUPPLIES TO SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS. ALL SUPPLIES SHALL BE VALVED. INSTALL VACUUM BREAKERS WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE. 25. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS (INCLUDING PIPE ROUTING AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS) TO ARCHITECT/ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OR PURCHASING OF ANY PIPING AND/OR EQUIPMENT. 26. PROVIDE REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY CODE. 27. ALL BELOW GRADE/SLAB COPPER PIPE SHALL BE PLACED WITHIN COPPER PIPE SLEEVE (10 MIL) POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC SLEEVING. EXTEND SLEEVING ABOVE GRADE/SLAB. 28. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED ON BRANCH LINES SERVING FIXTURES AND/OR EQUIPMENT WHEN THE PRESSURE IN THE LINE EXCEEDS 80 P.S.I. 29. ROUTE WATER LINES TIGHT TO STRUCTURE. COORDINATE ROUTING TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH OTHER DISCIPLINES. 30. IF THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS IS UNCLEAR OR HAS MORE THAN ONE INTERPRETATION, IT SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING BEFORE THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS. THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL MAKE CORRECTIONS AND/OR PROVIDE EXPLANATION IN WRITING. 31. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED AS A GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED. ALL ITEMS NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR SHOWN, BUT NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE MECHANICAL, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS FINAL BID, NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED DUE TO CONTRACTORS FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE PLANS. 32. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BASE HIS PROPOSAL UPON THE EQUIPMENT AS SCHEDULED OR SPECIFIED, USING THE MANUFACTURERS AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS. IF MORE THAN ONE MANUFACTURER IS SPECIFIED FOR ONE ITEM, ANY ONE OF THE MANUFACTURERS LISTED MAY BE USED IN THIS CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSAL. IF THIS CONTRACTOR WISHES TO USE EQUIPMENT NOT SPECIFIED, HE MUST AT THE TIME OF BIDDING SUBMIT SEPARATELY ON LETTERHEAD STATIONARY OF THE BIDDER, THE EQUIPMENT HE WOULD SUBSTITUTE AND THE COST TO BE ADDED OR TO BE DEDUCTED FROM HIS PROPOSAL. 33. THE CONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO ORDER ALL MATERIALS INSUFFICIENT TIME TO AVOID DELAYING THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT, DELAY IN DELIVERY WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED A JUSTIFIABLE REASON FOR SUBMISSION OF SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS. 34. DO NOT PENETRATE WALL FOOTINGS WITH PIPING. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO DROP FOOTINGS AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR PLUMBING SERVICES WHERE ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. ALL PIPING PENETRATING A BEARING WALL OR FOOTING MUST BE SLEEVED AND LOCATION APPROVED BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS PIPE SIZE FIXTURE MANUFACTURER MODEL # DESCRIPTION CW HW SAN VENT EXTERIOR CLEANOUT ZURN Z-1400-HD - _ _ - HEAVY TRAFFIC AREA EXTERIOR CLEANOUT WITH ACCESS COVER AND TWO-WAY FITTING. SEE PLANS FOR PIPE SIZE CONNECTION. FREEZE PROOF ENCLOSED WALL ANTI -SIPHON WALL HYDRANT COMPLETE COMPLETE WITH BRONZE CASING, WALL HYDRANT WOODFORD B65 3/4" _ _ _ VACUUM BREAKER, ALL BRONZE INTERIOR PARTS AND NON TURNING OPERATING ROD WITH FREE FLOATING COMPRESSION CLOSURE VALVE. WATER BOX DOOR SHALL BE BRASS CASTING WITH CHROME FINISH AND OPERATING KEY. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL FINAL LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS OF ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES. PROVIDE ADA CONFORMING FACTORY INSULATION KIT ON HOT, COLD AND P-TRAP WASTE PIPING AT HANDICAP DESIGNATED LAVATORIES. PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE SERVICE SIZE MATERIAL SCHEDULEITYPE INSULATION REMARKS TYPE THICKNESS ,OLD WATER ALL COPPER TYPE L FG 1" ALL SERVICE JACKETS SANITARY ALL C.I.OR PVC SERVICE WEIGHT NONE - NO HUB WASTE AND VENT PIPING IN PLENUM SPACE SHALL BE SERVICE WEIGHT CAST IRON, NO HUB. PVC WASTE LINE LENGTH TO SUIT BRONZE CLEANOUT PLUG W/COUNTER SUNK HEAD FINISHED GRADE 16" SQUARE CONCRETE PAD TWO WAY CLEANOUT R&G SLOAN PVC PART NO.3724 WASTE LINE -7 1 Exterior Cleanout Detail (ECO) Scale: None SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS DESCRIPTION ABBR. SYMBOL SANITARY PIPE ABOVE GRADE SAN SANITARY PIPE BELOW GRADE SAN VENT PIPE V ------------ COLD WATER PIPE CW - HOT WATER PIPE HW - - FLOOR CLEANOUT CO ------- 0 EXTERIOR CLEANOUT ECO WALL CLEANOUT WCO I HOSE BIBB HB C VENT THRU ROOF VTR J i I ! DIRECTION OF FLOW pp SHUT OFF VALVE 0 CAP C TEE UP C TEE DOWN ELBOW UP ELBOW DOWN C REVISION REFERENCE Q TYPICAL TYP *SOME SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT PRETAIN TO THIS PROJECT DRAWING INDEX SHEET TITLE P001 Plumbing Floor Plan, Notes, Schedules & Details Key Plan KOssi E O F- f=7 0 I� W C 0 Q 10 V CC c co (U T- _j.�. CoCCO C U 070J0 gw NULL M Z Ca �� > w J 0 - M I- (n U Cn 10 E E 0 U L N +-+ UAL Us�o t:nY >+ O _0 0 m Y N li a CU 0 06 U U) C/� CD 0 z cU _0 U- w EJ t- t- w w x co Ld ti L z w Y o LL: CO �k w 0 0 Z 0 Z cmn 0 m 0) m > cLU ~ w w co z Of ml of al O O CV C7 lh 6 Qw co p' pCD Ll.t CD LU N N N Z M COl O LU 04 a.H N CDw Z 0 �[ d U Pool C-0.9 3 \C-4 — — C-4.6 C-4.7 — — C-4 9,` { C-6 i REAR LEFT RIGHT 1 Mechanical Floor Plan NScale 1/8"=V-0" FRONT MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE AND VERIFY ALL. CLEARANCES BEFORE FABRICATION OF DUCTWORK AND PROVIDE ADDITIONAL OFFSET AND/OR CHANGES IN DUCT SIZES TO MEET FIELD CONDITIONS AND COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION SUBCONTRACTOR BEFORE ANY CONSTRUCTION WORK. 2. PROVIDE ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SERVICE AREA CLEARANCES. 3. IN GENERAL, PLANS AND DIAGRAMS ARE SCHEMATIC ONLY AND SHOULD NOT BE SCALED. 4. HVAC CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY ADDED ELECTRICAL COSTS WHICH MAY RESULT FROM SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT. 5. ALL MECHANICAL WORK SHALL MEET ALL THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE "FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2004 - MECHANICAL" & FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2006 SUPPLEMENT. 6. GUARANTEE; FOR ONE YEAR AFTER DATE OF ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER, ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP TO BE FREE FROM DEFECT. 7. DO NOT CUT STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT. ARRANGE FOR REPAIRS REQUIRED TO RESTORE OTHER WORK, BECAUSE OF DAMAGE CAUSED AS A RESULT OF MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS. 8. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TRADES' INSTALLATION SCHEDULES. COORDINATE WORK SCHEDULE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 9. WHEN THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS NOT CLEAR, OR IS CAPABLE OF MORE THAN ONE INTERPRETATION, SUCH MATTERS WILL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING BEFORE THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS. THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL MAKE CORRECTION OR EXPLANATION IN WRITING. 10. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED AS A GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED. ALL ITEMS NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR SHOWN, BUT NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE MECHANICAL, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS FINAL BID. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF/ HERSELF WITH THE PLANS. 1 OUTSIDE AIR CALCULATION RETAIL FLOOR AREA AREA (SF) CFM/S.F. (1) CFM REQUIRED CFM SUPPLIED TENANT 101 18,375 0.3 61210 6120 (1) PER TABLE 403.3 - FLORIDA BUILDING CODE- MECHANICAL 2004 HVAC LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION NEW DUCTWORK FLEXIBLE DUCT 8 SUPPLY AIR DUCT UP RETURN AIR OR EXHAUST DUCT UP DDUCTWORK TRANSITION MANUAL AIR VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER FD/AD FIRE DAMPER WITH ACCESS DOOR ® SUPPLY AIR DEVICE z RETURN AIR DEVICE ® EXHAUST AIR DEVICE O WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT SD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR A-300 DEVICE TYPE "A" - 300 CFM --------- R-------- REFRIGERATION PIPING CONDENSATE PIPING DRAWING LIST NO. TITLE M001 Mechanical Floor Plan, General Information, Schedules & Details Key Plan �Kossik Rd � QN' Ll y � US Hwy 301 � m E 0 U W O Q O L- (V ICU cc 00 N r' L m co a) U -a U w LPL. M m U- z •—� a(D �0 w i M 1— Cl) U Cn O E E O U L Q� cM � N ♦--� (U CD LLJ U�f0 z" ,, 8 �.� acn 0 nYAOf a 0 015 a� i U U) C O -+--j O Z ca L O _O ca U .ca w VJ F- /1 F- LU w s ui n: ui z wIN`",, Y o w O z O im) z V O m Ln m ~ w w m z wW o �: a- mI UI O O N W C7 to ui �I CD �I a co O WW N O 0 00 Z rn o wo C14 w a CDU m �LL- a o LU v C-0 99 -� C-1 C-2 } --------- I; C-3 i BU (C-4.�6- (C-4.7 CC-4.9 ( C-5 f �. REAR �CtiD � (C-C1 (C-C LEFTN RIGHT -' FRONT 6C.B.8) C-B. 7 C-B.)6 C-13.5 C-B.3 6C-B.2) ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN - BUILDING C Scale 1/8"=T-0" E i T-D \1J ' T-C ' (T-B T-A l� ` C-A LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE SYMBOL MANUFACTURER CATALOG NO. VOLT LAMPS MOUNTING A THOMAS SL9421-7 120 (1) 60 W INCAND CLEAR GLASS WALL MOUNT / CLEAR GLASS C 2 DAYBRITE VIN1001120-GG+VINW 120 (1) 60 W INCAND WALL MOUNT D CAPRI CMQ10H70V1-S56P 120 (1) 70 W MH RECESSED EM BEGHELLI XLP-SI 120 (INCLUDED) WALL @ 6-0" A.F.F. X BEGHELLI VA4-R-SA 120 LED (INCLUDED) UNIVERSAL ALTERNATE FIXTURES SHALL BE BY "COOPER INDUSTRY", "LITHONIA", "GENLYTE", "HUBBELL" AND "THOMAS INDUSTRY". ALL FIXTURE SUBSTITUTIONS MUST BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL (SEE SPECIFICATIONS). GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL HAVE 4. ALL EMERGENCY, EXIT AND NIGHT LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE ENERGY SAVING LAMPS AND ELECTRONIC BALLASTS, CONNECTED AHEAD OF LOCAL SWITCHES. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. PROVIDE NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE AND 5. ALL ALTERNATE FIXTURES SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR PRIOR ACCESSORIES FOR ALL FIXTURES. APPROVAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 3. PROVIDE .125 MIN. THICK LENSES FOR FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. NOTES O: O TWO 3" PVC CONDUITS ROUTED UNDERGROUND FROM TELEPHONE COMPANY NETWORK. STUB UP AND CAP AT 24" A.F.F. PROVIDE PULL CORD IN EACH CONDUIT. O THREE 4" EMT CONDUITS ROUTED UNDERGROUND FROM FUTURE UTILITY TRANSFORMER LOCATION. STUB UP AND CAP AT 6" A.F.F. PROVIDE PULL CORD IN EACH CONDUIT. O TEMPORARILY CIRCUIT EMER & EXIT LIGHTS TO HOUSE PANEL OF BUILDING B. DURING FUTURE TENANT IMPROVEMENT, EMER & EXIT LIGHTS WILL BE RECIRCUITED TO APPROPRIATE BUILDING C PANEL. 4C INSTALL LIGHT FIXTURE AND STUB 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULL CORD INTO SPACE FOR CONNECTION TO FUTURE TENANT PANEL. O J-BOX FOR FUTURE TENANT SIGN. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH ARCHITECTURAL. 6C PROVIDE 2 #12, 1 #12 E.G. IN 3/4" CONDUIT CONNECTING J-BOXES TO EACH OTHER. ] 7D PROVIDE 1" EMPTY CONDUIT WITH PULL CORD TO REAR OF SPACE AND STUB IN CEILING NEAR FUTURE PANEL LOCATION (NEXT TO CONDUIT STUB -UP AT BACK OF BUILDING). 08 CIRCUIT EXTERIOR LIGHTS TO HOUSE PANEL OF BUILDING B VIA THE LIGHTING CONTACTOR OF BUILDING B. 09 CIRCUIT EXTERIOR LIGHTS TO HOUSE PANEL OF BUILDING D VIA THE LIGHTING CONTACTOR OF BUILDING D. GENERAL NOTES: 1. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO BE PROVIDED DURING FUTURE TENANT IMPROVEMENT. LIGHTING NOTES 1. VENDOR SHALL VERIFY ALL FIXTURE QUANTITIES. 2. NOT USED. 3. MOUNTING HEIGHTS INDICATED ARE TO THE CENTER LINE OF DEVICE OR FIXTURE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. ALL FIXTURES TO BE PROVIDED BY, RECEIVED, STORED & INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY 10% ADDITIONAL SPARE OF ALL LAMP TYPES TO BE LEFT AT JOB SITE AT END OF JOB. ELECTRICAL LEGEND_ NOT ALL DEVICES SHOWN IN LEGEND ARE REQUIRED. REVIEW POWER & LIGHTING PLANS AND DETAILS FOR ITEMS WHICH APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. X EXIT LIGHT SHADE AREA INDICATES DIRECTION) LETTER INDICATES TYPE SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TO CONFIRM TYPE AND MOUNTING. BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY LIGHT TELEPHONE WALL OUTLET, PROVIDE SINGLE GANG BOX WITH 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE AND INSULATING BUSHING STUBBED INTO CEILING SPACE. MOUNT BOX 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT U.O.N. GFl GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLE, LEVITON #6898-I, MOUNT ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT U.O.N. I G. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE, LEVITON #5362-IGI MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT. U.O.N. TAMPER -RESISTANT DUPLEX RECEPTACLE PASS&SEYMOUR (TR63-HN) I.G. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE, LEVITON #5362-IGI MOUNT AT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. wPG DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, WEATHERPROOF GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER TYPE, LEVITON, MOUNT AT 18" A.F.G., U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNTED ABOVE STOREFRONT WINDOWS QUADRIPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNT AT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. JO JUNCTION BOX (FLUSH MOUNT IN FINISHED AREAS U.O.N.) 1♦ LIGHTING, POWER, OR SYSTEMS PANELBOARDS. Mss/MDP MAIN SWITCHBOARD OR MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALL, BELOW SLAB, OR ABOVE CEILING. A-1,3 CONDUIT RUN CONCEALED IN WALLS BELOW SLAB, OR CEILING SPACES. ARROWS INDICATE HOMERUN. SMALL HASHMARKS INDICATE NUMBER OF HOT CONDUCTORS, AND LARGE HASHMARK INDICATES NEUTRAL. SUBSCRIPT INDICATES PANEL AND CIRCUIT NUMBERS. GROUND CONDUCTOR REQUIRED IN ALL CONDUITS BUT NOT INDICATED. A-37:39:41 SUBSCRIPT INDICATES PANEL -AND NUMBERS WITH COLONS INDICATE 2 OR 3 POLE CIRCUITS. `o DISCONNECT SWITCH 100/3/60 DISCONNECT DESIGNATION (SIZE/POLES/FUSE) "NF" INDICATES "DE" NON -FUSED; INDICATES DUAL ELEMENT FUSES. EF MOTOR PERMANENTLY CONNECTED WITH FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (HORSEPOWER OR EQUIPMENT INDICATED) THERMOSTAT. PROVIDE SINGLE GANG BOX WITH 1/2" C. STUBBED T� INTO CEILING SPACE, MOUNT 60" A.F.F. U.O.N. (COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN) �F FIRE ALARM PULL SWITCH F� HORN/STROBE O2 ORSMOKE DETECTOR: EDWARDS #ISIGA-PS \(D\EF BATH ROOM FAN LIGHT (GROAN S150L) :to FIRE ALARM SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH FIRE ALARM SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH ® OCCUPANCY SENSOR BY WATT STOPPER. EG ABBREVIATIONS EQUIPMENT GROUND NIL NIGHT LIGHT IG ISOLATED GROUND PC PULL CHAIN WP WEATHERPROOF C/T CURRENT TRANSFORMER EC EMPTY CONDUIT EX EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER AFG ABOVE FINISH GRADE E/F-EF EXHAUST FAN U.O.N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED A/H-AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE ACC-CU CONDENSING UNIT NIC NOT IN CONTRACT RTU ROOF TOP UNIT TYP. TYPICAL FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL VTC LB LOCK BREAKER GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER TTC TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET VIA TIME CLOCK NOTE: MOUNTING HEIGHTS NOTED ARE TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE SHOWN. U.O.N. Lem U C 0 C 0 V (U acD ao U_jM �++-0J U w CU � Cu LI_ � fl. N "L cn E > 04 z n J U C 0 E E 0 U L Q� N M Cu LL Uo c .N L) U Lu C- mYN (� (A a 0 0 z_ 0 J m z Q 0- 111100 0 LL J Q CU w C) J w F- w W w Cl) Z N o a m �LL o F- z 0 z cNi� o Ln ~ w w Cn z � ao m o I+I I N f�I O O CV w m iA u) Co CI CI w N N N Co z rn o W N w N CDLu 0 tV— E101 POWER RISER NTS NEUTRAL BUS BUILDING STEEL - #3/0 3/4" x 20' COPPER CLAD GROUND RODS. SERVICE EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT GROUNDING BUS SIZE AS PER NEC 250.66 GROUNDING TABLE UNDERGROUND METAL WATER PIPE CONCRETE -ENCASED ELECTRODE 2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR DETAIL N.T.S. 1. FULL SIZE GROUND MEANS THAT GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZE SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON SERVICE EQUIPMENT ON THE POWER RISER DIAGRAM. 2. AFTER GROUNDING SYSTEM IS INSTALLED, GROUND RESISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED, TO ASSURE THAT GROUND VALUE OF 5 OHM MAXIMUM RESISTANCE IS ACHIEVED. IF NOT, ADDITIONAL GROUNDING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO MEET THE SPECIFIED VALUE. 3. ALL CONNECTIONS TO GROUND RODS SHALL BE EXOTHERMIC WELD CONNECTIONS. Con (3 W 0 CL O �Ln V Im 12 co c cuMCD c �^♦♦ U cu W_0J U w cu c u a a) �L > w �MI—U) J U cn c 0 E E O !U M� N� cu�L �oa W LU CM 8 .w U 0 C. cn mYNM a 'IT V Z J M� W 1 Q w 0 V Z 0 Z D 0 rr0nn V 0 z I.i w �A/ '/ W 3: J Q U_ CU W W JJ F WH W W Li a N z co co d J }_ L,L I-- 0 0 cn Z cn O cn m I— w w I m z Lu o 3: a m o �I NI 1- 9 O N m Lo u') aW 'co' 00I. .I W W N N N Q' Z 1 o) co C N N O Z L� L� O FWD J a E301 ci REFERENCES UTILIZE THE FOLLOWING ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS FOR DISCERNMENT WITHIN THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 2005 OSHA OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION ASA AMERICAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION IEEE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION UL UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES, INC. IES ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY ICEA INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING MATERIALS ETL ELECTRICAL TESTING LABORATORIES, INC. CBM CERTIFIED BALLAST MANUFACTURERS EIA ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION FBC FLORIDA BUILDING CODE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM READY FOR THE OWNER'S OPERATION. ANY ITEM NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR CALLED FOR IN THE SPEC'S BUT IS NORMALLY REQUIRED TO CONFORM WITH THE INTENT, ARE TO BE CONSIDERED A PART OF THE CONTRACT. THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS IS NOT TO SHOW EVERY MINOR DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ITEMS FOR A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS, OR IN THEIR OPINION FINDS OMISSIONS OR ERRORS ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, IT IS THEIR RESPONSIBILITY TO BRING IT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER/ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. IF CONTRACTOR PROCEEDS WITH ANY CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WITHOUT WRITTEN PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER/ARCHITECT THE CONTRACTOR WILL NOT BE COMPENSATED. ALL MATERIALS USED SHALL BEAR THE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY, INC. LABEL PROVIDED A STANDARD HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED FOR THE MATERIAL BEING USED. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM WITH THE LATEST EDITIONS (U.O.N.) OF THE LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES OF THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT, THE SERVING UTILITY COMPANIES, N.F.P.A., NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODES AND ORDINANCES, INCLUDING ALL AMENDMENTS TO THE N.E.C. EQUIPMENT, AND WHERE APPLICABLE, WILL BE LISTED WITH THE UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC., THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY CODE, LIFE SAFETY CODE, AND THE OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT. THE WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY ESTABLISHED BY THESE DRAWINGS AND SPEC'S SHALL NOT BE REDUCED BY THE ABOVE MENTIONED CODES. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE EQUAL TO OR EXCEED THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF NEMA, IEEE, AND UL SHOULD ANY CHANGE TO THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS BE REQUIRED TO COMPLY WITH GOVERNMENTAL REGULATIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER PRIOR TO ANY SUCH WORK BEING EXECUTED. ALL LOCAL FEES, PERMITS, AND REQUIRED INSURANCE FOR PROTECTION AGAINST PUBLIC LIABILITY OF PROPERTY DAMAGE OR THE DURATION OF THE WORK, AND SERVICES OF INSPECTION AND TESTING AUTHORITIES SHALL BE OBTAINED AND PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN HIS BID ANY COSTS TO BE INCURRED RELATIVE TO POWER SERVICE (PRIMARY AND/OR SECONDARY) AND TELEPHONE SERVICE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COOPERATE FULLY WITH THE LOCAL COMPANIES WITH RESPECT TO THEIR SERVICES. BIDDERS ARE TO SATISFY THEMSELVES AS TO THE NATURE AND SCOPE OF WORK BY VISITING THE SITE AND FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE SUBMISSION OF A BID WILL BE EVIDENCE THAT SUCH AN EXAMINATION HAS BEEN MADE. LATER CLAIMS FOR LABOR, EQUIPMENT, OR MATERIALS REQUIRED, OR FOR DIFFICULTIES ENCOUNTERED WHICH COULD HAVE BEEN FORESEEN BY AN EXAMINATION OF THE SITE PRIOR TO THE BID WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED IN A FIRST CLASS WORKMANLIKE MANNER, AND BE INSTALLED BY A LICENSED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CERTAIN MATERIALS WILL BE PROVIDED BY OTHER TRADES. EXAMINE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO ASCERTAIN THESE REQUIREMENTS. CAREFULLY CHECK SPACE REQUIREMENTS WITH OTHER TRADES AND THE PHYSICAL CONFINES OF THE AREA TO INSURE THAT ALL MATERIAL CAN BE INSTALLED IN THE SPACES ALLOTTED THERETO INCLUDING FINISHED SUSPENDED CEILINGS. MAKE MODIFICATIONS THERETO AS REQUIRED AND APPROVED. TRANSMIT TO OTHER TRADES ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR WORK TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE SECTIONS IN AMPLE TiME FOR INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ORDER THE PROGRESS OF HIS WORK TO CONFORM TO THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK OF THE OTHER TRADES AND SHALL COMPLETE THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION AS SOON AS THE CONDITIONS OF THE BUILDING WILL PERMIT. ANY COST RESULTING FROM THE DEFECTIVE OF ILL-TIMED WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE BORNE BY THE CONTRACTOR. ANY CORRECTIONS OF DEFECTS TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITHOUT ADDITIONAL CHARGE AND TO INCLUDE REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OF ANY OTHER PHASE OF THE INSTALLATION WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN DAMAGED THEREBY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SHIPPING AND STORING OF ALL PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS IN A MANNER THAT WILL PROTECT THEM FROM DAMAGE AND WEATHER. IF ITEMS ARE DAMAGED, TAKE IMMEDIATE STEPS TO OBTAIN REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR. ANY SUCH REPAIRS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR SHALL STORE MATERIALS IN SUITABLE SHELTER FROM THE ELEMENTS, BUT READILY ACCESSIBLY FOR INSPEC11ON BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER UNTIL INSTALLED. STORE ALL ITEMS SUBJECT TO MOISTURE DAMAGE IN DRY, HEATED SPACES. PROVIDE SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND AUXILIARY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS REQUIRED FOR SUPPORT OF THE WORK. FURNISH AND SET ALL SLEEVES FOR PASSAGE OF RACEWAYS THROUGH STRUCTURAL MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS OF FLOORS AND ELSEWHERE AS WILL BE REWIRED FOR THE PROPER PROTECTION OF EACH RACEWAY PASSING THROUGH BUILDING SURFACES. IF WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT IS TO BE SECURED TO WALLS THE USE OF STEEL BOLTS ARE TO BE USED TO MAINTAIN AT LEAST 1" AIR SPACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORTING WALL GROUPS OF EQUIPMENT MAY BE MOUNTED ON ADEQUATELY SIZED STEEL ANGLES, CHANNELS, OR BARS. PREFABRICATED STEEL CHANNELS PROVIDING A HIGH DEGREE OF MOUNTING FLEXIBILITY, SUCH AS THOSE MANUFACTURED BY GLOB-STRUTT, KINDORF, AND UNISTRUT, MAY BE USED FOR MOUNTING GROUPS OF EQUIPMENT. AN ACCURATE RECORD OF ALL DEVIATIONS SHALL BE KEPT AS TO THE WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND THAT WHICH IS ACTUALLY INSTALLED SO THAT A SET OF AS BUILT DRAWINGS CAN BE MADE BY CONTRACTOR, WERE UPON COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT BY THE OWNER, A NEAT AND LEGIBLE SET OF PRINTS CAN BE DELIVERED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF ONE (1) YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER, EXCEPT THAT WHERE GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES FOR LONGER TERMS ARE SPECIFIED. WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER NOTIFICATION. CORRECT ANY DEFICIENCIES THAT OCCUR DURING THE GUARANTEE PERIOD AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, ALL TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER. OBTAIN SIMILAR GUARANTEES FROM SUBCONTRACTORS, MANUFACTURERS, SUPPLIERS AND SUBTRADE SPECIALISTS. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AT THE SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION WITH THE LOCAL POWER COMPANY TO RELATE WORK WITH THE UTILITY COMPANY'S RESPONSIBILITIES TO MEET THE OWNERS SCHEDULE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SUBMITTALS FOR SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT SUCH AS SITE LIGHTING, LIGHT FIXTURES, SWITCHGEAR, WIRING DEVICES, EMERGENCY GENERATOR/TRANSFER EQUIPMENT, AND ALL SYSTEMS (FIRE ALARM, SECURITY ETC.) TEN (10) DAYS PRIOR TO BID DATE (TWO COPIES) FOR ENGINEER'S APPROVAL TO SUBMIT. ENGINEER'S APPROVAL OF THE PRIOR APPROVAL PACKAGE WILL BE CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY. FINAL APPROVAL WILL BE CONTINGENT UPON REVIEW OF FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS. ALL PROPOSED ALTERNATES MUST BE INDUSTRY STANDARD EQUALS TO THE ITEMS SPECIFIED AS THE BASIS OF DESIGN; HOWEVER, IF THE ITEMS ARE NOT CONSIDERED EQUAL BY THE ENGINEER, IT SHALL BE DISAPPROVED FOR FINAL SUBMITTAL IF ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR/GENERAL CONTRACTOR DOES NOT SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER FOR ITEMS LISTED ABOVE, ELECTRICAL ENGINEER WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY, AND OR OMISSIONS OR ERRORS DUE TO SHOP DRAWINGS NOT SUBMITTED. SHOP DRAWINGS WILL ONLY BE REVIEWED TWICE AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT. ADDITIONAL SHOP DRAWING REVIEWS SHALL BE INVOICED AT 385.00 PER HOUR, BILLABLE TO THE SUB -CONTRACTOR. C.O.D. ALTERNATE SITE FIXTURES SHALL INCLUDE A COMPUTER GENERATED POINT-TO-POINT PHOTOMETRIC CALCULATION BASED ON THE PLANS (FIXTURE CHARACTERISTICS AND POLE PLACEMENT SHALL NOT BE ALTERED). THIS DIAGRAM SHALL SHOW COMPOSITE VALUES OF THE ILLUMINANCE PROJECTED FROM THE ARRANGEMENT OF LIGHT SOURCES AS SHOWN ON PLAN. COMPUTER PLOT DIAGRAM SHALL ALSO SHOW THE LOCATIONS OF THE POLES, SPACING BETWEEN POLES, THE MOUNTING HEIGHT USED IN THE CALCULATIONS, AND THE FIXTURE CATALOG NUMBER BEING USED. A COMPLETE SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE JOB SITE WITH COLORED MARKINGS INDICATING PROGRESS OR WORK. THIS SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS IS TO BE SEPARATE FROM AND IN ADDITION TO CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SET. EVERY UNIT OF EQUIPMENT, DEVICE, CONDUIT AND WIRE IS TO BE MARKED WHEN INSTALLED. USE GREEN TO INDICATE INSTALLATION AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND USE RED TO INDICATED FIELD CHANGES. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, THIS SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS IS TO BE TURNED OVER TO, AND BECOME PROPERTY OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THE DRAWINGS FROM TIME TO TiME TO INDICATE CHANGES IN THE WORK. WHEN REVISED DRAWINGS AND/OR ANY REVISIONS ARE ISSUED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EVALUATE THE CHANGES PROMPTLY. BEFORE INSTALLATION OF ANY ITEM OR PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK INDICATED BY THE REVISED DRAWING OR REVISIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING THAT THE REVISED DRAWINGS INVOLVE AN ADDITION OR DEDUCTION OF A SPECIFIC AMOUNT OF MONEY TO THE CONTRACT PRICE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT PROCEED WITH THE REVISED WORK WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER/OWNER OF THE COST OF THE REVISED WORK. ALL LOAD DATA HAS BEEN BASED ON INFORMATION GIVEN ENGINEER/ARCHITECT AT THE TiME OF DESIGN. VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATINGS BEFORE ORDERING. FURNISH ANO INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES, WIRING AND CONNECTIONS ON AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AS SHOWN ON PLANS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR REGARDING SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF ALL REQUIRED CONTROLS. SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES STMDARDS EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY GOVERNING CODES AND BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, COMPLY WITH THE LATEST APPLICABLE PROVISIONS AND LATEST RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: 1. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT a U.L STANDARD UL-6 b A.N.S.I. C80-1 c FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW-C-581E 2. INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT a U.L STANDARD UL-1242 b FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW-C-581E 3. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING a U.L STANDARD UL-7971 b A.N.S.I. C80-3 c FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW-C-563 4. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT a) U.L STANDARD UL-1 5. LIQUID TiGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT a) U.L STANDARD UL-360 6. NON-METAWC CONDUIT a U.L STANDARD UL-651 b A.N.S.I. STANDARD F512 c N.EM.A. STANDARD TC-2 d FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS GSA-FSS AND W-C-1094-A 7. WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS a) U.L STANDARD UL-870 DO NOT USE ALUMINUM CONDUIT FOR ANY PURPOSES. I SPECIRCA7MS HAVE BEEN WRITiEN WITH THE KIENT OF VARIOUS EQUIPMENT BEING INSTALLED. NOT ALL EQUIPMENT MAY BE REQUIRED ON INS PROJECT. RENEW POWER, LIGHTING PLANS AND DETAILS FOR 17MS AND/OR EQUIPMFNT THAT WILL APPLY TO 7HIS PROJECT. RACEWAY TYPES STANDARD THREADED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT. 1. RIGID CONDUIT HEAVY WALL. GALVANIZED. 2. THREADED TYPE FITTINGS: ERICKSON COUPLINGS WHERE THREADED CANNOT BE USED. INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT 1. LIGHT WEIGHT RIGID STEEL CONDUIT. 2. THREADED TYPE FITTINGS: ERICKSON COUPLINGS WHERE THREADED CANNOT BE USED. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING 1. CONTINUOUS, SEAMLESS TUBING, GALVANIZED OR SHERADIZED ON THE EXTERIOR, COATED ON THE INTERIOR WITH A SMOOTH HARD FINISH OF LACQUER, VARNISH, OR ENAMEL 2. COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS: a INDOOR AND TWO (0) INCHES IN SIZE AND SMALLER, SHALL BE STEEL SET -SCREW TYPE FITTINGS. b 2 1/2" SIZE AND LARGER MUST EMPLOY STEEL COMPRESSION GLAND FITTINGS. c OUTDOOR SHALL BE RAINTIGHT STEEL COMPRESSION GLAND FITTINGS. 3. INDENT TYPE FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE USED. 4. ALL CONNECTORS SHALL HAVE INSULATED THROAT. 5. WHERE INSTALLED IN SLAB OR CONCRETE WORK, PROVIDE APPROVED CONCRETE TIGHT FITTINGS. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT 1. SINGLE STRIP, CONTINUOUS, FLEXIBLE INTERLOCKED, DOUBLE -WRAPPED STEEL, GALVANIZED INSIDE AND OUTSIDE, FORMING SMOOTH INTERNAL WIRING CHANNEL 2. MAXIMUM LENGTH: (SIX 6) FEET. 3. EACH SECTION OF RACEWAY MUST CONTAIN AN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING WIRE BONDED AT EACH END AND SIZED AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE CONNECTORS WITH INSULATING BUSHINGS. 4. STEEL SQUEEZE -TYPE OR STEEL SET SCREW TYPE FITTINGS. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONDUIT 1. SAME AS FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT EXCEPT WITH TOUGH, INSERT WATER -TIGHT PLASTIC OUTER JACKET. 2. CAST MALLEABLE IRON BODY AND GLAND NUT, CADMIUM PLATED WITH ONE-PIECE BRASS GROUNDING BUSHINGS WHICH TREAD TO INTERIOR OF CONDUIT. SPIRAL MOLDED VINYL SEALING RING BETWEEN GLAND NUT AND BUSHING AND NYLON INSULATED THROAT. NON-MATALUC RACEWAY 1. COMPOSED OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE SUITABLE FOR 90 DEGREES C. 2. RACEWAY, FITTINGS, AND CEMENT MUST BE PRODUCED BY THE SAME MANUFACTURER WHO MUST HAVE HAD A MINIMUM OF TEN (10) YEARS EXPERIENCE IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS MUST HAVE A TENSILE STRENGTH OF 7,000-7,200 PSI AT 73.4 DEGREES F., FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF 12,000 PSI AND COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 9,000 PSI. 4. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SOLVENT CEMENTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE MANUFACTURER. ALL UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3/4" GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT OR SCHEDULE 40 PVC. ALL OTHER RACEWAYS TO COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODES. WHERE RIGID STEEL CONDUIT IS USED, IT SHALL BE COMPLETELY COATED WITH AN ALKALI AND RUST RESISTANT BITUMASTiC PAINT, KOPPER NO. 50, AND THREADS SHALL BE COATED WITH ZINC CHROMATE. RIGID STEEL SHALL ALSO BE USED WHEN CONDUIT IS EXPOSED TO EXTERIOR ENVIRONMENT SUCH AS EXTERIOR OF BUILDING OR WHERE IT IS EXPOSED AND SUBJECT TO DAMAGE, INSIDE OF BUILDING. ALL BOXES SHALL BE RECESSED (FLUSH) IN WALLS OR CEILINGS WHENEVER POSSIBLE RACEWAYS IN HUNG CEILING SHALL BE RUN ON AND SECURED TO SLAB OR PRIMARY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OF CEILING, NOT TO LATHING CHANNELS OR T-BARS, Z-BARS, OR OTHER ELEMENTS WHICH ARE THE DIRECT SUPPORTS OF THE CEILING PANELS. SECURE CONDUIT FIRMLY TO STEEL BY CLIPS AND FITTINGS DESIGNED FOR THAT PURPOSE INSTALL AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE BUT NOT LESS THAN 1'-0' ABOVE HUNG CEILINGS. SUPPORT RACEWAYS AT INTERVALS NO GREATER THAN TEN (10) FEET AND WITH ONE SUPPORT WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF EACH COUPLING, BOX, FITTING, OR OUTLET BOX. PROVIDE ONE SUPPORT WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF EACH ELBOW OR BEND. OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOA CAST TYPE CONDUIT BOXES, OUTLET BODIES AND FITTINGS 1. PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNTED OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES, IN INDOOR LOCATIONS, WHERE EXPOSED TO MOISTURE AND IN OUTDOOR LOCATIONS. 2. USE FERROUS ALLOY BOXES AND CONDUIT BODIES WITH RIGID STEEL OR IMC. 3. COVERS. CAST OR SHEET METAL UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED. 4. TAPERED THREADS FOR HUBS. GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL OUTLET BOXES 1. GENERAL a) PRESSED STEEL, GALVANIZED OR CADMIUM -PLATED, MINIMUM OF FOUR (4') INCHES, OCTAGONAL OR SQUARE, WITH GALVANIZED COVER OR EXTENSION RING AS REQUIRED. 2. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE BOX, INDOORS a) NOMINAL FOUR (4") INCH SQUARE, 1-1/2" OR 2-1/8" DEEP AS REQUIRED, WITH RAISED COVER UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. GANGABLE BOXES SHALL NOT BE USED. 3. TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX, INDOORS a) NOMINAL FOUR (4") INCH SQUARE, 2-1/8" DEEP, WITH RAISED COVER UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, GANGABLE BOXES SHALL NOT BE USED. 4. LIGHTING FIXTURE BOX a FOUR (4") INCH OCTAGON WITH 3/8" FIXTURE STUD. b FOR SUSPENDED CEILING WORK, FOUR (4") INCH OCTAGON WITH REMOVABLE BACKPLATE WHERE REQUIRED, AND TWO (2) PARALLEL BARS FOR SECURING TO THE CROSS -FURRING CHANNELS AND EXTEND FLEXIBLE CONDUIT TO EACH FIXTURE. 5. PLUG ANY OPEN KNOCKOUTS NOT UTILIZED. BACK-TO-BACK OUTLETS IN THE SAME WALL, OR "THRU-WALL" TYPE BOXES ARE NOT PERMITTED. PROVIDE TWELVE (12") INCHES (MINIMUM) SPACING FOR OUTLETS SHOWN ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF A COMMON WALL TO MINIMIZE SOUND TRANSMISSION. PROVIDE TWENTY FOUR (24") INCH (MINIMUM) HORIZONTAL SPACING FOR OUTLETS SHOWN ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF A FIRE RATED WALL TO MAINTAIN FIRE RATING. ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN AN APPROVED RACEWAY, EMT, IMC, RIGID GALVANIZED CONDUIT OR SCHED. 40 P.V.C. THERE SHALL BE NO TYPE NM, MC, ELECTRICAL NON-MATALLIC TUBING, AND FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT USED FOR BRANCH CIRCUITING. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF 120V CIRCUITS ALLOWED IN A COMMON CONDUIT SHALL BE SIX (6). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL STRICTLY CONFORM TO THE N.E.C. REQUIREMENTS OF DERATING FOR CONDUCTOR AMPACITY AND CONDUIT FILL NO CONDUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED EXPOSED ON ROOF. SECTION 16120 WERE AND CABLE PRODUCTS CONDUCTOR 1. ELECTRICAL GRADE ANNEALED COPPER. TINNED IF RUBBER INSULATED, AND FABRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM STANDARDS. MINIMUM SIZE #12 FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS AND #14 FOR CONTROL WIRING. 2. THE CONDUCTORS ILLUSTRATED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE COPPER. STRANDING 1. #12 AND #10 SOLID. 2. CABLES LARGER THAN #10, STRANDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM CLASS B STRANDING DESIGNATIONS 3. CONTROL WARES STRANDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM CLASS B STRANDING DESIGNATIONS INSULATED SINGLE CONDUCTORS 1. TYPE THHN/THWN - FLAME RETARDANT. HEAT -RESISTANT THERMOPLASTIC INSULATION. NYLON JACKET RATED FOR 90 C DRY/75C WET OPERATION. USE FOR BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING. 2. USE TYPE THHN/THWN OR RHW OR XHHW, RATED FOR 90 C. FOR FEEDER CIRCUITS. COLOR CODING 1. PROVIDE CONSISTENT COLOR CODING OF ALL CIRCUITS AS FOLLOWS: a) 1) 0/2� VOLTS A C BLACK II) PHASE B - RED III) PHASE C - BLUE iv) NEUTRAL - WHITE v) GROUND - GREEN b) 277/480 VOLT CODE 1) PHASE A - BROWN II) PHASE B - ORANGE III PHASE C - YELLOW IV NEUTRAL -WHITE v) GROUND - GREEN 2. COLOR -CODE WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MECHANICAL AND/OR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WIRING DIAGRAMS FURNISHED WITH THE EQUIPMENT. FACTORY COLOR CODE WIRE NUMBER 6 AND SMALLER. WIRE NUMBER 4 AND LARGER MAY BE COLOR CODED BY COLOR TAPPING OF THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE EXPOSED ENDS. CONNECTORS 1. MAKE CONNECTIONS, SPLICES, AND TAPS AND JOINTS WITH SOLDERLESS DEVICES, MECHANICALLY AND ELECTRICALLY SECURE PROTECT EXPOSED WIRES AND CONNECTING DEVICES WITH ELECTRICAL TAPE OR INSULATION TO PROVIDE PROTECTION NOT LESS THAN THAT OF THE CONDUCTOR. 2. ELECTRICAL TAPE SHALL BE SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR USE AS INSULATING TAPE. SUPER 33+ SCOTCH VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE AS MANUFACTURED BY 3M SHALL BE EQUAL 3. USE LUBRICANT WHERE THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE TO CONDUCTORS EXISTS. USE ONLY A LUBRICANT APPROVED BY THE CABLE MANUFACTURER AND ONE WHICH IS COMPARABLE WITH CABLE AND RACEWAYS EXECUTION WIRE AND CABLE 1. USE f12 AWG MINIMUM FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS WHOSE LENGTH FROM THE PANEL TO FURTHEST OUTLET DOES NOT EXCEED 100 FEET (HORIZONTAL RUN) FOR 120-VOLT CIRCUITS OR 200 FEET FOR 277-VOLT CIRCUITS. USE #10 AWG OR LARGER FOR LONGER RUNS. 2. FLASHOVER OR INSULATION VALUE OF JOINTS SHALL BE EQUAL TO THAT OF THE CONDUCTOR. PROVIDE UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES LISTED CONNECTORS RATED TO 600 VOLTS FOR GENERAL USE AND 1,000 VOLTS FOR USE BETWEEN BALLASTS AND LAMPS OR GASEOUS DISCHARGE FIXTURES. 3. USE TERMINATING FITTINGS, CONNECTORS, ETC., OF A TYPE SUITABLE FOR THE SPECIFIED CABLE FURNISHED. MAKE BENDS IN CABLE AT TERMINATION PRIOR TO INSTALLING COMPRESSION DEVICE MAKE FITTINGS TIGHT. 4. EXTEND WIRE SIZING FOR THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF A CIRCUIT, FEEDER, ETC. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE GENERAL INSTALLATION 1. PROVIDE TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIALS TO PULL ALL WIRE AND CABLE INTO PLACE AND TO MAKE REQUIRED SPLICES AND TERMINATION. 2. WIRE AND CABLE IN CONDUIT, DUCT OR WIREWAY a UTILIZE ROLLER BEARING SWIVEL TO PREVENT TWISTING OF CABLE ENTERING CONDUIT OR DUCT. b TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID ENTRANCE OF DIRT AND WATER INTO CONDUIT AND DUCTS. c CLEAN EXISTING CONDUITS AND DUCTS TO REMOVE ANY PULLING COMPOUND PRIOR TO PULLING NEW CABLES. d DO NOT DAMAGE CONDUCTOR INSULATION, BRAID JACKET OR SHEATH. e DO NOT BEND CONDUCTOR TO LESS THAN MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED RADUIS. fl MAKE SPLICES ONLY IN PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES AND OUTLET BOXES. g) UTILIZE CABLE REELS ON JACKS FOR PULLING THROUGH PULL BOXES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS SO BENDS WILL NOT BE EXCESSIVE AND CONDUCTORS WALL NOT TOUCH SHARP EDGES; USE FEEDING TUBE WHERE REQUIRED. h) FOR LARGE DIAMETER CABLES, UTILIZE PROPERLY SIZED PULLING GRIPS. I) DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED PULLING TENSION OF WIRE AND CABLE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. TEST SYSTEM WIRING FOR CONTINUITY, GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS PRIOR TO CONNECTION OF ANY EQUIPMENT. 2. TEST FINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS FOR CONTINUITY OF GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS. 3. INSULATION RESISTANCE OF FEEDERS AND SUBFEEDERS a) TEST WITH MEGGER FOR INSULATION RESISTANCE. b CORRECT FAULTS AND REPLACE SECTIONS WITH FAULTY INSULATION. c DEMONSTRATE INSTALLATION IS FREE OF GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS AND THAT INSULATION RESISTANCE COMPLIES WITH ICEA VALUES 4. TEST DIRECT BURIAL CABLES AFTER COMPLETION OF BACKFlWNG. SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES RXECU'1ZON SWITCHES 1. PROVIDE SPECIFICATION GRADE, FLUSH MOUNTING, QUIET -OPERATING AC TYPE, WITH TOGGLE OPERATOR, HEAT -RESISTANT PLASTIC HOUSING AND SELF GROUNDING METAL STRAP. SILVER OR SILVER ALLOY CONTACT. DESIGN FOR SIDE OR BACK WIRING WITH UP TO NUMBER 10 WIRE. VERIFIED BY UL TO MEET OR EXCEED FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WS-896E. USE SINGLE -POLE, DOUBLE -POLE, 3-WAY, 4-WAY, LIGHTED, PILOT OR KEYED TYPE, AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS OR REQUIRED. PROVIDE IVORY COLOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE SWITCHES ARE INDICATED TO BE INSTALLED NEAR DOORS, CORNER WALLS, ETC. MOUNT SAME NOT LESS THAN 2" AND NOT MORE THAN 18" FROM TRIM. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH THE ARCHITECT. 3. CAREFULLY COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF SWITCHES TO INSURE LOCATIONS AT THE STRIKE SIDE OF DOORS. 4. FURNISH AND INSTALL AN ENGRAVED LEGEND FOR EACH SWITCH THAT CONTROLS EXHAUST FANS, MOTORS, EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS, ETC., NOT LOCATED WITHIN SIGHT OF THE CONTROLLING SWITCH. RECEPTACLES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, MOUNT RECEPTACLE VERTICALLY WITH U-SHAPED GROUND POSITION ON BOTTOM. ALL GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SHALL BE THE PRODUCT OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. CATALOG NUMBERS LISTED ARE LEVITON: HOWEVER, COMPARABLE DEVICES BY PASS & SEYMOUR, BRYANT, OR ARROW HART WILL BE ACCEPTED. COLOR OF DEVICES AND PLATES SHALL BE DICTATED BY ARCHITECT/OWNER. A. SWITCHES: LEVITON #CSB1-201 B. RECEPTACLES: LEVITON OBR20-1 C. COVER PLATES: SMOOTH PLASTIC NOTE: ALL OTHER REQUIRED DEVICES SHALL MATCH IN COLOR AND STYLE. GROUND FAULTINTERRUPTERS 1. SWAB ALL CONDUITS CLEAR OF MOISTURE 2. DO NOT COMBINE G.F.I. PROTECTED CIRCUITS WITH OTHER CIRCUITS IN SAME RACEWAY. 3. LIMIT MAXIMUM NUMBER OF G.F.I. PROTECTED CIRCUITS IN ANY ONE RACEWAY TO A MAXIMUM OF ONE CIRCUIT. 4. GFCI DEVICES SHALL BE ARRANGED TO BE EASILY LOCATED a) LABEL DOWNSTREAM RECEPTACLES TO INDICATE THE GFCI LOCATION WHERE RECEPTACLES ARE MORE THAN 20' FROM THE GFCI DEVICE. b) GFCI DEVICES LOCATED IN RESTROOMS SHALL NOT FEED THROUGH TO PROTECT DEVICES IN OTHER ROOMS. SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS NAMEPLATES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, NAMEPLATES SHALL BE BLACK LAMACOID PLATES WITH WHITE ENGRAVED UPPER CASE LETTERS ENCLOSED BY WHITE BORDER ON BEVELED EDGES. 2. NAMEPLATES FOR EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIED BY THE EMERGENCY SYSTEM, SHALL BE RED LAMACOID WITH WHITE LETTERING. 3. ALL NAMEPLATES SHALL bE ENGRAVED AND MUST BE SECURED WITH RIVETS, BRASS OR CADMIUM PLATE SCREWS. THE USE OF DYMO TAPE OR THE LIKE IS UNACCEPTABLE. CABLE TAGS AND WIRE IDENTIFICATION LABELS 1. CABLE TAGS SHALL BE FLAMEPROOF SECURED WITH NYLON TIES. 2. WIRE MARKERS SHALL BE PREPRINGTED CLOTH TAPE TYPE OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 3. LABEL DESIGNATIONS, NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGES APPLIED TO THE COVERS OF ALL MEDIUM AND LOW VOLTAGE PULL, SPLICE AND JUNCTION BOXES. EXECUTION SWITCHBOARDS. 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A MASTER NAMEPLATE FOR EACH SWITCHBOARD, ENGRAVED WITH THE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. MOUNT AT TOP OF INCOMING SECTION. 2. PROVIDE ON EACH MAIN SWITCH AN IDENTIFYING NAMEPLATE PANELBOARDS 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A NAMEPLATE FOR EACH PANELBOARD AND LOAD CENTER ENGRAVED WITH THE IDENTIFICATION INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. MOUNT AT TOP OF PANEL DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A NAMEPLATE FOR EACH DISCONNECT SWITCH ENGRAVED WITH EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION WHICH THE DISCONNECT SERVES. SECTION 16431 SiOITCHBOARDS PRODUCTS APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. ALL SWITCHBOARDS ARE TO BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER AS THE PANELBOARDS 2. SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCTS BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS: a SQUARE D b CUTLER -HAMMER c GENERAL ELECTRIC d SIEMENS ITE RATINGS 1. THE ASSEMBLY SHALL BE RATED TO WITHSTAND MECHANICAL FORCES EXERTED DURING SHORT CIRCUIT CONDITIONS WHEN CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO A POWER SOURCE HAVING AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ENCLOSURES 1. PROVIDE NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES WHERE LOCATED INDOORS IN DRY LOCATIONS. 2. PROVICE NEMA 3R ENCLOSURES WHERE LOCATED OUTDOORS AND LOCATIONS SUBJECT TO THE ELEMENTS. FINISH 1. ALL EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR STEEL SURFACES OF THE SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE PROPERLY CLEANED AND PROVIDED WITH A RUST -INHIBITING PHOSPHATIZED COATING. COLOR AND FINISH OF INDOOR SWITCHBOARDS SHALL BE ANSI 61 LIGHT GRAY. 2. OUTDOOR SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH THE BUILDING. SECTION 16450 GROUNDING SUBMIT TAi9 1. SUBMIT TEST REPORTS CERTIFYING RESISTANCE VALUES FOR BURIED OR DRIVEN GROUNDS AND WATER PIPE GROUNDS. PRODUCTS MATERIALS 1. GROUND CABLES: GREEN COLOR CODED, INSULATED, ANNEALED STRANDED TINNED COPPER WIRE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2. GROUND RODS: a) COPPER -CLAD STEEL FABRICATED BY MOLTEN WELDING PROCESS. b DIAMETER: 5/8 INCH. USE 3/4 INCH FOR ROCKY SOIL c LENGTH: 10 FEET. GENERAL 1. ALL GROUND WIRES AND BONDING JUMPERS SHALL BE STRANDED COPPER INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. ALL GROUND WIRES SHALL BE WITHOUT JOINTS AND SPLICES OVER ITS ENTIRE LENGTH. 2. THE SYSTEM NEUTRAL SHALL BE GROUNDED AT THE SERVICE ENTRANCE ONLY, AND KEPT ISOLATED FOR GROUNDING SYSTEMS THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING. 3. EACH SYSTEM OF CONTINUOUS METALLIC PIPING AND DUCTWORK SHALL BE GROUNDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 4. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BONDED TO THE BUILDING DQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM. THIS SHALL INCLUDE BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO. FANS, PUMPS, CHILLERS, ETC. 5. PVC CONDUITS AND PORTIONS OF METALLIC PIPING AND DUCT SYSTEMS WHICH ARE ISOLATED BY FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, INSULATED COUPLINGS, ETC., SHALL BE BONDED TO THE EQUIPMENT GROUND WITH A FLEXIBLE BONDING JUMPER, OR SEPARATE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS 1. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS AND SHALL BE GROUNDED TO BUILDING STEEL. COLD WATER PIPES, ETC., OR AN ALTERNATE GROUNDING MEANS. 2. A SEPARATE, GREEN TYPE THW COPPER GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE RUN FROM GROUND LUG OF EACH GROUNDED RECEPTACLE TO AN APPROVED CONNEC71ON INSIDE THE ENCLOSING STEEL OUTLET BOX. DEVICE MOUNTING SCREWS SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED AN APPROVED GROUND. 3. A SEPARATE GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EVERY CONDUIT AND RACEWAY AND SECURELY BONDED IN AS APPROVED GROUNDING TERMINAL AT BOTH ENDS OF THE RUN. THE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 250 OF THE N.E.C.. CONTRACTOR SHALL SIZE CONDUIT TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL CONDUCTOR. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES 1. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES GROUND LUG SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE RESPECTIVE OUTLET BOXES. 2. PROVIDE INSULATED GROUND WIRE FOR EACH ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE GROUND WIRE SHALL SERVE ONLY THOSE RECEPTACLES WHICH ARE ISOLATED. ROUTE GROUND CONDUCTOR TOGETHER WITH PHASE AND NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS IN A COMMON RACEWAY. 3. TERMINATE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE AT THE GROUND FROM THE SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM SERVING THE RECEPTACLES. GROUND CONDUCTORS 1. SIZE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR AS REQUIRED BY NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE SECTION 16460 NOT USED ON TffiS PROJECT GENERAL 1. ALL SWITCHGEAR, PANELS, STARTERS, CONTACTORS ETC., SHALL BE THE PRODUCT OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER, THE SYSTEM DESIGN IS BASED ON SQUARE "D"; HOWEVER, COMPARABLE EQUIPMENT BY G.E., & SEIMENS ONLY WILL BE ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES. TANDEM AND HALF -SPACE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL NOT BE USED. 2. ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE DESIGNED AND SERIES RATED, AS PER SQUARE "D" SPECIFICATIONS. IF AN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER IS SUBSTITUTED, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROPERLY SERIES RATE ALL PANELS. 3. TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT INDEX SHALL BE AFFIXED TO INSIDE SURFACE OF EACH PANELBOARD DOOR, CLEARLY INDICATING AREA AND TYPE OF LOAD SERVED BY EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE, INCLUDING SPARES. HAND PRINTED WALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 4. ENGRAVED, LAMINATED PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION PLATES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ON ALL PANELS AND SWiTCHGEAR. PLATES SHALL BE AFFIXED TO FRONT OF PANELS, INDICATING PANEL NAME, VOLTAGE AND AMPERAGE. INSTALLATION 1. MOUNT ALL PANELS AT A MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 6 FEET 6 INCHES TO TOP UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE FLUSHED MOUNTED, THE FIRE INTEGRITY OF THE WALL IN WHICH IT IS INSTALLED MUST BE MAINTAINED. 3. NEATLY ARRANGE BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRES AND TIE TOGETHER IN EACH GUTTER WITH THOMAS do BETTS NYLON "TY-RAPS'. OR APPROVED EQUAL AT MINIMUM 4 INCH INTERVALS. 4. PLUG ALL KNOCKOUTS REMOVED AND NOT UTILIZED. 5. PROVIDE NAMEPLATE AND FILL OUT PANEL DIRECTORY. FOR REMODAL WORK OR CHANGES, TRACE CIRCUITS TO DETERMINE LOADS AND PROVIDE NEW UPDATED DIRECTORY. TOUCH UP AND CLEANING 1. VACUUM ALL BACKBOXES CLEAN OF DEBRIS AFTER INSTALLATION AND PRIOR TO CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. 2. TOUCH UP SCRATCH MARKS, ETC. WITH MATCHING PAINT. SECTION 16475 FUSES 600V AND LESS GENERAL 1. ALL FUSES FOR SAFETY SWITCHES SHALL BE DUAL ELEMENT, CARTRIDGE TYPE. FUSES SHALL BE THOSE MANUFACTURED BY EITHER SUSSMAN OR LITTLEFUSE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH TO THE OWNER ONE SPARE FUSE FOR EACH SIZE AND TYPE OF FUSE INSTALLED. FUSES 600 AMPS OR LESS SHALL BE CLASS RK1, TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FUSES OVER 600 AMPS SHALL BE CLASS "L" INSTALLATION 1. FUSES SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL EQUIPMENT IS READY TO BE ENERGIZED. 2. PROVIDE AND INSTALL FUSES OF PROPER TYPE, VOLTAGE AND AMPERE RATINGS FOR ALL FUSIBLE DEVICES FURNISHED. 3. LABELS a) APPLY APPROPRIATE LABEL WITHIN EACH SWITCH, MOTOR STARTER, OR PANEL BOARD DOOR OR AT LOCATION NEXT TO FUSE CUPS, WHERE FUSES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. FILL-IN IN INK BLANK SPACES ON LABELS FOR NON-STANDARD FUSES WITH APPROPRIATE FUSE DATA. SECTION 16476 DISCONNECT SNITCHES GENERAL 1. DISCONNECT SWATCHES SHALL BE H.P. RATED, GENERAL DUTY, QUICK -MAKE, QUICK -BREAK TYPE ENCLOSURES SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY N.E.C. AND LOCATION (WEATHERPROOF, EXPLOSIONS PROOF, ETC.). ENGRAVED LAMINATED PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION PLATES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ON ALL DISCONNECT SWATCHES, CONTACTORS AND STARTERS. SECTION 16500 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES PRODUCTS LUMINAIRES 1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ARE LISTED IN THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 2. THE DESIGNATIONS INDICATED ON THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ARE A DESIGN SERIES REFERENCE (NOT NECESSARILY A COMPLETE CATALOG NUMBER) AND DO NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT THE NUMBER, SIZE, VOLTAGE, WATTAGE, TYPE OF LAMP, BALLAST, FINISH TRIM, CEILING TYPE, MOUNTING HARDWARE OF SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED HEREINAFTER ON AS REQUIRED BY THE PARTICULAR INSTALLATION(S) AND CODE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THESE REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER FIXTURES AS REQUIRED TO GIVE PROPER INSTALLATION PER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND PER CODES. BALLASTS 1. IT IS PREFERRED THAT ALL BALLASTS SHALL BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. EVERY EFFORT SHALL BE MADE TO ELIMINATE BALLASTS FROM MULTIPLE MANUFATURERS. BALLASTS WITHIN LUMINAIRES OF A GIVEN TYPE MUST HOWEVER BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. MULTIPLE MANUFACTURERS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 2. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS. a) GENERAL ELECTRIC I) MOTOROLA c MAGNETEK FABRICATION 1. PROVIDE LUMINAIRES, COMPLETE FACTORY -ASSEMBLED AND WIRED AND EQUIPPED WITH NECESSARY SOCKETS, BALLASTS, WIRING, REFLECTORS, CHANNELS, LENSES, ETC., AND DEUVER TO JOB READY FOR INSTALLATION. MATERIALS 1. PROVIDE BALLASTS WITH VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS TO MATCH THAT OF ALL RELATED CIRCUITRY INDICATED ON DRAWINGS NO EXTRA COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED FOR FAILURE TO PROPERLY COORDINATE BALLAST VOLTAGE WITH CIRCUITRY. 2. BALLASTS FOR CONTROL OF LAMPS IN ONE HOUSING OR FIXTURE UNIT SHALL NOT CONTROL LAMPS OF AN ADJOINING UNIT. 3. GUARANTEE BALLAST FOR ONE FULL YEAR AND ONE YEAR PRORATED AS PER STANDARD MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AGAINST DEFECTS FOR A PERIOD OF 2 YEARS. GUARANTEE TO INCLUDE REPLACING DEFECTIVE BALLAST WITH NEW BALLAST. LAMPS 1. PROVIDE A COMPLETE SET OF NEW LAMPS IN EACH FIXTURE 2. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE LAMPS MUST CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING: a FLUORESCENT. T-8, 35K COLOR. b INCANDESCENT. "A" LAMPS TO BE INSIDE FROSTED RATED AT 130 VOLTS. c) LOW VOLTAGE: MR-16. EXECUTION INSTALLATION 1. INSTALL LUMINAIRES IN MECHANICAL AND UNFINISHED AREAS AFTER DUCTWORK AND PIPING INSTALLATION. ADJUST FIXTURE LOCATIONS TO PROVIDE THE BEST LIGHTING FOR EQUIPMENT ACCESS AND SERVICE LOCATIONS. LOCATE FIXTURES 8 FEET 6 INCHES ABOVE FLOOR, OR AT SUITABLE LOCATIONS WITHIN SPACE ON WALLS BUT NOT LOWER THEN 7'-O" A.F.F. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT LUMINAIRES FROM DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION OF SAME AND UP TO THE TIME OF ACCEPTANCE ANY BROKEN LUMINAIRES, GLASSWARE, PLASTICS, LAMPS ETC., MUST BE REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH NEW PARTS, WITHOUT ANY ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. 3. WHERE BALLASTS ARE FOUND TO BE PRODUCING EXCESSIVE NOISE THEY SHALL BE REPLACED. 4. INSTALL EXIT LIGHT AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS BUT NOT HIGHER THAN 10 FEET A.F.F. SIZE AND COLOR OF LETTERING SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL CODES. 5. TRACK LUMINAIRES, ADJUSTABLE LUMINAIRES, FLOODLIGHTS AND ACCENT LIGHTS SHALL BE AIMED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. OUTDOOR LIGHTING SHALL BE AIMED IN PERIODS OF DARKNESS. 6. PLUMB ALL OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS TO TRUE VERTICAL FOR BOLTED POLES, PROVIDE GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS AND NUTS. PLUMB USING A NUT ABOVE AND BELOW THE BASE PLATE ON THE ANCHOR BOLTS. PACK GROUT B P B BETWEEN BASE LATE AND CONCRETE FOOTING AND PROVIDE DRAIN HOLE BELOW BASE PLATE TO PREVENT ACCUMULATION OF MOISTURE INSIDE POLE BASE PROVIDE TWO PIECE OR INDIVIDUAL COVERS FOR NUTS EXPOSED ABOVE THE BASEPLATE OF THE SAME COLOR AS THE POLE. GROUND ALL METAL LIGHTING STANDARDS. SECTION 16610 SURGE PROTECTION 1. PROVIDE MOV TYPE ARRESTER ON THE MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECT(S) PER NEC ART. 280 AND CENTRAL FLORIDA LOCAL AMENDMENTS. 2. POWER PANEL SURGE PROTECTORS. WHERE SHOWN ON THE PLANS SHALL BE MOV SINGLE -STAGE TYPE 50,000 KA PER PHASE EDCO OR EQUAL SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS SUBMI17TALS 1. SUBMIT PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT - a) WIRING DIAGRAMS SHOWING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ALL SYSTEM COMPONETS. b DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM OPERATION. c ANNUNCIATOR SCHEDULE SHOWING TITLES FOR EACH FIRE ALARM AND SUPERVISORY ZONE. d MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE MARKED TO SHOW MODEL AND CATALOG NUMBER FOR ALL EQUIPMENT. e MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. A COMPLETE LAYOUT OF THE ENTIRE SYSTEM INCLUDING CONDUIT ROUTING, CONDUIT SIZES, WIRE SIZES AND TYPES. g PROVIDE A COLOR CODE SCHEDULE FOR WIRING. h BATTERY SIZING CALCULATIONS INDICATING CIRCUIT LOADING AND POWER SUPPLY LOADING. VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR ALL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS EXCEEDING 1.5 AMPS OR 300' LENGTH. i SUBMITTALS SHALL BE AS A COMPLETE SET. PARTIAL SUBMITTAL WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE ON LESS THAN 8 1/2" BY 11 INCH SHEETS AND SHALL IDENTIFY ALL SYMBOLS USED. 2. SUBMIT PRIOR TO BUILDING OCCUPANCY a) CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT, UPON COMPLETION OF SYSTEM VERIFICATION, A POINT -BY -POINT CHECK LIST INDICATING THE DATE AND TiME OF EACH ITEM INSPECTED AND ISSUE A RECORD OF COMPLETION CONFIRMING THAT THE INSPECTION HAS BEEN COMPLETED AND THE SYSTEM IS INSTALLED AND FUNC710NING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS s A E T s li E i 0 a 0 0�, N "' c) p Ig r9 0 9I 0 ai C) U 0 rl � 18' 0 • P..� o u w!I w al,u U r= -i U u � (3 c W O CL 0 L_ r V Ccc 00 C "" N co C (�� U �++ cu -0J U g LL a C. a)z "^^i > U cn 0 E E 0 U L N�. CQ LL c U�`�0 w M 06 1E U �� �' 0 Lu � co aw mYNO_ 0 a- N - 22 W. � 'O❑ � �d O 6"T -w 0 ' Q o O 0 0� a,-" 6- o� i A� U tn� $ �a 3 �0 V Z 0 M) W 1 U) ) Z O U LL U LLu 0- U) J 0 1f w U J w J w ww = U) a �7� z N O ccoo d co = I- t u O I- z O z cmn O m S2 m � w ~ w w Ix m z o � a- ml OI I O O N w c%> cn cn Q col I =1 CV CV N O co Z m p wto 2 o w Q N =1 J �0 U ui = � - I8 U E501 "(�lo fall TrIt c -